DataEase Reference Manual

VOLUME
3
DataBase Query Language Guide
This
menu
tree
shows
where the various DataEase

options are located. Record
Entry,
QBE-Quick
Reports,
and Database Maintenance

are discussed in Volume I.
Form
Definition
Relationships,
Definition,
Form
Definition
Menu
1.
Define a Form
2.
View or Modify a Form
3.
Define Relationships
4.
Delete a Form
5.
Reorganize a Form
and
Menu
and System
Administration are discussed

in
Volume
2.
DQL Advanced Processing is

discussed in
Volume
3.
Records Menu
Please select a form.
Enter a number from
2:
NONE
SYSTEM
STORES
3:
CALL LIST
0;
1:
DataEase Main Menu
4:
5:
1.
Form
Definition
to
PRODUCTS
EMPLOYEES
and
Relationships
3.
Record Entry
QBE-Quick Reports
4.
DQL Advanced
5.
Menu
6.
Database Maintenance
System Administration
2.
7.
Processing
Definition
The
DataEase Menu
Definition
Form
Displays
Maintenance Menu
3.
Database Status
Backup Database
Restore Database
4.
DOS
5.
Lock Database
6.
Unlock Database
2.
Functions
DataEase International Inc.

Technical Support Policy
DataEase International provides free technical support for all registered
DataEase licensees in the U.S. (support in other countries is provided by
the local distributor).
To
register,
simply
fill
out and send in the enclosed
registration card. Technical support for unregistered callers
is
limited to
30 days from the date of purchase. DataEase International reserves the

right to limit the number of calls and the call length.
The DataEase Hotline number

through Thursday,
is
1-203-374-2825. Our hours are
9AM to 8PM, and Friday, 9AM
to
6PM
Monday
EST. Please
have your DataEase serial number ready when you call. This number
located on your system diskette and on the DataEase Sign On screen.
is
YOU MUST BE REGISTERED TO RECEIVE FREE TECHNICAL

SUPPORT!
Copyright and Trademarks

DataEase and GrafTalk are registered trademarks of DataEase
International, Inc.
IBM
is
a registered trademark of International Business
Machines
Corporation.
The following companies hold trademarks on product names

italic)
which are mentioned
in the
(printed in
DataEase documentation:
Ashton-Tate: dBASE II dBASE III dBASE

MultiMate dBASE IV
III
PLUS.
Borland International: Paradox

Lotus Development Corporation: Lotus 1-2-3 Symphony"'
MicroPro
International:
WordStar
WordPerfect Corporation: WordPerfect

This manual supports DataEase Release 4.2 and higher.
No
part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval

system, or transmitted in any form or by any means: electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of the publisher.
Copyright 1988, 1989, 990 DataEa.se International

7 Cambridge Drive, Trumbull, CT 0661
(203) 374-8000
1
All rights reserved.
Printed in the U.S.A.
DataBase
g^^-mx^v'^.^-^.^'j^^^
?-^'
-.'.
s^^^
j-s-jj,
'
:.
,v.:--'.i^y^x<mre -
REFERENCE MANUAL
Volume 3
DataBase Query Language
Guide
=^
DataBase
>^^F
INTERNATIONAL
mi
U A
A E A
N C E
MANUAL
Table of Contents
1
Introduction to
INTERACTIVE
EDIT
DQL Advanced Processing
MODE
1-1
MODE
1-2
WHAT'S A QUERY?
SAMPLE QUERY AND REPORT OUTPUT
DQL PROCEDURES
Types of Procedures
Defining, Modifying, and
RUN PROCEDURE
START NEW PROCEDURE
DEFINE DATA-ENTRY FORM
How
to
a Data-entry
1-5
1-6
Running Procedures
QUICK SUMMARY OF THE DQL MENU OPTIONS
Is
1-4
1-5
First
TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS
What
1-3
1-3
THE BASIC DQL VOCABULARY

HOW TO USE THIS BOOK
1-2
1-3
Conditional Processing
What To Read
1-2
Form?
Display the Data-entry Form
Creating the Data-entry Forni
2-3
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-9
Using the Data-entry Form
2-10
Saving the Data-entry Form
2-12
Modifying the Data-entry Form
DEFINE QUERY
The DataEase Query Language
Interactive
Mode
Edit
Low
2-14
2-15
Changing Modes
High Level and
2-13
2-14
2-15
Level
Mode
Modify Query
2-18
2-19
2-20
How to Switch Modes

SAVE PROCEDURE
2-21
LOAD PROCEDURE
DELETE PROCEDURE
PRINT PROCEDURE DEFINITION
2-24
2-22
2-26
2-27
Volume
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3
Define Query:
A Low
Level Example
THE PURPOSE OF THE QUERY; A REPORT

WHICH RECORDS TO SELECT
CREATING THE QUERY
4
Define Query:
A High
Level
3-2
3-2
3-3
Example
HIGH LEVEL DQL COMMANDS

POST ORDERS
PROCEDURE
Query
4-1
4-3
4-3
for the Post Orders Procedure
Explanation of the Query
Saving the Procedure
PROCEDURE
Query
2:
CALCULATE DISCOUNT
for the Calculate Discount Procedure
PROCEDURE 3: PRINT INVOICES

Query
for the Print Invoices Procedure
THE CONTROL PROCEDURE: MAILORDER

Query
for Mail
4-3
Order Control Procedure
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-9
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-21
4-21
Explanation of the Control Procedure
4-22
Summary
4-24
(Putting
It
All Together)
Define Format/Print Style: Designing Report Output
DEFINE FORMAT
5-3
QUICK SUMMARY OF THE FORMAT MENU OPTIONS

FORMAT TYPES
5-5
Columnar Format
5-8
5-8
Field per Line Format
5-14
Record Entry Format
5-16
Template Format
5-17
GrafTalk Chart Format
5-20
Mailing Labels Format
5-25
Export Formats
5-27
CUSTOM FORMAT
Formatting
5-40
Commands
Commands
Required Formatting
Group Level Formatting Commands

Page Level Formatting
The
.call
Volume
Command
Commands
5-42
5-44
5-49
5-53
5-56
ii
DATAEASE REFERENCE MANUAL

EDITING FORMATS
Editing Function
5-58
Keys
5-58
Adding and Modifying Fields
5-60
Saving a Format
5-64
Printer Control
Commands
5-65
DEHNE PRINT STYLE

The
5-70
5-70
Print Style Specification
Defining the Report Destination
5-71
Print Style Modification
5-75
Saving/Modifying
5-79
Examples
5-80
DQL Lexicon
INTRODUCTION
DQL LEXICON TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS
6-2
Syntax Diagrams
6-2
Margin Notes
6-2
Typesize
Database Forms Used
iii
6-1
6-2
in the
Examples
6-2
Punctuation Symbols
6-3
Math Symbols
6-3
Wildcard Symbols
6-3
Comparison Symbols
6-3
Volume
TABLE OF CONTENTS
List of Figures
Introduction to
Figure
1-1
- Query
that Lists U.S. States in Alphabetical

the Report Output
Order and
1-2
Running Procedures
-The DQL Menu

2-2 - Data-entry Form Used to Specify a Single State
2-3 - Interactive Mode Screen
2-4 Procedure Definition (no Data-entry Form)
Figure 2-1
2-1
Figure
2-7
Figure
Figure
Define Query:
2-15
2-28
A Low Level Example
Low Level Example Database Forms

Account Balance Report
3-3 Sort Commands
3-4 Alphabetized Account Balance Report
Figure 3-1
3-1
Figure 3-2
3-2
Figure
Figure
Define Query:
Figure 4-1
Figure 4-2
Figure 4-3
High Level Example
- High Level Example DataBase Forms

Calculation Of Annual Variable
Christmas Order Invoice
4-2
4-13
4-17
Define Format/Print Style: Designing Report Output
Figure 5-1
Figure 5-2
Figure 5-3
Sample Report Showing Formatting Commands

~ Sample Query, Format, and Report Output
Sample Formatting Commands Used to Create
a
Custom Format
Figure 5-4
Figure 5-5
Pairing Group Formatting Commands

Report Field Definition Screen
Report Field Formula in Window
- Print Style Specification Screen
Figure 5-6
Figure 5-7
Figure 5-8
3-8
3-13
Basic Format
5-2
5-7
5-40
5-43
5-49
5-60
5-61
5-70
DQL Lexicon
Figure 6-1
Figure 6-2
Figure 6-3
Figure 6-4
Volume
- Forms and Relationship Levels

Sample Report Showing Use of Formatting Commands
- Forms and Relationship Levels
Order Entry Form Used for Transaction Processing
6-148
6-160
6-164
6-185
iv
DATABASE REFERENCE MANUAL
Chapter
Introduction to
DQL Advanced
Processing
he DataEase Query Language
(DQL) extends
the data
processing and reporting capabiHties of DataEase far

1
lets
In
you:
Design custom applications
Use
the
that input, manipulate,
and retrieve
DQL Relational Operators to find. list, modify, sort,
group, and summarize data
then go through the example

in
Chapter 3
to
gain a basic
familiarity with the process of

defining queries.
information in multiple database forms.
new user, we
recommend thai you first
read this Introduction and
If you're a
beyond those described for Quick Reports in Volume

addition to giving you full control over all aspects of querying,
report design, and formatting output, DQL Advanced Processing
in related
forms.
Experienced users will find

that the example in Chapter 4
introduces most of the DQL
vocahulaiy and demonstrates
how to construct a DQL
Control procedure.
Call and chain together menus, input forms, reports, data

imports,
- even other programs - and
into a single
link all these actions
automated Control procedure.
among
Use global variables
Create state-of-the-art transaction processing applications that

automatically enter
form
to another,
INTERACTIVE
to pass values
new
procedures.
All users will find the
DQL
Lexicon an easy-to-use. rapid

resource for locating the
correct command syntax for
any query problem.
records, post information from one
and perform batch updates
in
multiple forms.
MODE
Although DQL Advanced Processing uses the DQL to manipulate

and retrieve information from a database, you don't have to spend
time memorizing the query language to use its power. To perform
even the most complicated procedures, all you have to do is make
selections from a series of menus.

In Interactive
Mode, DataEase
activates a built-in editor that
prompts you at each step, lists all valid responses, and prevents
you from making syntax errors or spelling mistakes. Because all
features menu or command

driven query definition,
interactive prompts,
and an
automatic syntax checker.
Advanced Processing is supported by context-sensitive prompts,

even new users can easily create applications and generate complex
reports with a
1-1
minimum
of training.
Volume
INTRODUCTION TODQL ADVANCED PROCESSINC;

MODE
EDIT
As you
gain experience, you
the rapid
power
command-driven
In Edit
users.
may choose to work in Edit Mode mode preferred by DataBase
alternative
Mode you
DQL
enter
statements directly,
without the assistance of menus, prompts, or the syntax checker.
WHAT'S A QUERY?
A
query
is
a group of statements that
manipulate the information
Ask
Add,
Call other programs
in
DataBase how to
query can:
a question (e.g., which state has the most customers?)

delete, or
modify data
The DataBase Query Language

that tell
DataBase how
query
often called a report.
is
tell
a database.
words and symbols

The printed output from a
Figure 1-1 shows a report that
is
the group of
to process data.
incorporates a basic query and part of
its
report output.
SAMPLE QUERY AND REPORT OUTPUT

U.S.
Query
for
A query can
ask a question,
add. delete, or modify data,
and/or call other procedures
and external programs. The
printed output generated hy a
query is called a report.
STATE REPORT
Report Output
STATES;
Alabama
records
STATE NAME
list
In
Order
end
Alaska
Arizona
Arkansas
California
Colorado
Connecticut
Delaware
Florida
Georgia
Wyoming
Figure 1-1
Query
that Lists U.S. States in Alphabetical
Order
and the Report Output from the Query
Volume
1-2

DQL PROCEDURES
In addition to asking questions, you can use a query to update or
modify data, as well as list information stored in the database like
the example shown above. When the DQL is used to manipulate
data, the query becomes part of a procedure. A DQL Procedure
consists of several elements:
Query - this
Format -
tells
DataEase what information
this tells
DataEase how
Print Style Speciflcation - this

the output. If the output
is
Data-entry
needed
to arrange the output.
tells
DataEase where
to send
sent to a printer, the Print Style also
specifies the page dimensions

characteristics
to process.
and any special printer
to generate the hard copy.
Form - optionally lets you enter additional
information to be used
in
processing just before running the
procedure.
Types
of
Procedures
There are two basic types of DQL Procedures: Processing

procedures and Control procedures.
Processing procedure
add, delete, modify,
list,
used to directly manipulate data - to

and sort data either for the purpose of
is
updating the information stored in database forms or for

generating printed reports.
A Control
procedure does not directly manipulate data. Instead, a
There are m'o types of DQL

Procedures: Processing
procedures and Control
procedures. Processing
procedures manipulate data.
Control procedures link
procedures together. You
can use conditional actions in
both types of procedures.
single Control procedure can be used to link any
number of other
procedures together (like the macros used in many of today's
programs). This makes it possible to automate the whole series of
transactions that occur in accounting, billing, inventory control,
order-processing, and retail point-of-sale systems where data
is
posted from one form to another and records are continuously

updated.
Conditional Processing
DQL
In addition to processing data
and linking transactions, the

includes a complete set of procedural commands (including case,
ir...then, and while...do) that let you use conditional processing in
both types of procedures
run the weekly
1-3
(e.g., if
today
is
the last day of the week,
summary procedure and backup
the database).
Volume
INTRODUCTION
TO DQL
ADVANCED PROCESSING
THE BASIC DQL VOCABULARY

The basic terminology that is used
composed of eight key elements:
Commands enter,
to create a
delete, modify,
and
DQL Procedure
list
is
records; call and
execute procedures or external programs; and generate output

either on the screen, on disk, or in a printed report. There are
three groups of
DQL commands: Processing Commands,
Control Commands, and Procedural Commands.
Operators
refine
commands; they
DataBase how to
by the query's
process records, what
The basic DQL vocabulary is

composed of eight elements:
commands, operators,
functions. keyv.'ords.
relationships, report
formatting commands,
symbols, and values.
tell
execute the various operations specified
commands
(such as in what order to
statistics to generate, etc.).
There are seven groups of DQL
Operators: Comparison Operators, Sorting and Grouping

Operators, Statistical Operators. Relational Operators,
Conditional Statistical Operators, and Relational Statistical

Operators.
Functions return a specified value in a different format.

The 58 DQL functions are divided into nine groups: Date,
Financial, If. Math. Scientific, Spell, Text, Time, and
Trigonometric.
special operations, such as creating

global variables, accessing system variables,
Keywords signal
temporary and
performing conditional actions, or retrieving values from a
Many powerful DQL features;

including all the functions,
relational statistical
operators, and report
formatting options; can also
be used with Quick Reports

to enhance their output
capabilities.
Data-entry form.
Relationships link records in different forms. In a DQL

procedure, you can use both predefined and ad-hoc
relationships to access the information in a related form.
the layout of text and field
Chapter
5 in this volume provides
values for a printed report.
detailed information on how to format a report.
Formatting Commands specify
Symbols
clarify, divide,
and conclude various statements
specified in a query.
Values are the actual data that is processed by the procedure.

A value can be any number, text or numeric character string.
Most values in a query are field values from the specified
forms.
All these terms are individually defined in detail in the DQL

Lexicon, the dictionary-style reference section at the back of this
volume.
Volume
1-4
3

HOW TO USE THIS BOOK
This book
is
designed to be used as both a learning tool and a
comprehensive reference manual. Following

the information
Chapter
2.
is
organized
in five
Running Procedures
how
provides a detailed explanation of
this Introduction,
sections as follows:
to create or
modify a
DQL
procedure including: modes and levels, prompting, and function key

assignments.
Chapter
Define Query:
3.
A Low
step-by-step example that explains
Level Interactive
Mode
that
Level Example
how
to create a
a simple,
is
query
in
Low
can retrieve information from a pair of
related forms.
Chapter 4. Define Query: A High Level Example is a detailed

example that demonstrates how to create a custom application using
High Level DQL commands to link several Processing procedures
into a single automated Control procedure.
Chapter
5.
Define Format/Print Style provides complete
guidelines for designing report output with numerous examples of

default
and special report formats
that
show you how
to control the
appearance of your reports.
Chapter
6.
The
DQL
Lexicon
is
a dictionary-style reference
command, function, and

DataBase Query Language. The terms are listed in
section that defines every
order, with punctuation
What To Read
you're a
new
feature of the
alphabetical
and other symbols presented
first.
First
we recommend
you first read the

in this manual to gain a basic
familiarity with the process of defining forms and queries.
If
user,
that
DataBase Tutorial and then Chapter 3
More experienced users will find

Chapter 4 introduces most of the
that the
DQL
High Level example
vocabulary
in the
in
process
of building a Control procedure to automate the order-fulfillment
^^"'
"'"'''''
''"'"''^
'"'''''"
"'"''
DatuEase Tutoncl.
system for a hypothetical mail-order catalog company.

All users will find the
DQL
Lexicon an easy-to-use, rapid resource

command syntax for any query problem and
detailed information on the use of each command (with examples).
for locating the correct
1-5
Volumes
INTRODUCTION
TO DQL
ADVANCED PROCESSING
TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS
In
the Text
The
narrative text
printed in
Roman
UPPERCASE
is
printed in
type).
type
Roman
type (this paragraph
The names of forms are printed
is
in
(CUSTOMERS. INVOICES). The names
fields are printed in
of
SMALL CAPITALS (LAST NAME. ACCOUNT
DQL terms
are printed in lowercase bold type (for,

in a field (rather
list records, all, data-entry, etc.). When the value
than the name of the field) is meant, it is not capitalized (e.g., the
BALANCE).
customers" names).
Queries and report output are printed
in
Helvetica type as
shown
below:
Report Output
Query
for
STATES
list
Alabama
Alaska
records
STATE NAME
in
Arizona
order
Arkansas
end
Wyoming
The notes
printed in the margins contain important information on
options, and function key assignments. These

notes can also be used as a quick way to browse through the text.
DQL syntax,
On
menu
the Screen
Mode, DataEase displays DQL terms in lowercase

names
of forms and fields are automatically entered in
letters. The
used
in defining the form. When you are creating
the case that was
a query in Edit Mode, however, you can use upper or lowercase for
In Interactive
any part of the query.
When you
create a query, DataEase adds certain spacing and
indenting automatically.
spacing
if
you
like.
You can
DataEase doesn't care how commands are
spaced as long as the syntax
Volume
use different indenting and
is
correct.
1-6
3
Chapter 2
and
Defining, Modifying,
Running Procedures
hen you select
(Option 4)
from the DataBase Main Menu, DataBase displays the
DQL
menu.
Procedures
Z.
Run Procedure
Start Neu Procedure
3.
Define Data-entry Fopm
1.
îijam-niaar
Define Fornat
Define Print Style
7. Saue Procedure
8. Load Procedure
9. Delete Procedure
10. Print Procedure Definition
5.
6.
^=
ESC
[]
îj
to [E
Bi
F9 3
lili
\:iMtMll
C:\DEASE\TUTORIftL\
Figure 2-
The
DQL menu
is
--
gjg]
Database
The
4/17/89
10:12 an
DQL Menu
the starting point for all actions that utilize the
DataBase Query Language. It's the primary tool that let's you
define, modify, save, and run (execute) DQL procedures.
DQL menu
QBE
Quick Reports menu

discussed in Volume
Chapter 3. There are ten options on the
DQL menu. Of these, eight are named and function like their
counterparts on the QBE - Quick Reports menu. The two different
options on the DQL menu are Define Data-entry Form (Option 3)
and Define Query (Option 4).
The
is
similar to the
1
2-1
The
DQL menu is the starting
point for defining, modifying,

running, loading, saving, and
deleting procedures and for
defining the Data-entry form.
Format, and Print Style for a
procedure.
Volume
DEFINING, MODIFYING, AND RUNNING PROCEDURES
The Define Data-entry Form option on
QBE
the
DQL menu
Quick Reports menu. It is

many features that make DQL Advanced Processing
powerful and versatile than Quick Reports.
counterpart on the
The Data-entry form is a special data input form you

you generate different information each time you run
has no
just
far
one of the
The Data-entry form
is
special data input form you

create that lets you generate
more
different information
create that lets
each
time you run a procedure.
a procedure.
For example, if you have a procedure that lists all the employees in
your company, you can define a Data-entry form with just one field
called DEPARTMENT. Then, just before running the procedure, you
can enter the name of any department on the Data-entry form.
When you run the procedure, DataEase lists only the employees for
the specified department.
For convenience, DataEase

each time the procedure
is
lets
you redisplay the Data-entry form

lets you run the
executed. This
procedure as often as you want, using different input each time.
Using this technique you can easily generate a separate report for
each department in the company simply by entering the name of
each department, one-at-a-time, on the Data-entry form.
Although you define and save a Data-entry form like a regular
Record Entry form, the information entered on a Data-entry form is
only used to process the current procedure - it's never stored in the
DataEase provides three ways

to input information in a
procedure: the Data-entry
form and the DQL input and
record entry commands.
Each of these commands is

compared with the Data-entry
form later in this section and
each has a separate entiy
the
in
DQL Le.xicon.
database. Think of
it as a blackboard on which you enter the

you want DataEase to process. After the procedure
DataEase erases the blackboard and you can then specify
specific data
runs,
different data before running the procedure again.
the DQL menu replaces two options

on the QBE - Quick Reports menu: Define Record Selection (option
3) and Define List Fields (option 4).
The Define Query option on
The query
is
the set of instructions that tells DataEase
the data to process and what to
do with
a series of statements that use the
communicate these
in
What form
Which
What
Volume
It is
DQL vocabulary
instructions. In order to process
a database, a query must
that data.
tell
where
to find
composed of
and syntax to
any information
DataEase three things:
(or forms) contain the data to process.
The query
is
the set of
instructions that tells
DataEase where to find the

data to process and what to
do with that data. A query
must tell DataEase three
things: what form (or forms)
contain the data to process:
which records to process in
each form: and what actions
to perform using the selected
records.
records to process in each form.
actions to perform using the selected records.
2-2

QUICK SUMMARY OF THE DQL MENU OPTIONS
1.
Run Procedure
Run Procedure processes the procedure loaded in the computer's

memory. If there is no procedure in memory, DataBase prompts
you to select one from a menu that lists all the procedures available
in the
2.
database.
Start
Start
New
New Procedure
Procedure removes a previously loaded procedure from
this option when you want to create a new procedure,
memory. Use
or you want to
remove
the procedure that's currently in
Define Data-entry Form

Define Data-entry Form lets you
memory.
3.
used
at the start
define a special input form to be
of a particular procedure.
defined and filled
in just like a
Data-entry form
Record Entry form.
It's
is
most often
used to produce different output each time the procedure is run.

Once you have defined and saved the Data-entry Form as part of
a procedure, this
4.
menu
option changes to Modify Data-entry Form.
Define Query
Define Query gives you access to the DataBase Query Language.

Using the DQL, you create a query that can either ask a question,
manipulate data, generate output, or chain together any number of
separate data
management
operations.
When you
select Define
Query, you can use either Interactive Mode or Edit Mode to define
the query. Once you have defined and saved the query as part of a
procedure, this
5.
menu
option changes to Modify Query.
Define Format
Define Format lets you control the appearance of report output.

You can select one of nine predefined report formats, modify an
existing format, or create a custom format on the screen. If you
DataBase has nine predefined
skip this step, DataBase automatically creates a columnar report
custom, mailing label,

GrafTalk. and CrossView.
using field
names
as
column headings. Once you have defined and
report formats includini^:
columnar, field per
line,
record-entry, template, export,
this menu option changes

Modify Format. Chapter 5 in this volume provides detailed
information on how "to format printed reports.
saved the format as part of a procedure,

to
2-3
Volume
DEFINING. MODIFYING. AND RUNNING PROCEDURES
Define Print Style
6.
you control the type style, page size, and

The output can be sent to the
screen, a printer, or a disk file. The default destination is the
screen. Once you have defined and saved the Print Style as part
of a procedure, this menu option changes to Modify Print Style.
Define Print Style
lets
destination of the report output.
7.
Save Procedure
you permanently save a procedure as part of

select this option, DataEase prompts you
to name the procedure. If the procedure is already named,
DataEase asks whether you want to replace the original version
Save Procedure
lets
When you
the database.
with the current procedure or give the current procedure a different
name
8.
(saving both).
Load Procedure
Load Procedure
memory
list
of
you load a previously created procedure into

view it, modify it, or run it. DataEase displays a
lets
to either
the existing procedures in the database. Specify the
all
procedure you want to load by entering

corresponding number from the
9.
its
name
or the
list.
Delete Procedure
Delete Procedure
lets
DataEase displays a
you permanently delete

of
list
all
(erase) a procedure.
the existing procedures in the
database. Specify the procedure you want to delete by entering
name
or the corresponding
verify that
from the
you want
number from
to delete the
the
list.
You
procedure before
it
its
are asked to
is
removed
disk.
10. Print
Procedure Definition
Print Procedure Definition creates printed documentation for the
procedure.
.
It
\..
the layout and field characteristics of the Data-entry form,
if
has been created for the procedure.
NOTE:
includes the query detmition, the report tormat, and
one
You can quicklv and easily

generate a printed conv of the
///// definition of any DQL
Procedure.
Detailed e.xplanations of all these options except

Define Format and Define Print Style begin on the
ne.xt
page. For the explanation of these two options,

Chapter 5 in this volume.
refer to
Volume
2-4

Run Procedure
How To
Execute a Procedure
processes the procedure currently loaded

The Run Procedure option
^
,,in the computer s memory. If there is no procedure m memory,
,
DataEase displays a
for
you
to select the
When you
list
of
all
the procedures in the current database
one you want
j
Procedure
executes
Run
the
procedure that's currently
in
memory.
to run.
Run Procedure, DataEase prompts:
select
Please select the procedure
and displays the names of

Procedures
in the
all
database
to run:
the
in a
Quick Reports and
window menu on
DQL
the right side
of the screen.
When you
press
RETURN,
DataEase may display a special input
screen (such as a Data-entry form) depending on

is
how
the procedure
defined. These input screens are labelled for easy reference.
the explanation of
how
to use
For
any of them, see the corresponding
section in this volume.
While executing a procedure, DataEase displays

message in the upper right comer of the screen:
Running procedure
When
want
the procedure
procedure before
to abort the
NOTE:
You can
select
hy typing
typing the
the
PROCEDURE NAME
finished, the
is
its
the following
DQL
DQL menu
it
is
reappears. If you
ESC.
finished, press
Procedure (or any menu item)
number, moving the
hii>hlight cursor,
name of the procedure. As you are
or
typing
name. DataEase highlights the first unique
match. Press
RETURN
to select the
highlighted
item.
2-5
Volume
DEFINING, MODIFYING. AND RUNNING PROCEDURES

Start
New Procedure
How to
Start a
New Procedure
The Stan New Procedure option removes

in the
computer's
the procedure currently
memory
so you can define, load, or run a
Once
a procedure has been loaded into
different procedure.
memory, you must use
the
in
this option before
New Procedure removes

Start
memorv.
you can define another
procedure.
When you
select Start
New
Procedure, DataBase displays the
message:
New
in the
Procedure Started
upper right comer of the screen. DataBase removes the
Data-entry
Form
option
to define a Data-entry
is
in
memory
(if
highlighted.
any), and the Define
You can
select this option
form or choose any other option
that
you
want.
NOTE:
You must
select the Start
New
Procedure option
before you can run any procedure that includes a

.call
Volume
command.
2-6

Define Data-Entry
What
Is
a Data-entry
The Data-entry form
is
Form
Form?
a special type of form that lets you enter
varying information each time you run a procedure. The Data-entry
form
is
part of the procedure, just like the
report format.
procedure.
commands
You can
query definition and the
create only one Data-entry form for each
The Data-entry form

special form that lets
a
you
is
input varyini^ information

each lime you run a procedure.
However, you can use the DQL input or record entry

to allow muhiple input forms for a procedure.
The infomiation entered on
form is often used to

by a query. For example, if you have a
query that lists customers in all 50 states, you can specify the name
of just one state on the Data-entry form and limit the resulting
report to customers in the specified state. Figure 2-2 shows a
Data-entry form that lets you specify a particular state
each time you run this procedure.
the Data-entry
select the records processed
rorn:
62
Data Entry Forn For Current Balance Report
Run procedure for CUSTOMERS uho
F4iiii;nia EsciaBii
Figure 2-2
Fzama F3Bin
When
the procedure runs,

field
in
State:
FsBiiiB F6i3Hn FTtiiaiwa fbii:hki Fiaiiiaiii:
Data-entry
STATE
Hue
it
Form Used
to Specify a Single State
uses the information entered
on the Data-entry form and
lists
in the
the customers for only
the specified state.
2-7
Volume
DEFINING. MODIFYING. AND RUNNING PROCEDLRES

Define Data-Entry
How To
To
Form
Display the Data-entry Form
create the Data-entry form, select Define Data-entry
DQL
(option 3) from the
menu. DataBase
Form
Select Define Data-entry

to create the Data-entiy
Form
asks:
form.
After running the procedure, display data-entry form again?
Answer no
if
you only want
to run the procedure
once
(rather than several times using different input information
you answer no, when you run the procedure, the

Data-entry form appears on the screen once at the start of the
procedure and you enter the specific data to be used in
processing the query. When the procedure ends, DataBase
returns to the DQL menu.
each time).
If
Answer yes
if
If you tell DataBase to display

the Data-entry form when the
procedure finishes executing,

you can run the procedure
over and over, using different
data each time.
you want to run the procedure more than once

before performing any other task. If you answer yes, each time
the procedure is completed, the Data-entry form reappears and
you can enter different data to be used in processing the query
as many times as you want. When you finish running the
procedure, press ESC when the Data-entry form reappears to
return to the DQL menu.
NOTE:
The Data-entry form is used to input data at the start

of a procedure. In addition, the DQL input
command can he used to input data at any point
during a procedure. For more information about the
input command, see the
Volume
DQL
Lexicon.
2-8
DATABASE REFERENCE MANLIAL

Define Data-entry
Form
Creating the Data-entry Form
how you choose to display the Data-entry form,

DataBase displays a blank screen on which you define the
Data-entry form. In general, you define the Data-entry form the
same way you do a Record Entry form. However, because the
information on the Data-entry form is not stored in the database (as
Record Entry information is), the Data-entry form ra/wor contain:
Regardless of
Indexed
Unique
Sequenced
Data-entry form
exactly like a
is
defined
Record Entry
form.
fields
fields
To save time, you can use the

F5 COPY key to create a
Data-entiy Form hy copvini;
fields
an existing Record Entry form.
Virtual fields
Fields
with security level options
Subforms
In all other aspects, defining the Data-entry
form
is
exactly the
same as defining a Record Entry form. You type in the form

and you press FIO FIELD to define fields on the form.
text,
also use the F5 COPY key to create a Data-entry form by

copying an existing Record Entry form or copying individual fields
from the Dictionary form. See Volume 2, Chapter 2. Form
You can
Definition
and Relationships,
for
more information on how
to
define a form.
2-9
Volume
DEFINING. MODIFYING, AND RUNNING PROCEDURES

Define Data-entry
Form
Using the Data-entry Form
When
you run a procedure that has a Data-entry form, the values

you enter on the Data-entry form are used according to the
instructions in the query. Each time the procedure is run, DataBase
displays the Data-entry form, lets you type in data, and then uses
this data to
process the query.
In addition to selecting the records to
Data
Variables used
Data used
Data
to
to
be entered or modified
in
in
or delete records in the

database: input variables used
in computations: insert data in
the report output: and in many
other ways that help automate
routine data-entiy and record
processing operations.
be processed by a query, a
Data-entry form can also be used to specify:
The Data-entry farm can he

used to select, enter, modify,
one or more database forms
computations
conditional processing
in
be printed in report output
Using a Relationship to Specify Data-entry Values

If
you define a relationship between a Data-entry form and another
database form, you can use a
Lookup formula
to automatically
from the database form to the Data-entry form.

For example, you can define a relationship between a form that
transfer information
You can use a relationship

lookup data in a database
form and
insert
it
to
in the
Data-entry form.
holds the sales tax rate for each state and a Data-entry form. Then,
when you
enter the state to process, the sales tax rate for this state
can be transferred to the Data-entry form each time the procedure
is
executed.
Specifying Data-entry Values

In a query,
you
tell
DataEase
in
Query
to use the field values
on the
Data-entry form by placing the keyword data-entry before the

field
name. For example, the query statement:

for
CUSTOMERS
list
with state
data-entry state
records
The keyword data-entry tells

DataEase to use the specified
value from the Data-entiy
form when processing the
query.
tells
DataEase to
specified in the
Volume
list
only the customers
STATE
field
who
live in the state
on the Data-entry form.
2-10

Alternatives to Using
tlie
Data-entry
Form
The Data-entry form can only be used to input data at the

procedure. DataEase offers two other data-input methods
start of a
in
addition to the Data-entry form.
DataEase offers two data

input methods in addition
the Data-entry form: the
The DQL record entry command allows records to be entered into

a Record Entry form at any point during a procedure. The records
are directly entered into the database; they are not processed by the
query.
The
DQL
input
command also lets you use a Record Entry form to

It may be used at any point during a procedure.
input information.
The input statement provides

it
lets the
all the facilities of Record Entry, and

query process the records before they are entered into the
database.
The differences between the three data

summarized in the table below.
Data Input
Method
input
methods are
to
DQL
input and record entry
commands. For detailed

information on each, see the
DQL Lexicon.

Saving the Data-entry Form
After you finish creating the Data-entry form, press F2

save
it.
When you
press F2, the Data-entry form
is
SAVE
Press F2 SAVE to save the

Data-entry form on disk as a
part of the procedure.
to
saved on disk
as part of the procedure.
The information entered

saved on disk;
it
is
into a Data-entry form,
only saved
memory. The information
is
in the
however,
is
never
computer's temporary
erased whenever you
start
new
The Data-entry form
definition can he saved on
procedure or load a different procedure into memory.
disk: Data-entry values are
Recalling Data-entry Values
When
never saved.
the Data-entry form reappears after the procedure
is
run,
it
is
completely blank. Press SH-F5 to recall the Data-entry information

that
was
just used
value for the field
Volume
by the procedure. Press SH-F6

in which the cursor is located.
to recall
only the
2-12

Modify Data-entry Form
Modifying the Data-entry Form
After the Data-entry form
option Define Data-entry
Form.
When you
is
created and saved, the
Form changes
select this option to
Data-entry form, DataBase
first
DQL menu
Modify Data-entry
view or change the
to
Modify Data-entry Form
is
used to modify or delete the

Data-entty form itself.
asks:
Delete the Data-entry Form?
If
Answer no
Answer yes if you want to delete the existing form and/or

define a new Data-entry form. The form is deleted and the
DQL menu remains on the screen.
to
view or modify the Data-entry form.
you answer no, DataBase asks:

After running the procedure, display data-entry form again?
Answer no
or yes depending on whether you plan to run the
procedure again using different data-entry input each time.
When
the Data-entry
way you modify
form
is
displayed, you can modify
a Record Entry form.
it
just the
Remember, however,
if you
add or delete fields on the Data-entry form, you must also modify
the query to reflect those changes.
2-13
You modify the Data-entry

form just the way you modify
a Record Entry form. If you
add or delete fields on the
Data-entry form, you must
also modify the query to
reflect those changes.
Volume

Define Query
The DataEase Query Language (DQL)
The DataEase Query Language (DQL)
commands
that let
in
tell
sets of instructions are called queries or
query can be simple and direct
live in Connecticut?), or
it
total
The DataEase Query

Language is used to define
questions and sets of
instructions called queries or
procedures.
DQL procedures.
how many of our customers

(How many units
in December? What was the
(e.g.,
can be more complex
of a particular catalog item were sold
value of these sales, and what percentage of that total was
purchased by customers from

is
a powerful group of
DataEase how to
your database. These questions
you ask questions or
manipulate the information stored
and
is
often a
list
New
of items that meet
all
England?). The answer (which

the criteria of the query)
is
called a report.
A more
Advanced Processing capabilities
might be a set of instructions that tells DataEase: when the user
named Carol signs on to the database named DAILY after 5:00
But DataEase can do more than answer tough questions!
sophisticated use of the
DQL
P.M., run the procedure that posts the day's transactions into
several related database forms, print the corresponding invoices and
shipping labels, and generate a
list
of inventory items that have to
be reordered.
DQL Output
Many DQL procedures
when you
records command, DataEase
generate output. For example,
run a procedure that contains a
list
processes the query and generates output
list
of records selected
by the query. Output can be displayed on the screen, printed, or

saved as a file. A visible form of output, particularly when printed
on paper, is commonly called a report. Chapter 5 in this volume
provides detailed information on how to format report output.
Some
procedures create output that
modifies records
in the
is tiot
visible.
database, for example,
A query
may
or
may
that
not
display the modified result. There are also procedures that do not
generate any output.
For example, a query that deletes a group of
records does not generate output.
DQL
output that
is
saved
in a
disk
file
can be converted by one of
the DataEase export formats for use by other programs such as
WordPerfect and Lotus
Volume
The output from a DQL

Procedure can he sent to one
of three destinations: the
computer screen, a printer, or
a file saved on disk. Visible
output printed on paper is
called a report.
1-2-3.
2-14

Define Query
Interactive
Mode
When you
select
Interactive
Mode.
Define Query. DataBase automatically enters

In this mode, DataEase prompts you through
each step of creating a query;
lists all
it
the valid responses for each
prompt, offering only syntactically appropriate
commands
or values
and eliminating needless typing.
//(
Interactive
Mode.
DQL
automatically checks the

syntax and spelling in a query.
This lets you concentrate on
the business at hand rather
than
programming
details.
In Interactive Mode, you choose the appropriate forms, fields,

commands, functions, and operators to create a query from a series
of menus that appear on screen. Figure 2-3 shows one menu that
appears in Interactive Mode.
4 C
Processing procedure
This is
City
State
Specify the iteMs to be listed.

Select field nane
Spouse 3: Street
for CUSTOMERS
uith CURRENT Balance
sea
list records
4:
F4 lll!lilj RSr iaaii Fi rilSra FS W^lll OUERV LEUEL
Figure 2-3
Changing
5:
[^^1
Interactive
b:
Zip
MODE IliUJJ-.IJIUia
Mode
Screen
Move
l\/lodes
Mode, DataEase provides an Edit Mode

you enter DQL query statements without the assistance of
Interactive prompts and menus.
in addition to Interactive
that lets
To
switch from Interactive
the cursor toward the
Edit
2-15
Mode
left
to Interactive
Mode
into Edit
Mode, you simply move
the cursor
up or toward
side of the screen to

change from Interactive Mode
the
left
into Edit
Mode. Press Fl
INTERACTIVE to change
from Edit Mode to Interactive
Mode.
To switch from
INTERACTIVE.
or the top of the screen.
Mode,
press Fl
Volume
DEFINING. MODIFYING, AND RUNNING PROCEDURES

Define Query
Interactive
Mode Prompts and Menus
Throughout the process of creating a query, DataBase displays

prompt messages near the top of the screen that tell you what action
you are trying to accomplish, such as:
Specify the items to be
Select
0:
NONE
field
listed.
name
CUSTOMER NAME
2:
ADDRESS 3: CITY 4: STATE 5: ZIP
Beneath the prompt, DataBase displays a numbered

the valid responses to this prompt; in this case,
it
line
MORE
F1
menu
displays a
of
list
all
of
all the field names defined in your database form (e.g., CUSTOMER
NAME, ADDRESS, STATE, ZIP). If there are too many choices to fit
on one
line, press
window on
When you
MORE to display the rest of the choices in a
Fl
the right side of the screen.
choose a value from the menu,
When all available choices

don't fit on a single line menu,
press Fl
to open a
MORE
window menu of choices.

it
is
automatically
inserted into the query at the current cursor location.
How To Bypass
Interactive
Mode
l\1enus
For each prompt, DataBase displays a numbered

choices.
In
many
cases, the first choice listed
don't want any of the

Alternatively,
menu
you can press
is
items shown, enter
TAB
to
list
Many prompts
of valid
NONE. If you
to select NONE.
0:
bypass the current
menu
cause a series
of menus to appear. If the
choice you want is not on the
first menu, you can skip to the
next menu by pressing TAB.
choices and access the next menu.
Some prompts
value) instead of simply selecting a
prompt, always press
When
menu
item.
To bypass such
you're prompted to enter a constant value,
recommend that you use

skip a menu choice.
TAB.
valid numeric response (instead of 0:
Volume
To cycle through all the menus

in Interactive Mode, press
TAB once for each menu you
want to bypass.
ask you to enter information (text or a numeric
TAB
NONE).
(instead of 0)
For
is
treated as a
this reason,
we
whenever you want
to
2-16

Define Query
Typing
DQL Commands in
Interactive
Mode
You can type letters, words, and punctuation symbols in Interactive

Mode instead of waiting for a prompt. For example, you can type a
semicolon or a period where such punctuation
of repeatedly pressing
TAB
until the
menu
is
required, instead
that offers that
punctuation symbol appears.

If you type DQL words or symbols ahead of the prompting,
DataBase immediately displays the appropriate prompt.
When
typing
commands
unless prompted to
do
selection in Interactive
NOTE: When you
If you're familiar with the
DQL. you can always
type
ahead of the prompts in

Interactive Mode. However,
never type numbers unless
prompted to do so: DataBase
treats a number as a menu
selection in Interactive Mode.
Mode, never type numbers

DataBase treats a number as a menu
Mode.
in Interactive
so;
ahead of the prompting, you must

and symbols and insert the
required spaces yourself. DataBase does not
complete a word for you even if it is uniquely
type
type complete words
spelled.
2-17
Volume

Define Query
High Level and Low Level
Mode
Interactive
divided into two levels: a low level for basic
is
querying, and a high level that
lets
procedures. Press F9
Low Level
LEVEL
to
into
you perform sophisticated
transactions and chain together multiple database
management
change from one level
Mode is divided
Low Level and High
Level. Press F9 LEVEL to
Interactive
change from one
to the other.
level to
another.
from the database, but not

lets you use the
current time) and
values
(such
as
current
system
form,
Data-entry
you
lets
retrieve information
add, modify, or delete records.
the
let
DQL
relational operators.
Low
Level also
DQL relational
The
you retrieve information from related forms
operators
in the database.
High Level gives you access to the full power of the DataEase
Query Language, including mathematical operations, 58 built-in
functions, and procedural and non-procedural
commands
you create complex reports and sophisticated
transactions.
that let
In
High
Level, DataEase can automatically add, delete, and modify records;
and handle point-of-sale

inventory recordkeeping, and other automated
Low Level
lets you ask

and report the
ansM'ers. but you cannot add,
modify, or delete records from
the database. High Level lets
questions
you
link together
procedures
post information into multiple forms;
and build powerful custom
processing, billing,
applications.
transaction processing requirements.
When you
select Define
automatically enters
Query on
Low
DQL
for
want
to erase this default
command
in the
the
DQL menu,
Level Interactive
upper
left
comer of
command and
DataEase
Mode and
displays the
the screen.
restart the
If
you
query in High
Level Interactive Mode, follow these steps:
Press
HOME to move the cursor to the
upper
left
the screen. DataEase switches from Interactive
Edit Mode
2.
Press F7
3.
Press
4.
Press Fl
F9
into
(explained on the next page).
DEL
to delete the for
LEVEL
You can now
comer of
Mode
to switch into
INTERACTIVE
command.
High Level.
to return to Interactive
Mode.
define a High Level query with the help of
DataEase's Interactive menus.
Volume
2-18

Define Query
Edit
Mode
When you
select
Modify Query from the
DQL
menu, DataBase
automatically enters Edit Mode. In Edit Mode, you type the query
directly
menu
on a blank screen. DataBase does not prompt you with
choices.
Edit
Mode when you

you want
Edit
Mode
can be
much
are familiar with the
quicker than Interactive
DQL
and know exactly what
to do.
Mode
Edit Mode is used to create a

query, nwdify a query, add
can be used to create a query or modify a previously
defined query. In Edit Mode, you can freely
move
the cursor
comments, or correct errors

made while working in
around the screen and type specific DQL statements more rapidly
than selecting choices from the Interactive Mode menus. For this
reason, many experienced users work mainly in Edit Mode and
switch to Interactive
Mode
form and
to quickly select
field
names
Interactive
Mode.
if
they want help from the prompts.
To
create a query in Edit
Mode,
first select
Define Query from the
DQL menu. When
the first prompt appears, simply move the cursor

toward the left side of the screen. The prompt disappears and
DataBase switches into Edit Mode. Now you can just start typing
in the query on the blank screen. If you can't recall the correct
DQL
syntax, press Fl
Mode and
Mode
INTERACTIVE
to switch into Interactive
tlie
tlie left
cursor up or toward
side oftlie screen to
change from Interactive Mode

into Edit Mode. Press
El INTERACTIX'E to cliange
Mode.
bring the prompts up to help you.
comments, or copy
blocks of text. If you make an error or want to change a query
while working in Interactive Mode, just move the cursor up or left
to switch into Edit Mode. In Edit Mode you can backspace, type
over mistakes, add comments, and use the function keys F3 CUT,
F5 COPY, F6 PASTE, F7 DEL LINE, and F8 INS LINE exactly as
you do in Form Definition. To return to Interactive Mode, press
Fl INTERACTIVE, and the prompting resumes immediately.
Edit
Move
is
also used to correct mistakes, add
You can annotate your queries

Edit Mode. See Comments
in the DQL Lexicon for an
in
explanation
comments
to
oflww
to
add
a query.
Syntax Errors
DataBase helps you create queries by preventing you from saving a
query that contains a syntax error. DataBase checks the entire
query and places the cursor on the first syntax error it detects. All
syntax errors must be corrected before a query can be saved.
If you press F2 SAVE to save a

query that contains an error.
DataEase automatically
switches to Interactive Mode
and positions the cursor on the
first error.
2-19
Volume

Modify Query
Modifying a Query
in Edit
Mode
After you define a query. Option 4 on the DQL menu changes from
Define Query to Modify Query. When you select Modify Queiy,
DataEase begins in Edit Mode when the query displays on the
screen.
In Edit
Mode you
can
make any changes you want
appropriate keys to insert, delete, and alter text (including the
CUT. F5 COPY. F6 PASTE. F7 DEL LINE, and

F8 INS LINE). If you need prompting, move the cursor to the
problem and press Fl INTERACTIVE to switch to Interactive
Mode.
function keys F3
When you
modifying the query, press F2

modified query and return to the DQL menu.
finish
Copying From One Query
SAVE
Mode \ou can use F3

CUT. F5 COPY. F6 PASTE.
F7 DEL LINE, and F8 INS
LINE to insert, delete, and
In Edit
using the
alter text.
to save the
Another
to
DataEase lets you define up to 2,000 procedures per database.

As your list of procedures grows, you may find it convenient to
copy part or all of a query and use it in another query. DataEase
provides two ways to do this:

existing query and use
it
lets
you copy
is
displayed, use F5
Do you want
to
or part of an
as a starting point for a
as an addition to another existing query.
exit this procedure.
all
COPY to copy
all
new query
While the
or part of
it,
first
or
query
or as an addition to another
and then
existing query.
DataEase prompts:
Paste Block
in

lets you copy all or part of an
e.xisting query and use it as a
starting point for a new query
another Query?
Answer yes to this prompt. Now load an existing procedure

start a new procedure, and select Modify Quer\' (or Define
Query). Then use F6 PASTE to paste the copy of the first
or
query into the second query.
OR
Save Procedure and save the existing query under a new
name. This lets you keep the original procedure intact as well
as use the new ly named copy as the starting point for defining a
Select
new
Volume
procedure.
2-20

Modify Query
How to
To
Switch Modes
Mode
to Edit
cursor toward either the top or the
left
When you
Mode
Mode, simply move
the
side of the screen.

to Edit
Mode,
the
prompts and menus are removed from the screen.

In Edit Mode, you can easily make corrections or type in the
whole query without waiting for menu choices to appear.
interactive
To switch from Edit Mode

INTERACTIVE.
When you
to Interactive
Move
the cursor
up or toward
side of the screen to

chanf>e from Interactive Mode
the
left
into Edit
Mode. Press Fl
INTERACTIVE to change
Mode.
Mode, press Fl
Mode to Interactive Mode, DataEase

menu for the current cursor position in the
switch from Edit
displays the appropriate
query.
2-21
Volume
DEFINING. MODIFYING. .AND
N N
N G
PROCEDURES
Save Procedure
Saving a Query
In
Memory
While you are working on a query, you can press F2 SAVE to save
what you have entered up till now. The following actions take place:
DataEase scans the query
If there are
2.
to Interactive
first
error
it
If there are
3.
any errors
you
to
be sure
in the quer\'.
Mode w ith
it
is
Press F2
in
SAVE to save
a query
memory.
correct.
DataEase returns
the cursor placed
on the
detects.
no
errors,
menu from Low
DataEase returns
Level.
places the cursor
at the
In
to the
DQL
High Level. DataEase
end of your work ready for
additional input.
When you
F2 SAVE, DataEase saves the query in memory: it

does not create a disk file. The query remains in your computer's
temporary memory until you start a new procedure, load a new
procedure, delete the procedure, or exit from the DQL menu. To
save the query on disk, use the Save Procedure option on the DQL
menu as explained on the next page.
press
Automatic Syntax Scan

If you're in Interactive Mode. DataEase automatically scans the
query for errors and returns you to the DQL menu when you
answer the
In
Low
last
appropriate prompt.
Level Interactive Mode,
Any more items

if
you press
TAB
to
be
when DataEase prompts:
listed?
(or select
NONE), DataEase
automatically scans
the query.
In
High Level
Interactive
Mode, when DataEase prompts:
Select the desired action
The Automatic Syntax Scan

feature checks the quetyfor
errors and returns you to the
DQL menu as soon as you
indicate that there are no
more list items (in Low Level)
or no more actions
if
you press
TAB
(or select
NONE), DataEase
automatically scans
(in
High
Level).
the query.
Volume
i.il

Save Procedure
Saving a Procedure
To permanently save
(option 7) on the
On
Disk
on disk, select Save Procedure

menu. DataEase prompts:
the query
DQL
Save Procedure saves a

procedure on disk. The name
of a procedure can he up la 20
characters in length.
Please enter the procedure name:
The procedure name can be up to 20 characters long. It can be any

name you like, but all procedures and forms in the same database
must have unique names. After you specify the name and press the
RETURN
key. DataEase saves the procedure on disk.
When you
select
Save Procedure,
if
the procedure
was previously
saved, DataEase asks:
Do you want to save

name?
If
you answer
yes,
the modified procedure under another
DataEase asks:
Please enter the new procedure name:
new procedure name, the modified procedure

saved under the new name. DataEase also retains the original
(unmodified) procedure under the original name.
After you enter a
If
is
you answer no, DataEase saves the modified procedure under the
name. The original procedure is deleted.
original
NOTE: When
using DataEase on a Local Area Network,

you
attempt to save a procedure while any other
if
user is viewing or running it, DataEase displays a

Resource Conflict message. See Volume 2. Chapter
System Administration, for more information about

Multi-User operations.
4,
'23
Volume 3

Load Procedure
Loading a Procedure
into
Memory
In order to view, modify, or run a previously defined procedure,
you must load the procedure
into
your computer's temporary
""'^
memory.
To
Load Procedure loads a

previously defined procedure
load a procedure, select
menu. DataEase
Load Procedure (Option
8)
on the
''"'
computer's memory.
DQL
asks:
to load:
DataEase displays the names of all the previously saved Quick

Reports and DQL Procedures in the current database in a window
menu on the right side of the screen. You can load either a Quick
Report or a DQL Procedure.
DataEase displays the
DQL menu.
The
DQL menu
options that
begin with the word Define are changed from Define to Modify
for each part of the procedure that was previously defined (i.e..
Data-entry Form, Query, Format, Print Style).
Once
a procedure
is
loaded you can choose any of the
menu
options to modify the procedure, including Modify Data-entry
Form, Modify Query, Modify Format, or Modify Print

If
you load a Quick Report from the

Convert
this
(Quick Report) into a
DQL
DataEase asks:
Procedure?
Quick Report to a DQL Procedure. If

DataEase immediately exits from
Processing and displays the QBE - Quick Reports menu.
Answer yes
to convert the
you answer no
DQL
QBE
DQL menu,
Style.
Volume
to this question,
2-24

Load Procedure
Converting a Quick Report into a
Many
powerful
DQL features,
DQL Procedure
including any of the functions or
added to a Quick Report

using the Report Field Definition screen to enhance its output
relational statistical operators, can be
capabilities.
In addition,
DataBase
you convert a Quick Report
lets
Procedure with a single keystroke. Once
it
is
into a
DQL
converted, you can
use the procedure just like a procedure created with the Define
Query option on
To
the
DQL
DQL
Procedure, either:
Load Procedure (Option 8) on the

name of the Quick Report.
DQL menu
and
OR
With a Quick Report
in
memory,
Using either method, answer yes

Convert current
QBE
Quick Reports.
The Query By E.xample format

used in Quick Reports can
specify the
menu.
convert a Quick Report into a

Select
You can create a DQL

Procedure independently or
by converting a Quick Report
into a DQL query. For
information on how to define a
Quick Report, see Volume I
Chapter 3. Query By Example
DQL key.
press the F9
to the question:
(Quick Report) into a
DQL
automatically he converted
into a DQL Procedure with a
sin,^le keystroke. This is a
good way to learn how to use
the DQL - convert a simple
Quick Report into a DQL
Procedure and then view the
query.
Procedure?
DQL menu appears and the Quick Report definition is

converted to a DQL query. The query can then be edited through
the DQL menu Modify Query option.
The
NOTE: When
you save a converted Quick Report as a
Procedure, the Quick Report
is
both versions on disk, save the
forfeited.
DQL
To
DQL
retain
Procedure
under a different name than the Quick Report. Also,

once you convert a Quick Report into a
DQL
Procedure, you cannot reverse the process

it
hack
3, for
2-25
into a
Quick Report. See Volume
to
,
change
Chapter
complete information on Quick Reports.
Volume

Delete Procedure
Permanently Removing a Procedure
To permanently remove
a procedure from the database,
first select
Delete Procedure (option 9) on the DQL menu and then select the
procedure you want to delete from the windovv menu. DataEase
Delete Procedure permanently

removes a procedure from the
database.
asks:
When you
be deleted:
select a procedure to be deleted,
Are you sure you want

If
to
DataEase prompts:
to delete it?
you answer no. the request is cancelled. If you answer yes. the
is permanently removed from the database and cannot be
procedure
recovered.
Volume
2-26

Print
Printing the Definition of a Procedure
The Procedure Definition is a printed summary of the procedure

that is similar to the summary created by pressing SH-F9 PRINT
in Form Definition. The definition is composed of the following
four items:
Print Procedure Definition
summary of the
procedure that's currently in
memory, inchuUng the query,
the Data-entry form, the
prints a
format, and field descriptions.

1
2.
copy of the query.
copy of the Data-entry form
if
one
is
defined for the
procedure.
3.
copy of
80-column
4.
the format as
it
would appear printed on an
printer.
description of each field included in the format.
The
field description includes the Field
Name, Type,
Length, and a yes or no answer indicating whether

leading and trailing spaces in the field are to be
removed when
To
the output
print the definition of the
is
displayed.
procedure currently
Print Procedure Definition (option 10) on the
you
in
DQL
memory, select
menu. When
DataBase automatically sends the output

At the end of the output, DataBase lists the
amount of memory it requires to store the procedure definition.
select this option.
to
the default printer.
An example
of a printed Procedure Definition
is
shown
in
Figure 2-4 on the next page.
NOTE: The
Print Procedure Definition cannot he used to
display the Procedure Definition on the screen.

If you select this option
and
there
is
no correctly
configured printer connected to the computer,
DataBase displays an error message and cancels

the print command.
2-27
Volume

Print
Example
QUERY
for
CUSTOMERS
list
records
FIRST
NAME
LAST NAME
ADDRESS
CITY
STATE
ZIP
end
FORMAT
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
+ + +. +- +. +. + -+- + + + + +-+- +-
.Items
Name
Address
.end
+ + + + ++++ +- +- +- +- +- +- +-
10
20
30
FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Mo
40
50
60
70
80
Chapter 3
Define Query:
A Low
Level Example
how to create a query in Low Level
Mode, we have defined two forms named
o demonstrate
I
Interactive
CUSTOMERS
and
INVOICES
as
shown
Figure 3-i. The
in
forms share a predefined relationship based on the linking
CUSTOMER
Both forms store the same information
# field.
in this
a unique number assigned to each customer.
field:
CUSTOMERS
INVOICES
Starling on this
page
is
step-hy-step example that

demonstrates how to create
Field
Names
Field
Names
a query
\ INVOICE #
CUSTOMER NAME
r ADDRESS
1.
DATE
o.
CITY
^.
CUSTOMER*
".
STATE
".
PART#
..
ZIP
ACCOUNT BALANCE
CUSTOMER #
,.
8.
Primary Form
in
Interactive
Low Level
Mode.
As you read through this

example, you don't have to
actually perform the
keystrokes mentioned in the
DESCRIPTION
QUANTITY
text. Just mentally follow the

prompts, referring to the DQL
Lexicon for an explanation of
any terms yon don'
understand.
COST EACH
ORDER TOTAL
Secondary Form
If you
want
to perform the
you have to first
define the forms and fields.
For information on how to
create forms, see Volume I
Chapter 2. Form Definition
keystrokes,
Figure 3-
The
CUSTOMERS
to the
INVOICES
CUSTOMERS
- Low
Level Example Database Forms
form
said to have a one-to-many relationship
form, there
INVOICES form
(all
The INVOICES form

the
CUSTOMERS
the
INVOICES form
CUSTOMERS
3-1
is
form. This means that for any one record
may
be
many
related records in the
same CUSTOMER
the invoices that have the

is
#).
said to have a many-lo-one relationship to
form. This
related to
means
there
may
any one record
be
many
and Relationships.
in the
records in
The example is based on the

forms shown in Figure .?-/.
The fields are numbered on
the DalaEase menus in this
example exactly as they're
numbered in this figure.
in the
form.
Volume
DEFINE QUERY:
LOW LEVEL EXAMPLE
THE PURPOSE OF THE QUERY: A REPORT

In this example,
The
we want
to generate a report that displays:
customers' names listed
in alphabetical order.
The
The balance each customer owes
date of each customer's most recent purchase.

us.
The customers' names and account balance data
CUSTOMERS
INVOICES
form; the date of each purchase
form.
To
generate the report,
are stored in the
is
we have
stored in the
to create a
query
DataEase to combine information from these two forms

and display the output as a screen report. Figure 3-2 is a sample of
the type of report output we want (although it hasn't yet been
that tells
alphabetized).
Sample Report Output

CUSTOMER NAME
DATE OF PURCHASE
Jensen, Dave
Fisher, Jay
Cooper, Mary
Davis,
Pam
Ivers, Clark
Adams, Sam
Baker, Fred
Evans, Rick
Hill,
$210.00
S195.00
12/30/89
12/20/89
12/10/89
12/24/89
12/22/89
12/18/89
12/15/89
12/27/89
12/31/89
12/19/89
Gomez, Louis
Brenda
Figure 3-2
ACCOUNT BALANCE
;;350.00
S725.00
S175.00
;;675.oo
S595.00
;;240.oo
S865.00
S525.00
Account Balance Report
we want to generate,
who purchased something in
we want to know the date of each
Figure 3-2 represents the type of report
but
it
includes only the customers
December. In our report,

customer's most recent purchase, regardless of which month
it
was.
WHICH RECORDS TO SELECT

As we
create the query, we're also going to
add selection
who owe
criteria to
more than
limit the report to only those
customers
$500.
DataEase which records

want DataEase to select only the
In a query, the selection criteria
to select for processing.
Volume
We
tell
us
Selection criteria
DataEase
tell
to select
some
rather than all the records in a

form when processing a query.
3-2

CUSTOMERS
records in the
500
we must
In creating any query,
What form
Which
form
ACCOUNT BALANCE
in the
What
that
have a value greater than
field.
tell
DataBase
at least three things:
(or forms) contains the required data.
records to process in each form.
action to perform on the selected records (in this
we want
example,
to
list
the information in those records in our
report).
CREATING THE QUERY

To begin
creating the query for the Account Balance report, select
Define Query (Option 4) from the DQL menu. DataBase switches

to Interactive Mode and displays the word for in the upper left
hand comer of the screen. The word for is a DQL command that
is
always the
first
word
in a
Low
The DQL command for is

always the first word in a Low
Level query.
Level query.
The for command
tells DataBase from which form to gather

information for the report. If information is gathered from more
than one form, the first form specified in the query is called the
Primary form, and the other forms are Secondary forms.
The for command

form and perform
After
all
record
is
DataBase
to select records in a particular
the specified actions on each of those records.
the actions are performed for the first record, the next
and
read,
continues until
Now,
tells
all
let's
all
all
the actions are performed again. This
The menu
1
On
begin to create the query.
the screen, the prompt
name
line lists the available
SYSTEM 2: CUSTOMERS
NOTE: These
3;
forms from which you can pick:
INVOICES
4:
menu choices
example are valid only
F1
MORE
Low
Level
INVENTORY
are the only forms used in the
example. The
that
if you
appear
additional prompts
The first form named in a

queiy is called the Primary
form. A form related to the
query's Primary form is called
a Secondary form. A form
related to a Secondaiy form is
called a Tertiary form, etc.
in this first
are defining a
Level query. In High Level, there are
3-3
each of those records.
the records in the form have been processed.
line reads:
Select form
The for command tells

DataBase to select records in
a particular form and perform
all the specifed actions on
Low
many
and commands.
Volume
DEFINE QUERY:
LOW LEVEL EXAMPLE
The form you select from this first menu is the Primary form for
the query. The Primary form should be the form that holds the key
data you want to view or manipulate.
forms that are related

example.
The Primary form
for
later in this
The Primary form
the
is
form
CUSTOMERS.
is
the form
that holds the key data
want
for this query
after the for
also access data in
Primary form, as you'll see
to the
customers' names, so select
form name
You can
to
you
view or manipulate.
that contains the
DataBase adds the
command. The query now
reads:
CUSTOMERS
Next, DataBase prompts:
Any record
selection criteria?
and offers two choices:

0:
NONE
with
DataBase is asking if you want it to use all the records in the

Primary form, or use certain criteria to select only some of them.
We only want to see some of the records - the records for
customers who have an account balance greater than S500.
You
DataBase
tell
inserting the
that
that
you want
keyword with
you want
to include selection criteria
in the
to select only
query.
by
Select with to indicate
some records from
the
CUSTOMERS
form. The query reads:

for
The keyword with tells

DataBase that you want
CUSTOMERS
to
specify selection criteria.
with
DataBase displays another prompt:

Select
0:
NONE
Now
field
name
CUSTOMER NAME
DataBase
is
ADDRESS 3:
asking for the
selection criteria is based.
customers
2:
who owe
us
We
CITY
name of
4:
STATE
the field on
want DataBase
more than $500.
5:
In
ZIP F1
MORE
which the
to select only those
DQL,
this criterion is
specified by the following statement:
Volume
3-4

ACCOUNT BALANCE
> 500
To
insert this selection criterion into the query, first press
Fl
MORE
Now
to see the rest of the fields in the
account balance. The query
select
form.
CUSTOMERS
for
with
Now
CUSTOMERS
reads:
account balance
DataEase prompts:
Select a comparison operator or not'

2:> 3:<
4:
<=
5:
6:
between
7:
There are seven
not
DQL
Comparison Operators:
DataEase is now asking us to specify exactly what selection criteria

we want to use to select records. Since we only want records for
customers who have an account balance greater than $500,
select
>
(the greater than symbol).
The query
= {equals). > (greater than}.

< (less than), <= (less than or
equal to). >= (greater than or
equal to), between, and not.
reads:
CUSTOMERS
for
with
account balance
>
DataEase displays another prompt:

Specify comparison value
Select field name
We
don't want to compare the current balance to a field value. We

to compare it to a numeric constant (500). Press TAB (or 0:
NONE) three times to skip the next three prompts until the
following prompt appears:
want
Specify a constant value

Enter a numeric string without punctuation. To skip
hit
TAB
Now DataEase is asking us to finish the selection criteria by

comparing the account balance to a specified numeric value.
We want to see a list of customers who have an account balance
greater than S500. so type
statements or punctuation to
the query. When typing a
CUSTOMERS
currency value in a query, do

not include the dollar sign.
with
3-5
the Spacebar.
reads:
The query now

for
500 and then press
After entering a constant value
you must insert a space before

you make any additional menu
selections or add any further
account balance > 500
Volume
DEFINE QUERY:
Next, DataBase asks
if
you want
to specify
LOW LEVEL EXAMPLE
any additional selection
criteria:
Any more
0:
NONE
and
criteria?
2: or
To specify more selection criteria (such as only those who

purchased something last month) we'd select and and follow the
same procedure to specify the additional criteria. However, since
we don't want to specify further criteria, press TAB (or select
NONE). DataBase displays a different prompt:
The keywords and and or are

used to combine different sets
of selection criteria.
Low Level, when you tell

DataBase there are no more
In

Select
0:
NONE
listed.
selection criteria,
name
field
CUSTOMER NAME
2:
ADDRESS 3: CITY 4: STATE
5:
ZIP F1
MORE
Beneath the menu, the query reads:

for
CUSTOMERS
ACCOUNT BALANCE > 500
with
list
it
automatically places a
semicolon at the end of the for
statement and inserts the list
records command on the next
line in the query.
records
The semicolon
is
DQL
it marks
end of the for statement
which specifies the queiy's
Primary form. You must insert
a semicolon at the end of the
for statement and after each
synta.x requirement:
Notice that when you selected
NONE,
DataBase automatically
added a semicolon (;) after the account balance value and inserted
the phrase list records on the following line. The list records
command
is
you cannot
Low Level Low Level query.
the only processing option available in
enter, delete, or
modify records
in
the
item specified in the
list
records section of the query.
The
list
items
command
records
we want
alphabetical
to
list
report output
is
appear
DataBase we're ready
list
the
first item we want in the

customer name. Select customer name
DataBase inserts the fieldname customer
after list records.

list
to
we want an
of our customers, the
CUSTOMERS
with
Since
the field
and press RBTURN;

name on the next line
for
tells
in the report output.
records
CUSTOMER NAME
The list records command

DataBase which items to
tells
display in the report output for
each record processed by the

;
queiy. The most common type

of list item is the name of a
field.
Volume
3-6

Now, DataBase
displays another prompt:

Select records
0:
NONE
in
order
in
2: in
listed.
groups or
reverse
3: in
in
a specific order?
groups
4: in
groups with group-totals
DataEase is asking in what order to list the customers' names. If we

choose NONE, DataEase lists the customers in the order in which
were entered into the database. If we choose one of
DataEase lists the customers according to the
their records
the other options,
chosen option (explained below):
in
order
(putting
sorts the records in ascending alphabetical order
Adams ahead
in reverse sorts in
of Coolidge).
descending alphabetical order (putting
Washington before Lincoln).
groups sorts the records in ascending order into groups that

have the same value in the specified field (for example, all the
in
Democratic presidents could be

their
names arranged
in
listed together as a
group with
alphabetical order, followed by
all
the
Republican presidents).
in
you generate
sorts records into
statistical totals for
numbers of Democratic and Republican

For our alphabetized report, select in order.
The query
for
presidents.
lets
total
DQL Sorting and
used on any type offield: in

order sorts records in
sequence from least to
greatest value (least recent to
most recent, earliest to latest,
lowest choice
number
to
highest, etc): in reverse sorts

in the opposite sequence.
Refer to the DQL Lexicon for
a more detailed explanation of
each of these operators.
reads:
CUSTOMERS
with

list
records
CUSTOMER NAME
3-7
groups and
each group, such as the
The
Groiipini> Operators can he
in
order
Volume
DEFINE
Although
in this
E R
'I-
example we only need
LOW LEVEL EXAMPLE
to sort our
customers
alphabetical order, sorting operators can be combined.
example, we want
their
names
to
group the customers by
we
in alphabetical order,
STATE
groups
in
CUSTOMER NAME
When combining
sorting
state
If.
in
for
and also
sort
use:
in
Order
commands
in
a query, items sorted in
Figure 3-3 shows

two separate queries: the customers sorted in order by
name in Query on the left, and the combined alphabetical sorting
and grouping by state in Query 2 on the right.
groups
are listed before items sorted in order.
In a query, always list items in

groups before in order.
a portion of
Query
CUSTOMER NAME
in
order
Query
STATE
in
groups
CUSTOMER NAME
in
order
Report Outputs
Alabama
Adams, Sam
Adams, Sam
Baker, Fred
Cooper, Mary
Davis,
Ivers,
Pam
Evans, Rick
Fisher, Jay
Gomez, Louis
Hill,
Brenda
Ivers,
Clark
Gomez, Louis
Jensen, Dave
Fiaure 3-3
Volume
Clark
Alaska
Cooper, Mary
Jensen, Dave
Arizona
Baker, Fred
Evans, Rick
Fisher, Jay
Sort
Commands
3-8

now
Returning
for
to our
example, the query reads:
CUSTOMERS
with

list
records
CUSTOMER NAME
in
order
DataBase prompts:
Any more items
to
be
listed?
and offers two choices:
0:NONE
1:
select NONE, DataBase automatically inserts a period after

order statement and scans the query. If no errors are
detected, the query is saved in memory and you are returned to the
DQL menu.
If
you
the in
If
your query
not finished select
is
inserted after the in
more
(semicolon).
semicolon
to
is
list
items.
For now, select the semicolon; the cursor moves

and we again see the prompt:
Select
DataBase
report.
field
is
We
now
want
not in the
to the next line
//(
Low Level, when you
tell
DiitaEase there are no more

items to he listed, it
automatically inserts a period
and then scans the query finsyntax errors.
listed.
name
we want
to list any other items in the

most recent date each customer placed
information doesn't appear on the menu because
asking
to
an order, but that

it's
order statement and you can continue
list
if
the
CUSTOMERS
form
(it's in
the
INVOICES
form).
However, because the INVOICES form is related to the Primary

form CUSTOMERS, we can access any information we need on
the
3-9
INVOICES
form.
Volume
DEFINE QUERY:
To
get the order date information,
the
INVOICES
fields, press
we have
LOW LEVEL EXAMPLE
to tell
DataEase
to use
form. So instead of selecting any of the displayed
TAB
twice to skip this
menu and
the next.
DataEase
generates a different prompt:
Select a relational operator
Beneath
this
prompt, DataEase displays a
menu
of seven operators.
The
DQL Relational
any, count of,

lowest of sum of,
and mean of) let you access
information in related forms.
Operators
0:
NONE
all 2:
any
3:
count of
4:
highest of
5:
lowest of 6:
sum
of F1
highest
MORE
These relational operators let you retrieve information from a form

related to the Primary form (similar to pressing FIO MULTI when
you define list fields in a Quick Report). Each option is fully
explained
in the
(all.
of,
DQL Lexicon.
The information we want
to retrieve
is
the
most recent invoice
for
each record selected from the CUSTOMERS form. Because

DataEase treats dates as a series of progressive numbers, the most
recent date
So, to
tell
customer,
is
the highest
DataEase
number
to find the
first select
in the
sequence of DATE values.
most recently dated invoice
the highest of relational operator.
for each
The query
reads:
for
CUSTOMERS
with

list
records
CUSTOMER NAME
in
Order
highest of
This
tells
Read
all
DataEase:
form (which we're about to

specify) and report the highest value in the field (which we're also
going to specify) among those records. The next few prompts will
ask us to specify the name of the related form and the field from
which we want the highest value (most recent date) reported.
Volume
the records in the related
3-10

First
DataEase asks us to specify the related form:
Specify the items to be listed.

Select a predefined relationship?
and offers a menu

0:
NONE
1:
listing the related
forms
in the
database:
INVOICES
The information we want is in the INVOICES form, so

INVOICES. The form name is added to the query:
for
select
CUSTOMERS
with
list
records
CUSTOMER NAME in order

highest of INVOICES
Next. DataEase prompts:

Specify the items to be listed.
Specify any additional relationship criteria?
0:
NONE
with
DataEase is now asking if we want to specify additional criteria to

determine which records to select in the related form. We want
DataEase to read all the related INVOICES records and find the
most recent invoice for each selected customer. Therefore, select
NONE or press TAB.
NONE
Now
INVOICE #
DataEase
is
INVOICES form
field
3-11
name
is
2:
'"
^'^'^^''
'^'"''^^ '" 'elated

'" "'^
^p'"!^.Z
Z'l"'
Primary form.
DataEase prompts:

Select field name
0:
Selection criteria can he used
DATE
listed.
3:
CUSTOMER
4:
PART #
F1
MORE
asking us to specify which field on the

to look at for the highest value.
added
to the
query which
now
Select date.
The
reads:
Volume
DEFINE QUERY:
for
LOW LEVEL EXAMPLE
CUSTOMERS
with

list
records

highest of INVOICES date
;
DataBase next asks
we want
if
the records sorted
by the values
in
the DATE field:
Select records
We
want
in
to list the
groups or
TAB
to
bypass the
Any more items
a specific order?
most recent invoice
TAB
chronological order, so press

pressing
in
to
be
menu
date, not sort the records in
to skip this
menu. Keep
choices until DataBase prompts:
listed?
and displays two choices:

0:NONE1:
We
want one more item: the account balance owed by each
customer, so select
Since
we bypassed
(semicolon).
Select
field
from the
INVOICES
CUSTOMERS
form again:
further choices
next prompt refers us to the
form, the
Note that
name
usini> afield in tfie
selection criteria doesn'
0:NONE :CUSTOMER NAME 2:ADDRESS 3:CITY 4:STATE

1
5:ZIP F1
MORE
insert
have
it
in the report:
you
to specify list items
separately.
In order to include the account balance information in the report,
press Fl
MORE
After this press
and
TAB
Any more items
Volume
select
in
to
account balance
answer
be
to
again.
each prompt
until
you reach:
listed?
3-12

Now
press
TAB
again and note what happens. In a
Low
Level
when you indicate there are no more items to be

DataEase knows the query is completed. The final query
Interactive Query,
listed
looks like
this.
for

list
'Z:2,î^-ns:ns a period,
scans the query for syntax
errors, saves the query in
CUSTOMERS
with
Low Level, when you tell

DataBase there are no more
I"
memory, and returns you

the DQL menu.
to
records

ACCOUNT BALANCE
;
After an automatic syntax scan, DataEase inserts a final period to

it saves the query in memory and returns you to
end the query; then

the DQL menu.
the DQL menu. Option 4 has been changed from Define Query
Modify Query. You can now define a custom report format
On
to
(Option 5) or run the procedure immediately using the default

Select Run Procedure. DataEase displays the output
on the screen in columnar format. After editing the column
report format.
headings (as explained
in
Chapter
report format might look as
shown
5), the
in
output in the defauh
Figure 3-4 below:
Report Output
CUSTOMER NAME
LAST INVOICE DATE
Adams, Sam
Cooper, Mary
12/15/89
12/24/89
12/31/89
12/19/89
12/18/89
Evans, Rick
Hill,
ACCOUNT BALANCE
Brenda
Ivers, Clark
$595.00
S725.00
S865.00
!;525.00
$675.00
Figure 3-4--Alphabetized Account Balance Report
As you
see, the selected customers (those who owe more than

$500) are listed in alphabetical order with the date of their last
order and the balance they owe listed in columnar format.
NOTE: DataEase
time.
can only keep one report
If you
want
to
in
memory
at
use this report again, before
beginning another report, select Save Procedure

(Option 7) on the
^13
DQL
menu.
Volume

Chapter 4
Define Query:
A High Level Example
hile
Low
Level queries
one or more forms
let
you
from
High Level gives you

access to the full power of the DataBase Query
Language, including Global and Temporary Variables,
35 Procedure Commands, and 58 Math and Text Manipulation
Functions. In High Level, DataEase can create two types of
in a
database.
procedures:
A Processing procedure can enter, delete,
list,
and modify
records; and create screen, disk, or printed output.
Control procedure cannot
output, but
it
itself
access records or create
can link any number of Processing and/or other
Control procedures together
an automated chaining process.
in
many operations
shown on DataEase menus such as Record Entry, Run
Procedure, Backup Database, Install an Application, etc.
In addition, a Control procedure can invoke
HIGH LEVEL DQL

In
COMMANDS
High Level there are a total of 35 DQL commands available

These commands are divided into three groups:
(see
list at right).
Processing
Commands (numbered
1-9) can be used in a
Processing procedure, but cannot be used
in a
Control
procedure.
Procedural
Commands (numbered
10-23) can be used in any
procedure.
Control
Commands (numbered
procedure, but cannot be used
NOTE:
24-35) can be used
in
in a
There is no need to memorize these restrictions.

DataEase automatically prohibits the use of an
command in a procedure, hi Interactive

Mode, ineligible commands do not appear in the list
ineligible
of commands available.
Control
a Processing procedure.
Window Menu
Of High Level
List
Commands
DEFINE QUERY:
In this example, we'll create a
from related forms

enters
new
like the
HIGH LEVEL EXAMPLE
High Level query
preceding
Low
that retrieves data
Level query but also
records, modifies existing records, and calculates
new
information based on the existing data.

In our example, the Down East Company - a New England-based
mail-order business - is developing a single Control procedure to
automate
its
whole order processing system, including adding new
customer records, maintaining inventory records, calculating

customer discounts, and generating invoices, shipping labels,
out-of-stock notices, etc. We'll use the following set of forms
from the
Down
East database.

PROCEDURE
The
Post Orders
POST ORDERS
procedure posts new order information from

form (Primary form) into two related
Secondary forms: the customer information is posted into the
CUSTOMERS form and the order information is posted into the
the
ORDER ENTRY
INVENTORY
Query
form.
for the Post
The query
for the
Orders Procedure
POST ORDERS
procedure
shown below:
is
ORDER ENTRY
POSTED = NO
for
with
if
CUSTOMER
# = blank then
in CUSTOMERS
ORDER ENTRY
enter a record
copy
ail
from
end
for
LINE ITEMS
modify records
in
INVENTORY
QTY ON HAND != QTY ON HAND

LINE ITEMS QTY ORDERED
end
end

Now,
examine
let's
for
this
query one statement
The Primary form

it
for this report
contains the data
forms. The
POSTED
a time:
ORDER ENTRY
POSTED = NO
with
because
at
is
the
we want
ORDER ENTRY
to post into the
form
two other
ORDER ENTRY
form contains a yes/no field named

of no each time a record is
changed to yes when a record gets
that is assigned a default value
This field value is

posted by the procedure. Since
entered.
we only want to post the records

have not already been posted, the selection criteria on the
second line reads: posted = NO
that
The next
line in the
if
^3
query reads:
CUSTOMER
= blank then
Volume
DEFINE QUERY:
HIGH LEVEL EXAMPLE
two lines of the query tell DataEase which records

select from the ORDER ENTRY form. The third line tells
DataEase specifically which records to post into the
The
first
CUSTOMERS
to
form.
always assigned a customer # the first time he

if an ORDER ENTRY record has no
(specified by the DQL keyword blank), it must be an
Since a customer
is
or she places an order,
CUSTOMER
new customer.
order from a
For each new customer, we want DataEase

the
CUSTOMERS
The
form. This
known
is
instructions that follow the
to enter a
new
record in
as a conditional action.
statement are only executed for
if
records that meet the specified condition (only the records that have
a blank value in the
customer
# field).
blank
The next two lines in this part of

if the customer # is blank.
the query
tell
DataEase what
to
do
is
DQL keyword that
means "no
value".
in CUSTOMERS
ORDER ENTRY
enter a record
copy
all
from
query reads "CUSTOMER #

the field contains a
null value. A null value is an
undetermined value, not a
If a
The
first line is
new
record in the
DataEase to enter a
form. The second line tells
very straightforward.
CUSTOMERS
DataEase what information
It
tells
to enter in the
new
CUSTOMERS
= blank",
zero.
record.
For a new customer, the operator manually enters all the customer
information in the ORDER ENTRY form when the order is
received. This line tells DataEase to copy that information into
the CUSTOMERS form. The CUSTOMERS form automatically
derives a customer # for the new record using a sequence from
Field Derivation Formula.
The copy
from command
all
is
the last action to be performed
the records selected from the Primary form, so
period.
In addition, an
preceding
if
end command
is
it
is
An end command marks

end of all actions
the
initiated by
the preceding if command.
on
followed by a
inserted to terminate the
command.
In
This part of the query reads:
High Level, a period ends

it does not end
a statement:
the query.
ORDER ENTRY
with posted = NO
for
if
CUSTOMER
# = blank
copy
all
from
then
CUSTOMERS
ORDER ENTRY
enter a record
in
end
Volume
4-4

This completes the
form
post
(if
from
first
(ORDER
It
tells
= blank), what information to post (copy all

ENTRY), and in which form to post the information
CUSTOMER
ORDER
DataEase which
ENTRY), what records to
half of the query.
records from
to select
A High Level query can have

more than one for command.
A Low Level query can have

only one for
command.
is
(CUSTOMERS).
The second
half of this query tells DataEase to modify the
INVENTORY form by subtracting the ordered LINE ITEMS

from the INVENTORY quantity on hand fields.
semicolon
only required
afar command if it
refers to the query's Primary
after
First, let's
look
at this section
of the query as a
unit.
form.
for
LINE ITEMS
modify records
in
INVENTORY
QTY ON HAND := QTY ON HAND

end
end
Now,
let's
for
look
at this part
of the query one statement
at
a time.
LINE ITEMS
contains a second for command. Unlike a

Level query, a High Level query can contain more than one
for command. This second for command tells DataEase that we
First, notice that this line
Low
want
to select records
from a form other than the Primary form.
The Secondary form we now want to select records from is the

LINE ITEMS form. The LINE ITEMS form has a predefined
relationship to the ORDER ENTRY form based on the order #
field. Since no selection criteria are specified with this for
command, DataEase selects all the records in the LINE ITEMS
form that are related to the records processed in the first part of
the query when it processes the second part of the query.
The next
line in the
modify records
This line
ITEMS
is
When you use the modify

records command for a form
other than the queiy's
query reads:
straightforward.
in
Primary form, the keyword in

must precede the form name.
INVENTORY
It
tells
DataEase
The next two
lines of the
to use these
INVENTORY
records to modify the records in the
LINE
form.
query read:
QTY ON HAND := QTY ON HAND

These two
lines tell
INVENTORY
4-5
DataEase how to modify the records in the

As each LINE ITEMS record is processed.
form:
In the modify records
command, field names are

separated hy the special
symbol := which is called an
assignment operator. This
symbol
tells
DataEase
to
modify the field to the left of

the symbol by assigning it the
value specified to the right of
the symbol.
Volume
DEFINE QUERY:
subtract the value in the
record from the value
INVENTORY
INVENTORY
The second
commands:
for
in
HIGH LEVEL EXAMPLE
qty ordered field on each LINE ITEMS

the qty on hand field in the
record for that item.
In other words, reduce the
qty-on-hand by the amount
part of the query
is
was ordered.
that
completed by adding two end
LINE ITEMS
modify records
INVENTORY
in
qty on hand := QTY QN HAND

end
end
To
DQL
satisfy the
end command
command. The end command
after the
part of the query completes the preceding if statement, not the
first
for statement. Therefore two
first
the
syntax requirements, a query must contain one
for each for
modify records
The complete query
end commands
part of the query,
are required after
procedure reads:
The second part of this query

is
initiated
CUSTOMER
all
from
each record selected hy the
in CUSTOMERS
ORDER ENTRY
first for
command. For
further explanation, see

nested actions in the DQL
end
for
hy the second for
command are performed for
= blank then
enter a record
copy
nested within the first. This

that all the actions
means
ORDER ENTRY
with POSTED = NO
for
if
in
the query.
one for each for command.
POST ORDERS
for the
There must he one end

command for each for, if,
while, and case command
Le.xicon at the hack of this
LINE ITEMS
modify records
in
volume.
INVENTORY
QTY ON HAND := QTY QN HAND

end
end
This
fulfills the
The
first
procedure's two-part objective:
half of the query tells DataEase to select the
ENTRY records that haven't

new customer
The second
ORDER
already been posted and post the
information into the
CUSTOMERS
fomi.
half of the query tells DataEase to select the related
LINE ITEMS
records and modify the
INVENTORY
form by
subtracting the quantity ordered from the quantity on hand.
Volume
4-6

Saving the Procedure
If
you are creating
this
the next section, select
procedure as you read, before proceeding

Save Procedure (Option 7) on the DQL
to
menu.
DataBase prompts:
Please enter the procedure name:
In response, type:
POST ORDERS
saves the procedure on
dist;
and press RETURN. DataBase

and returns you to the DQL menu.
is saved on disk, you can

any of the following methods:
After the procedure
1.
later
execute
it
by
Load Procedure (Option 8) on the DQL menu

select the procedure name from the list of
procedures DataBase displays. Binally, select Run
Procedure (OpUon 1).
Select
and then
OR
2.
With no procedure loaded in memory, first select Run

Procedure and then select Post Orders from the list of
procedures DataBase displays.
OR
3.
Specify the
command
name of
the procedure in a
run procedure
within a Control Procedure query or on a
custom menu.
Next, we'll create a procedure that determines the discount given to
who places an order from the Down East Christmas
each customer
catalog.
4-7
Volume
DEFINE QLERY;
PROCEDURE 2:
Calculate Discount
The second procedure
the
is
based on the
fact that the
Down
East
grants a Christmas discount to each customer based on
Compan\
the
HIGH LEVEL EXAMPLE
amount the customer purchases from the company throughout

year. The object of the procedure is to calculate the following
for each customer:
amount ordered
since the start of the year.
The
The total dollar amount of the customer's order from

company's Christmas catalog.
The
total dollar
total dollar
the
amount of the discount on each customer's
Christmas catalog order.
Once each of these
totals is
determined,
we
use a variable (an
expression that represents a varying value) to store the calculated

result. This lets us use the values as often as we want without
having to repeat the formulas used
The query
DataBase
1.
for the
to
do
all
them.
to derive
CALCULATE DISCOUNT procedure
must
tell
an expression
used
during the processing of a
of the following:
customer's Christmas order
total,
one
customer's annual purchase
total,
and one
calculating the
sum
to store
each
to store
and global. A temporary

each
total.
Process the unposted
2.
is
query. DataBase uses rviv)

r)'pes of variables: temporary
Create three separate variables: one to store each
customer's discount
variable
that represents a value
ORDER ENTRY
records
of the Christmas order total for
each customer.
variable can only hold a value

during the current procedure;
a global variable can pass a
value from one procedure to
another. In all other respects,
the two types of variables
function identically.
Set up discounts based on annual purchase totals with
3.
the discounts expressed as a dollar
amount
to
be
subtracted from the Christmas order total.
Process the related
4.
the
sum of
all
LINE ITEMS
the orders
records, calculating
made by each customer
since
the start of the year.
Modify
5.
the
ORDER ENTRY
customer's discount
Volume
in the
records, entering each
discount
field.
4-8

Query
for the Calculate Discount
The
query for the
full
Procedure
reads as
follows:
define
define
define
for
temp "Christmas" Number

temp "annual" Number
temp "discount" Number
ORDER ENTRY
POSTED = NO
with
assign temp Christmas
QTY ORDERED)
:=
sum
of
LINE ITEMS (unit cost
'
assign temp annual := sum of ORDER ENTRY named

YTD" with (DATE between 01/01/88 to current date and
customer # = ORDER ENTRY customer #)
sum
of
qty ordered)
case (temp annual)

value < 300
:
assign temp discount := temp Christmas

value between 300 to 1000
others
0.10
0.15
0.20
end
modify records
discount
:=
temp discount
end

Notice
When
first that this
at the start.
if
in a
This makes
necessary, and
query does not
using variables
it
also
it
start
with a for
command.
query, you should define the variables

ea,sy to find
makes
(and change) the variables
the query easier to follow.
Volume
DEFINE QUERY:
Now,
The
let's
look
hne
first
query one statement
at this
in the
..
HIGH LEVEL EXAMPLE

at
a time.
query creates and names a temporary variable
To define a variable you must

specify the variable' s
to hold the Christmas order total for each customer:
and
This
first line
name
You can use any
name you like, but the name

must be enclosed in quotes.
define
type.
After specifying the type,
has five elements:
insert a space followed by a
The
DQL define command.
This
tells
DataEase
to create a
period. The define
command
always followed by a
period, not a semicolon.
is
variable.
The keyword temp. This
The name of the
tells DataEase the variable

temporary variable, not a global variable.
variable (Christmas
must be enclosed
in
quotes
when
).
it is
The name of a
first
is
variable
specified
in a query.
The
type of the variable (a Number). A variable can be a

number, a text expression, or any other DataEase field type
except Choice, Dollar, or Yes/No.
The
A period.
The denne command must always end with
a period.
three lines of the query are similar in purpose:
first
define
define
define

These statements create three temporary variables: one to store

each customer's Christmas order total, one to store each customer's
ANNUAL purchase total, and one to store each customer's discount
total.
The next
the
part of the query tells
DataEase which records
to select in
Primary form:
for
ORDER ENTRY
posted = NO
with
As
in the previous procedure, the first group of records we want

DataEase to select are the unposted ORDER ENTRY records.
These records contain the orders from the Christmas catalog.
Volume
4-10

The next
Christmas order
total for
DataBase how
to calculate the
each customer (the value
we want
The name of a variable
to
only placed
assign to the "Christmas" variable):
QTY ORDERED)
First, the
:=
when
sum
of
LINE ITEMS
(unit
cost
in
it is first
is
quotes
defined.
No
quotes are used after

the variable is defined.
above statement introduces the
DQL assign
command:
:=
tells DataBase to assign Christmas a value.

DataBase automatically inserts the assignment operator symbol (:-)
after the name of the variable. This operator tells DataBase that the
value of the variable is determined by the expression on the right of
the symbol (it functions very much like an equals sign). The
remainder of this line reads:
This statement
sum
of
LINE ITEMS
(unit
This part of the assign statement

assign to the Christmas variable
LINE ITBMS
tells
the
qty ordered)
DataBase what value
sum of the
cost of
all
used
is
assign a value to a
temporary or global variable.
Like the define command, the
assign command must specify
the variable's name and is
followed by a period, not a
semicolon.
to
to
the
related to this order.
In other words, as
DQL sum
cost
The assign command
each
ORDBR ENTRY
record
is
processed, the
DataBase to find the related

LINE ITEMS records with the same order # as the record that is
currently being processed (the Christmas catalog order). DataBase
then multiplies the unit cost by the qty ordered, totals the result,
and stores the calculated total in the Christmas variable.
of relational operator
tells
The sum of relational

operator returns the total of
the values in specified fields
on a related form.
The whole query up

define
define
define
for
to this point reads as follows:

In a query, values in a
ORDER ENTRY
posted = NO
with
math
formula are enclosed
in
parentheses to
the
cost
sum
:=
QTY ORDERED)
of
LINE ITEMS (unit
clarifif
meaning and the sequence of

the math operations.
Volume
DEFINE QUERY:
The next
DataBase
order total for each customer (the value
ANNUAL
Taking
HIGH LEVEL EXAMPLE
to calculate the
we want
annual
to assign to the
variable).
this section a step at a time,
assign temp annual
:=
we
sum
of
begin with:
ORDER ENTRY named
"YTD"
DataBase to assign the annual variable a value

group of ORDER
ENTRY records. This new group of records is distinguished by the
name "YTD" (YEAR TO DATE) and the following new selection
This statement
equal to the
assignment
operator symbol (:=) after the
name of the variable. This
operator tells DataBase that
the value of the variable is
determined by the expression
given to the right of the
symbol (it functions like an
equal sign).
inserts the
tells
sum of
the values in another
criteria:
with (DATE
between 01/01/88
customer
to
current date and
ORDER ENTRY CUSTOMER
#)
Selection criteria used after a

relational operator are always
enclosed
in
parentheses.
DataBase to select a new group of

ORDER ENTRY records those that have a date between the first
day of the year and today's date, and the same customer # as the
current ORDER ENTRY record being processed by the for
These new selection
criteria tell
command.
This
new group of
ORDER ENTRY
records
is
related to the
group by an ad-hoc relationship. An ad-hoc relationship is

a relationship that's created to access a group of records during a
query - by inserting a relational operator and additional selection
criteria into the query, instead of predefining the relationship on the
original
An ad-hoc
relationship is a
relationship that's created
during a queiy (instead of

being predefined on a
Relationship form during
Form
Definition).
Relationships form.
During a query, whenever you want to change the criteria that are
used to select records from a form, you must create a new
relationship. When you change selection criteria, you must assign
each distinct group of records a unique name using the DQL
named
create an ad-hoc
you must give
that relationship a
differentiate
it
name
to
from other
groups of records selected

the same form.
from
operator.
The unique name
When you
relationship,
DataBase distinguish different groups of

records selected from the same form. In the example above, the
second group of ORDER ENTRY records is assigned the name
YTD to distinguish it from the original group of unposted ORDER
ENTRY records selected by the for command.
lets
The named operator
is
used
to
give a relationship a unique
name. You can use any name

you like. The name must be
enclosed
in
quotes when
first specified: thereafter
it is
no
quotes are used.
Volume
4-12
DATAtASE RbHERENCE MANUAL

The
last line in this
section reads:
sum of LINE ITEMS
(unit cost * qtv ordered)
As we explained
for the Christmas variable, this statement tells

DataEase to total the cost of the LINE ITEMS ordered by the
customer whose ORDER ENTRY record is currently being
processed. But now. instead of totalling just this customer's
Christmas catalog order, as each ORDER ENTRY record in the
"YTD'
group
ITEMS
orders
is
processed, DataEase totals all the related
records for that customer.
In effect.
DataEase
LINE
totals all the
made by each customer since the start of the year and

annual variable (see Figure 4-2 below).
stores
the result in the
Predefined
Relat ionsh ip
fld-Hoc
Relationship
Predefined
Relat ionsh p
i
ORDER ENTRY RECORD

processed by the
for comand
ORDER ENTRY RECORDS

uith sane CUSTOMER n
and DTE belueen Bl^BVaa
and CURRENT DATE
Total the LINE ITEMS RECORDS

related to each of the
ORDER ENTRY RECORDS at left
NOTE:
The double arrouhead faces the Many side of the relationship
Figure 4-2-- Calculation
The whole query up

define
define
define
for
Of Annual
Variable
to this point reads as follows:

.
ORDER ENTRY
POSTED = NO
with
QTY ordered)
:=
sum
of

"YTD" with (date between 01/01/88 to current date and
customer
sum
4-13
of
ORDER ENTRY
customer
*
#)
qty ordered)
Volume
DEFINE QUERY:
In the next part of the query
purchase
the records in each group.

that
we
we want DataBase
to divide the annual
groups and assign a different discount to
totals into three
command
HIGH LEVEL EXAMPLE
This process
used to select records
is
similar to the
if
POST ORDERS
in the
procedure:
if
CUSTOMER
# = blank then
enter a record
in
CUSTOMERS
But, instead of specifying only one condition,
we want DataEase
evaluate each record against several values as
shown below:
if
ANNUAL < 300 then assign discount a
ANNUAL between 300

DISCOUNT B - (15%)
if
if
ANNUAL
>1
to
:=
to
(10%)
1000 then assign
000 then assign discount c
However, instead of specifying multiple

single case command (as shown below):
if
:=
(20%)
commands, we can use
case (temp annual)

value < 300
:

others
0.10
0.15
0.20
'
end
In effect, the case
commands.
enclosed
in
It
command w orks
consists of the
like a series of nested if
parentheses. This object can be a field, a constant
The object
value, an expression, or a variable.
is
DQL case command

evahiates a series of
conditions and executes
different actions based on the
The
word case followed by an object

tested against
one or more value statements each of which specifies a comparison

value. The comparison value may be a constant value, an
result of this evaluation.
expression, a variable, or a range of values.
Each value statement
As
in the if
is
command,
followed by one or more action statements.
these actions are conditional
performs the actions that follow the

the comparison
is
first
- DataEase
value statement in which
true for the current record being processed.
The case command must include

also include an others statement.
a closing
If
end command.
It
may
none of the preceding value
Like the if command, the last

statement in a case command
must he followed by an end
command.
statements are true. DataEase automatically executes the actions
following the others statement.
Volume
4-14

In our example, the object
annual
stored in the
take
is
we want DataBase to test is the value

The action we want DataBase to
variable.
modify the value stored
to
Christmas variable by the
in the
appropriate discount rate.
Now.
let's
look again
at the
case in question:
case (temp annual)

value < 300
:
0.10
0.15
others
assign
temp discount
:=
temp Christmas
0.20
end
The
first
value statement
is true for customers whose annual

S300. These customers are assigned a
10% discount on their Christmas catalog order total. The second
value statement is true for customers whose annual purchases are
between $300 and $1000. These customers are assigned a 15%
discount on their Christmas order. All other customers are assigned
purchases
20%
total less than
discount on their Christmas order.
To
generate the net total for each Christmas order invoice, we must
subtract each customer's discount from his order total. But so far
we haven't slored the discount amount for each customer

procedure, we've just calculated it.
The
final part
customer, so
in this
of this query stores the discount amount for each

use this amount later to generate an invoice.
we can
modify records
DISCOUNT
:=
temp discount
end
These three
lines tell DataBase: as the
unposted
ORDER ENTRY
records are processed, modify each record by posting the value

calculated for the discount variable into the discount field on the
ORDER ENTRY
4-15
form.
Volume
DEFINE QUERY;
The completed query
for the
HIGH LEVEL EXAMPLE
reads as follows:
define
define
define
for

ORDER ENTRY
posted = NO
with
qty ordered)
:=
sum
of

"YTD" witfi (DATE between 01/01/88 to current date and
customer # = ORDER ENTRY customer #)
sum
LINE ITEMS
of
(unit
cost
qty ordered)
case (temp annual)

value < 300
:

others
assign temp discount ;= temp Christmas
0.10
0.15
0.20
end
modify records
discount
:=
temp discount
If no form
snd
If
name
is
specified in
a modify records command.
DataBase modifies records

the Primary form.
you're creating this query as you read, press F2
in
SAVE. Then
Save Procedure (Option 7) on the DQL menu to save the

procedure on disk. When DataEase asks you to name the
select
procedure, enter
Volume
CALCULATE DISCOUNT.
4-16

PROCEDURE
3: Print
Invoices
The PRINT INVOICES procedure

to print
tells DataEase what information

on each customer's Christmas order invoice as shown in
Figure 4-3.
DOUN EfiST
Rockport,
(see) 485
DEFINE QUERY:
Query
To
for the Print Invoices
HIGH LEVEL EXAMPLE
Procedure
generate a report that can be formatted like the invoice
shown
in
Figure 4-3. the query reads:

for
ORDER ENTRY
POSTED = NO
with
list
records
ORDER
DATE
groups
# in
CUSTOMER
NAME
ADDRESS
CITY
STATE
ZIP
DISCOUNT
LINE ITEMS PART #
all LINE ITEMS description
all LINE ITEMS UNIT COST
all LINE ITEMS oty ordered
all LINE ITEMS (unit cost * oty ordered)
sum of LINE ITEMS (unit cost * oty ordered)
sum of LINE ITEMS (unit cost * oty ordered)
- discount
;
all
In addition to listing this information

this
procedure to do one
POSTED
more
field
from
NO
to
on the invoice, we also want
important task: change the value
last
YES. This
is
in the
specified by adding three
lines to the query:
modify records
posted
:=
YES
end
Volumes
4-18

Now,
let's
for
review
this
line
by
line.
ORDER ENTRY
The for command
ENTRY
query
selects the query's Primary
form - the
ORDER
form.
with
POSTED =
NO
The with operator introduces the record selection criteria: process

only records with the value no in the posted field.
list
The
records
command
tells DataBase what items we want to

These items (called list items) follow
the list records command. In this report there are two types of list
items: fields from the Primary and/or Secondary forms and values
that are calculated during the query but do not actually appear on
any database forms.
list
appear
records
in the output.
order
This
tells
order
groups
in
DataBase
to
group
LINE ITEMS
records with the same
together and to arrange the groups in ascending order.
DATE
CUSTOMER
NAME
ADDRESS
CITY
STATE
ZIP
DISCOUNT
Each of these eight

form.
semicolon follows each list

item except the last in a list
records command.
Here,
we
lines specifies a field
on the
ORDER ENTRY
are telling DataBase to include the value in each of
these fields in the report output.
4-19
Volume
DEFINE QUERY:
all
all
all
all
ITEMS part #
ITEMS description
ITEMS unit cost
ITEMS oty ordered
LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE
HIGH LEVEL EXAMPLE
Each of these four lines specifies a field on the LINE ITEMS form.
The relational operator all tells DataEase to find every LINE
ITEMS record that has the same order # as the ORDER ENTRY
record that's currently being processed
ITEMS
(it
finds all the
LINE
related to the Christmas catalog order).

all
oty ordered)
The relational operator all

tells DataEase to find each
related record: the relational
operator any tells DataEase to

find the first related record.
These operators can he used
to access information in both
predefined and ad-hoc
relationships.
DataEase to multiply the unit cost by the quantity

ordered for each item ordered from the Christmas catalog and list
This line
tells
this total in the report.
Total
Column on
sum
This line
of
tells
LINE ITEMS
This information
is
displayed
in the
Line
the invoice.
*
qty ordered)
DataEase to calculate the sum of the costs of all the

ordered from the Christmas catalog and list this
calculated total in the report. This information
is
displayed as the
Overall Line Total on the invoice.
sum
-
This line
list
of LINE ITEMS (unit COST

discount
qty ordered)
tells
DataEase
to calculate the
item and then subtract the value
same sum
in the
as the previous
ORDER ENTRY
amount. The result is the net total for each

order, taking into account each customer's discount as calculated in
this procedure. This information is displayed as the Order Total on
discount
field
from
this
the invoice.
modify records
POSTED
end
The
is
;=
YES
last three lines tell
processed, change the value in the
Volume
ORDER ENTRY record

posted field from NO to YES.
DataEase: as each
4-20

THE CONTROL PROCEDURE:
Mail Order
As we mentioned at the start of this volume, a Control procedure

can be used to manage almost every element of DataBase, including
combining menus, input forms, procedures, conditional
output into fully automated business applications.
Control procedure can be used
and
menu
However, they
let
you
conditionally display forms,
run reports,
etc.
DataEase
versions 4.0 or higher link the

power of transaction
to:
Execute any DataEase menu option from within the procedure.

In this respect. Control procedures are similar to the chain
menus available in previous DataEase versions. However,
Control procedures let you combine DQL conditional logic
with the chain
processing with the

ease-of-use approach
DataEase has always
championed.
processing capabilities.
DQL Procedures together and execute them automatically.
Link
Pass values
Now,
actions,
Control procedures function

similarly to chain menus in
previous DataEase versions.
among
we'll demonstrate
procedures.
how
the
Down
East
Company can
three preceding procedures together to automate their
link the
whole process
and posting orders, calculating each customer's

To do this, you create a new
combines the three Processing procedures into a Control
for entering
discount, and printing the invoices.
query that
procedure.
The query
for this Control procedure is listed immediately below.

Following the query, the purpose of each line in the Control
procedure is explained.
Query
for Mail
Order Control Procedure
The Control procedure query contains only
ten lines:
The form name
is enclosed in
a record entry
command. A period is
quotes
current date < 12/25/89 then

record entry "ORDER ENTRY"
run procedure "POST ORDERS"
run procedure "CALCULATE DISCOUNT"
run procedure "PRINT INVOICES"
else
message "<Merry Christmas!>|
There are only 300 shopping days left before
we mail our next Christmas Catalog." window
if
end
4-21
in
inserted after specifying the
form name.
The procedure name
used
text constant
is
enclosed
in
{like
any
a query)
quotes in a run
in
procedure command.
A period is inserted after
specifying the procedure name.
Volume 3
DEFINE
QLER\-:
HIGH LE\EL EXAMPLE
Explanation of the Control Procedure

The Control procedure
with the
starts
command w hich
if
sets
up a
conditional action:
if
This
current date < 12/25/1989 then
DataBase
tells
commands
else
to
execute
all
the actions
as long as the current date
is
between the
before
if
and the
December
25th.
on or after 12/25/89. DataBase ignores the commands

the
if
and else commands and resumes processing with the
between
If the
date
is
command.
statement after the else
first
The Control procedure then introduces

record entry
the first action:
"ORDER ENTRY"
The record entry command lets you enter records from within
procedure. The entered data can then be processed by other
procedures specified
command
This
specified form.
tells
in the
Control procedure.
DataBase
In this case
it
to
perform one action: displa\ the

ORDER ENTRY form
displays the
so the operator can enter orders.
The Order Entry form was defined so that DataEase automatically

generates the order # (a sequenced field) as each order is entered.
The name and address information for new customers is manually
entered by the operator. The name and address information for
previous customers is retrieved from the CUSTOMERS form when
the operator enters the customer # in the ORDER ENTRY form.
The
third line of the Control procedure specifies:
run procedure
"POST ORDERS"
The run procedure command executes a procedure just as if you

selected the Run Procedure option on the DQL menu. When
DataEase reaches the end of the procedure,
executes the next
When
record
the
the
command
POST ORDERS
in the
LINE ITEMS
QTY ON HAND
The
automatically
is
run.
DataEase creates a new
new customer, copying

information from the ORDER ENTRY' form.
form
The merchandise ordered from

the
it
Control procedure.
procedure
CUSTOMERS
name and address
in the
for each
the Christmas catalog
is
posted
in
form and ordered items are subtracted from the
fields in the
INVENTORY
form.
fourth line specifies:
Volume
4-22

run procedure
command
This
"CALCULATE DISCOUNT"
executes the
amount ordered by a customer

from the company's Christmas catalog, 2) calculates the total dollar
amount ordered by that customer since the beginning of the year,
and 3) calculates and posts a discount on the Christmas order based
on the customer's total annual purchases.
that
The
1 )
calculates the total dollar
Control procedure specifies:
fifth line in the
run procedure
"PRINT INVOICES"
This command executes the final PRINT INVOICES procedure.

This procedure prints an invoice for each customer's Christmas
order by 1) retrieving and totalling the cost of all the ordered items
from the LINE
ITEMS
discount (as calculated
form and
in the
2) applying the customer's
previous procedure) to yield a net
amount.
The
The
sixth line in the Control procedure contains the else
else
command
current date
is
tells
on or
DataEase what action
after
December
to
command.
perform
if
the
25th.
else
message "<Merry Christmas!>|

There are only 300 shopping days left before
we mail our next Christmas Catalog." window
end
The next
line contains the
command
marks. In
DataEase
DQL
message command. The message
DataEase to display the text enclosed in quotation

the message text itself, the angle brackets < > tell
tells
to display the text in red (a user-defined color choice),
each vertical
line
tells
DataEa.se to insert a line break, and the
window command following the quotation tells DataEa.se

the message in a window in the center of the screen.
to display
The last line in the Control procedure contains the end command.
marks the end of the actions initiated by the if command. The
Control procedure does not require a second end command, as
there
4-23
is
no other command
in the
It
procedure that requires an end.
Volume
DEFINE QUERY:
Summary
(Putting
In this example,
menu and
the
All
when you
specify the
MAIL ORDER
displays the
It
HIGH LEVEL EXAMPLE
Together)
select
Run Procedure from
MAIL ORDER
the
DQL
Control procedure (or specify
option on a custom User menu). DataBase
ORDER ENTRY
form.
You
can then enter records
in
DataBase Record Entry procedures.

Each time you press F5 FORM CLEAR, DataBase displays a new
blank record just like normal record entry.
the form using the standard
When you
finish entering records
and press ESC. DataBase
command in the Control procedure

the PRINT INVOICES procedure.
automatically executes each

until
it
When
reaches the end of
the Control procedure
returns to the form or
is
completed. DataBase automatically
menu from which
the procedure
was
originally called.
Volume
4-24
Chapter 5
Define Format/Print Style:
Designing Report Output

QL
I
procedures are often used to create report output for

printing and display. DataBase provides eight predefined
formats that
can create your
let
you easily produce
own custom
reports.
formats. All of the
In addition,
DQL
you
fomiatting
The format defines how data

is
output. All the
DQL
formatting options can also he

used with Quick Reports to
design report output.
options can also be used with Quick Reports to design or enhance
procedure output.
For more precise control of your output. DataEase also provides the
DQL output command. The output command can be used
anywhere in a query to specify the exact location of the output. For
more information on the output command, see the DQL Lexicon at
the back of this volume.
THE PURPOSE OF THE REPORT FORMAT

Although the query
include in a report,
information.
DataEase what
tells
it
field values
and
how to physically
DataEase how to arrange
doesn't specify
The forrtial
tells
statistics to
lay out the
the output
mailing labels, invoices, checks, tabular
produce form
Defining the format is complementary to Form
Definition. In Form Definition you define the format for data
to
letters,
DataEase what
required for a
report. The format tells
DataEase how to lay out thai
query
tells
information
is
data.
reports, etc.
input; the report format defines
how
the data
is
to be
output.
REPORT FORMAT ELEMENTS

A
report format consists of three elements:
Formatting Commands: Special commands
DataEase
how to layout the information requested in the query. There
are eight Formatting Commands: .header, .footer, .group
header, .items, .group trailer, .end, .page, and .call. All
formatting
commands
that tell
are preceded by a period, so they are
commands. A format must contain an .items

command and an .end command. The other commands are
optional. Dot commands must begin in column 1 of the format.
often called dot
5-1
A DataEase format can
store
up to 4000 characters and

occupy up to 16 screens. The
format is composed of three
elements: Formatting
Commands. Format
Te.xt.
and
Output Fields.
Volume
DEFINE FORMA
Format Text:
T/P
RINT STYLE: DESIGNING REPORT OUTPUT
Descriptive text such as the Titles, Headers,
Page Numbers, Boundary Lines, etc. You enter Format Text

in the format directly where you want the text to appear in the
output.
Format
text
Fields: Locations
is
an optional part of the format.
where the
field values
processed by the query actually appear
To
insert a field in a report format,
from the records
in the
move
report output.
the cursor to the
Then press
position where you want the field values to appear.
FIO FIELD and
from the menu DataBase

and type in a new field formula.
select the field
RETURN
displays, or press
To insert afield in a report

format, move the cursor to the
want the
appear and
location where you

field values to
FIO FIELD. When

DataBase displays a menu,
select the field from the menu
or type in a new field formula.
press
shows a sample report that uses many of the report

formatting commands. The text shown in the report (such as
Department Total) is Format Text, and the shaded rectangles
represent areas where the field values from each processed record
Figure 5-
are displayed or statistically summarized.
Note
that Figure 5-1 represents the report output (with annotated
formatting commands),
command must
begin
report formats appear in
In the format, each

on a separate line. Examples of
the reference pages throughout this section.
iiol
in
the report format.
column
DOUN EAST COMPANY

Monthly Report
October 1989
header
Marketing Departnent
.footer
*-
.group header
Departnent Total
Grand Total
Figure 5-1
Volume
- Sample
itens
.group trailer
.end
Page Z
Report Showing Formatting
Commands
5-2

HOW THIS CHAPTER IS ORGANIZED
This chapter
tells
you how
and modify formats.
to select, create,
It
includes numerous example formats with the query that generates

the format and the report output
produces (as
it
predefined formats are presented
first.
detailed instructions that explain
how
edit a predefined format.
It
may
They
in
Figure 5-1). The
are followed by
to create a
custom format or
be helpful to review the examples
in this section before trying to design
your
own custom
reports.
PREDEFINED FORMATS
DataEase provides several predefined formals which you can use to
save time. These system-defined formats can be used "as is" or can
be edited to reflect personal tastes. In general, many users find that
the best
way
to
format a report
is
to generate the report in a
predefined format and then modify
it
until they are satisfied
with
DataEase has nine predefined

formats. Often, the easiest
way to produce a report is to
use a predefined format and
then modify it to meet your
requirements.
the report's appearance.
CUSTOM FORMATS
you can create a custom format
Alternatively,
that lets
you design
own specifications. In creating a custom format, you

Formatting Commands that tell DataEase how you want your
report to your
enter
However, a report format can also include titles,

boundary lines, page numbers, field names, and other descriptive
information. When you are designing a custom report format, you
must position this information where you want it to appear in the
report formatted.
The custom format lets you

design a report to your own
specification. It skives you
complete control over the
appearance of a report.
output.
Adding form
a centered
and placing fields in a format is almost identical

form in Form Definition. For example, if you want
text
to designing a
title at
the top of the report,
you type
top center of the format exactly where you want

Similarly,
you position
a field
where you want
it
the
it
title text at
the
to appear.
to
appear by
moving the cursor to the appropriate position and pressing

FIO FIELD to insert the field in the format. After each field is
inserted, press F2 SAVE to save the field location as part of the
format.
5-3
Volume
DEFINE FORMAT/PRINT STYLE: DESIGNING REPORT OUTPUT

DEFAULT REPORT FORMAT
If
you don't define a format
for a procedure,
automatically creates a default
columnar
DataEase
format.
The columnar
format displays each record on a separate line with fields laid out
one beside another in vertical columns. If you have specified
grouping
in the
creates a columnar format
you don't select a different
format option.
if
query, DataEase automatically prompts you for the
additional information
it
requires to properly format the output.
SAVING A FORMAT
To
save a format, press F2
SAVE.
temporarily in the computer's memory.
To
permanently, select Save Procedure on the

the procedure and the format
on
Select
This saves the format
the
save the format
DQL
menu. This saves
Save Procedure from
DQL menu
to
save a
format on disk as a part of the

procedure.
disk.
MODIFYING A FORMAT
Once you have saved a format, the Define Format option on the
DQL menu changes to Modify Format. You can modify a format
at
any time. In order
to
modify a previously defined format, the
procedure has to be loaded into memory.
If the
procedure
is
not
memory, select Option 8. Load Procedure,

and then select the name of the procedure to load from the menu of
procedures displayed by DataEase. Once the procedure is loaded,
currently in working
select
Option
5,
Modify Format.
When you modify
an existing format, DataEase asks:
Do you want to keep the
existing format?
Answer yes
if you want to make changes to the existing format.

you answer no. DataEase abandons the existing format entirely,
and you must redefine your format from the beginning.
If
TYPES OF REPORT FORMATS

select Define Format from the DQL menu (or from the
Quick Reports menu), DataEase displays a menu of the nine
available report formats as summarized on the next page:
When you
QBE
Volume
5-4

QUICK SUMMARY OF THE FORMAT MENU OPTIONS
1
The columnar format displays one record on each

fields laid out
one beside another (similar
line
2:
The
3:
The record entry format uses a Record Entry form

report format (identical to Form View).
4:
The template format uses an
field
per line format displays one
field
with
Table View).
to
on each
line.
as the
existing user-defined form as
the report format.
5:
The GrafTalk format automatically sends

DataEase GrafTalk
to
have GrafTalk to successfully use
6:
The custom format
the report data to
produce a chart or graph. You must
lets
this format.
you design a report
to
your
own
specifications.
7:
The export formats prepare data for use in other programs.

They include WordPerfect, Mail-merge, MultiMate,
GrafTalk, Lotus 1-2-3/Symphony,
DIP (Data Interchange
Pormat), and Pixed and Variable Length
8:
The mailing
labels format
is
ASCIL
used to automatically format
output to be printed on "multi-across" mailing labels.
9:
The CrossView format automatically sends

DataEase CrossView for statistical analysis.
the report data to
you select any format except custom. DataEase prompts you for
any additional information it requires and then displays the report
If
format. You can use the format "as is" or edit it (except the Lotus
export format, which cannot be edited). To use the unmodified
format, press P2 SAVE. To display the report in the chosen
format, select
format
is
Run Procedure (Option
described in detail
in the
except the CrossView format, which

the
end of
this
1)
on the
DQL
menu. Each
reference pages of this chapter,

is
described in an
addendum
volume.
If you select the custom fonmat, DataEase displays a blank screen

on which you design your own format.
5-5
at

Report Formatting
How to
Define a Format: Overview
is defined after you write a DQL query (or select list

Quick Reports). Follow the steps below to define a
format. See specific reference pages for more information on a
The format
fields in
particular topic.
2.
Format from
Reports menu.
Select Define
DataBase
lists
the
DQL or the QBE
the available formats.
format you want to use from the
3.
Answer
to format.
Quick
Select the type of
list.
the questions DataBase asks.
from format
The questions vary
See the reference pages on the
format you've chosen for more information on specific

questions.
4.
DataBase displays the format. You can now
edit the
format
as desired, except for the Lotus 1-2-3 export format, which
cannot be edited.
5.
Add
format text by simply typing the text on the format
where you want
it
to appear.
You
can add
titles,
draw
borders, or add any desired text to a format.
6.
Add
fields to the format
want the
field to
by positioning the cursor where you
appear and pressing FIO FIELD.
DataBase displays a menu,
When
you want
to insert
text, just as
you can
select the field
in the format.
7.
You can cut and paste fields and

during Form Definition.
8.
When
the format
is
defined as you want, press F2
save the format in memory.
on
disk,
(or
Save Report from the
Volume
format
To
you must select Save Procedure from the
QBE
SAVE
to
save the format permanently
DQL menu
Quick Reports menu).
5-6

Report Formatting
How to
To
Define a Format: Overview
illustrate the
processs of formatting a report, Figure 5-2 shows
the query, format, and output for a procedure that Hsts the state.
LAST NAME, and ACCOUNT BALANCE

the
CUSTOMERS
Query
form.
field values for
each customer
in

Format Types
Columnar Format
The columnar format places each

column and uses the Field Names
report.
If the
Field
Name
DataBase
splits the
is
as the
column headings
in the
longer than the field length, DataBase
more lines. If you don't like the way

Field Names, you can edit the format.
name onto two
splits the
field in a separate vertical
or
The columnar format prints

each fie Id in a separate
vertical cohimn and uses the
field names as the column
headings.
Report Width
In a
columnar
format. DataBase automatically assigns each
column
a width equal to the Field Length, and then totals the width of all
the columns plus a varying number of spaces to determine the line
length required for the report.
You need
this
much
space on a line
to be able print the report correctly.
After making the calculation, DataBase displays the message:
Minimum
where nnn
length
is
is
line length for
a columnar report
is
nnn
the length of the line in characters. If the
less than
minimum
80 characters. DataBase generates the format,
evenly spacing the fields across the report width.
If the
minimum
length exceeds 80 characters (the default screen width), DataBase
asks you to specify the width you want for the report and evenly
spaces the fields across the specified length.
DataBase always inserts 1-2 spaces at the beginning of the line,

from 1-4 spaces between each vertical column, and from 1-4 spaces
at the end of the line to evenly space the columns.
See the following page for an example.
Volume
5-8

Format Types
Columnar Format
(cont.)
For example, assume we want to include each customer's first

NAME, LAST NAME, ADDRESS, CITY, STATE, and ZIP CODE in the report
output. The query contains the following six list items:
Field
FIRST
Name
NAME
Field
Length

Format Types
Columnar Format
(cont.)
Automatic Spacing
you specify a report width longer than the minimum required line
DataBase tries to evenly increase the spaces in the line. For
example, if you specify a line length of 150 characters, DataBase
If
length,
assigns a width of 133 characters calculated as follows: 107 field

characters,
spaces
line.
at
The
20 spaces between
fields (4
between each column), 2
the beginning of the line, and 4 spaces at the end of the

actual report width (133 characters)
specified width of 150 characters, because the
system-defined spacing
is
less than the
used.
The following two pages show examples of

output for two different columnar reports.
Volumes
is
maximum
the query, format,
and
5-10

Format Types
Columnar Format
(cont.)
This page contains the default columnar format and part of the
report output for a query that asks DataBase to Hst the
CUSTOMERS
records,
ACCOUNT balance
Query
showing the state, last name, and
field values for
each customer.
EFINE FORMAT/PRINT STYLE: DESIGNING REPORT OUTPUT

Format Types
Columnar Format With Grouping and
Group
If
Statistics
Statistics
you have specified grouping on any
fields in the query,
DataBase
prompts:
Do you want Group Headers and Group
Trailers?
If you answer yes DataBase creates group headers and

each grouped field.
Group headers
in the
query
is
are group names.
The
automatically included
field
in the
trailers hold group statistical totals; they
specified statistics.
You can
to generate a
used to group the data
group header. Group

group totals for any
grand totals by
command. This position
The .group header and .group

commands are used to
trailer
position group-level statistics

also generate
positioning a total field after the .end
DataBase
list
trailers for
grand
total rather
tells
than a total for a specific
group.
Using the example on the previous page, we can group the records
by STATE and generate statistical totals for each state with the
following query:
Query
for
CUSTOMERS
list
records
STATE in groups with group-totals

LAST NAME
ACCOUNT BALANCE item sum
end
Format
ACCOUNT BALANCE
LAST NAME
STATE
.group header
.items
.group
trailer
State Total
.end
Grand
Volume
Total
5-12

Format Types
Columnar Format With Grouping and
In this example, the
.group header
Statistics (cont.)
is the state field value.

which is }wl a field value, is
typed in the format directly where you want the text to appear in
the report output. Report boundary lines (===) are manually
entered in the report format where you want them to appear in
The .group
text
trailer text {Stale Total),
the report output.
Report Output
LAST NAME
STATE
ACCOUNT BALANCE
CT
Brown
$250.00
Davis
State Total
;;3oo.oo
McDonald
$425.00
$425.00
$550.00
FL
State Total
NJ
Adams
$595.00
$525.00
$1,120.00
Hill
State Total
NY
Anderson
Cooper
Evans
$350.00
S725.00
;;865.00
;;675.oo
Ivers
Jenkins
State Total
$140.00
$2,755.00
Grand Total
In addition to
Grand Total
command.
5-13
group
statistic
$4,840.00
totals, this report
which appears
format includes a
after the .end formatting
Volume
DEFINE FORMA
RINT STYLE: DESIGNING REPORT OUTPUT
T/P
Format Types
Field per Line
Format
per line format produces a report with one field on each

This format is used when printing a large
that
cannot fit across the width of a page.
number of fields
The
field
line of the report.
The field per line format

pn/ifi one field on each line of
the report. A blank line is
inserted between records.
When you
select field
per
DataBase positions each output
line.
on a separate line. The name of the field appears at the left

margin and the field value begins in column position 40. The fields
in each record appear directly below one another. A single blank
field
line
is
inserted
between records.
For example, suppose you want to include all the following fields
from an INVENTORY form in the report output. The query looks
as follows:
Query
for
INVENTORY
list
records
PART NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
STORAGE LOCATION
;
VENDOR CODE
VENDOR NAME
COST PER UNIT
QUANTITY ON HAND
REORDER LEVEL
LEAD TIME
REORDER AMOUNT
end
Format
.items
PART NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
STORAGE LOCATION
VENDOR CODE
VENDOR NAME
COST PER UNIT
QUANTITY ON HAND
REORDER LEVEL
LEAD TIME
REORDER AMOUNT
.end
Volumes
5-14

Format Types
Field per Line
Format
(cont.)
Report Output
PART NUMBER

Format Types
Record Entry Format
The record entry format produces a
report that duplicates the
layout of the specified Record Entry form.
The record entry formal prints

the output using the layout of
the specified Record Entry
When you
form.
select the
record entry format. DataEase creates a
format with the same lasout as the Record Entr\' form. DataEase
automatically uses
specify
list
from the form; you only have to

you want to group, sort, or generate statistics.
all fields
fields if
For example, suppose you want
to include
NAME. ADDRESS. CITY. STATE, and

query looks as follows:
ZIP
CODE
each customer's flll
in
your report output. The
Query
for
CUSTOMERS
records
FULL NAME
list
ADDRESS
CITY
STATE
ZIP
end
Format
.items nosplit
FULL NAME
ADDRESS
CITY
STATE
.end
Report Output
full NAME John Adams
ADDRESS
8 Smallwood Drive
CITY
Longbranch state NJ
zip
07740
NY
zip
11725
FULL name Pat Brown

ADDRESS
25 Evergreen Circle
CITY
Norwalk
state CT
zip
06851
FULL NAME
ADDRESS
CITY
Lvnn Anderson
30 Bainbridge Ave
Commack
Volume 3
state
5-16

Format Types
Template Format
The template fomiat

shared
among
is
used to create a generic format that can be
a variety of users to create standardized reports.
Even users whose databases are named and structured differently

can use report templates for common or roll-up reporting.
You
define the template
Form
first in
Definition.
The template format
is
specially designed form that
can he used as a generic

format for a variety ofDQL
Procedures and Quick Reports.
Define a template
any other form, except you enter report formatting

commands directly on the form (the formatting commands are
explained in the custom formats section). Type the form text and
position fields in the appropriate places on the form. Specify Field
Type, and Length, and skip all other field questions. Use generic
Field Names (such as name, id#, etc.) to make the format
just like
compatible with as
many
different output requirements as possible.
You should create and store your template forms in a separate

database so you don't confuse them with your Record Entry forms.
It's also important to keep track of the DOS filename for each
template since you must use this name to specify the template.
When you
Name
select template.
of the
Template
Enter the template's

press
RETURN.
DOS
file:
filename (including drive
If
By
field
you
order 2: By
select
By
template fields
letter)
and
DataEase then asks:
Match Template Fields

1
DataEase asks:
field
to report fields by:
name
field order, the report output is
matched
to the
order the fields are listed in the query.
If you
matched to the template
fields by Field Name (name in the output is matched to the name
field on the template, state is matched to the state field, etc.).
select
By
field
NOTE: If the
in the
name,
template
the report output
is in
is
a directory other than the database
you must use the DOS SUBST command to

substitute a drive letter for the name of the directory
where your templates reside. For example: SUBST Q:
directory,
C:\DEASE\TPLATES.
DataEase does not
5-17
let
This
is
the only place
you enter a
where
DOS PATH.
Volume

Format Types
Template Format
To maximize
in
Field
Names
#.
Names
to
make
it
template field
(e.g., a
INVOICE
PART
#.
and ? wild card symbols

match report output
named *# can be matched with
the *
you can use
flexibility,
template Field
CUSTOMER
(cont.)
#,
easier to
etC).
For example, assume we create a template with a field called

*NAME. We want to include each customer's full name, address,
CITY, STATE, and ZIP code in the report output. The query looks as
follows:
Query
for
CUSTOMERS
records
FULL NAME
list
ADDRESS
CITY
STATE
ZIP
end
In this example,
if
we
FULL NAME field data

If
we
tell
is
DataEase
to
match By field order, the
assigned to the first field
in the
template.
DataEase to match By field name, the full name

is matched to the first template field with a Field
that contains the text string name. In either case, the
tell
information
Name
template format looks as follows:
When using the template

format, if two or more fields
in the qiieiy match a single
field in the format, only the
first query field appears in the
report output. Ifnw or more
format fields match one field
in the query, each format field
receives a matching value.
Format
.items
NAME
address
STATE
CITY
ZIP
.end
The
report output for this query appears on the next page.
Volume
5-18

Format Types
Template Format
(cont.)
Report Output
NAME
ADDRESS
CITY
NAME
ADDRESS
CITY
NAME
ADDRESS
CITY
The dotted
format
text.
John Adams
8 Smallwood Drive
Longbranch
state NJ
zip
Lynn Anderson
30 Bainbridge Ave.
Commack
state
zip
11725
zip
06851
NY
Pat Brown
25 Evergreen Circle
Norwalk
STATE CT
line
(...)
It is
that
typed
07740
appears between one record and the next

in the
is
format immediately above the .end
command.
5-19
Volume
DEFINE FORMAT/PRINT STYLEiDESlGNING REPORT OUTPUT

Format Types
GrafTalk Chart Format
The GrafTalk Chart format
translates the output
from a
DQL
Procedure into a chart or graph created by DataBase GrafTalk. our
companion business graphics product. To use this format,

DataEase and GrafTalk must be installed on the same computer
directories located in the DOS PATH. When you run the
The GrafTalk Chart format

lets you create a chart using
data generated hy a DQL
Procedure or Quick Report.
in
procedure, DataEase invokes GrafTalk and displays the output in a

business graphic format, such as a bar or pie chart. For example,
assume we want
BALANCE
to
produce a chart
information for each
shows the ACCOUNT

The query looks as follows:
that
state.
Query
CUSTOMERS
for
list
records
STATE
in
groups
ACCOUNT BALANCE
sum
end
When you
select the
GrafTalk Chart format. DataEase displays

The format looks as follows:
the Formatting screen.
Format
ACCOUNT
STATE
.items
.end
.call
GrafTalk /D
This format
is
%r %e
explained as follows:
GrafTalk puts the Field Names

column headings for the chart.
The
.call
to invoke
command
GrafTalk
at the
at the
top of the format as
bottom of the format
tells
after all the records selected
DataEase
by the query
have been processed.
The /D parameter
tells
GrafTalk to draw a chart using the data
transferred from DataEase.
The
%r parameter specifies the GrafTalk chart filename

DBG extension).
%e parameter specifies the DataEase data filename
(the report filename with a
The
(DAT extension).
Volume
5-20

Format Types
GrafTalk Chart Format (cont.)
When
can
1.
the
GrafTalk Chart formal is displayed on the

column headings within these restrictions:
screen,
you
edit the
GrafTalic uses the
first
eight characters of the field
name
as
column name, which can include single embedded spaces

only. The first character of each column name must be a
the
letter.
2.
Column names must be
3.
The column name format

formatting command.
separated by
line
two or more
spaces.
must remain above the .items
The
first time you run the procedure, DataBase automatically

invokes GrafTalk so you can define the GrafTalk chart (unless you
have already created the chart
see the note below). In GrafTalk
you specify the
details about the chart, for
example, whether
it
is
bar chart or a pie chart and whether it should display on the screen
or be drawn on a plotter. Refer to the Graffalk manuals for
information on
NOTE:
how
to create charts.
You can also create the chart

running the
DQL
chart the same
.DBG
in GrafTalk before
Procedure. Be sure to give the
the DQL Procedure with a

Refer to the GrafTalk manuals for
name as
e.xtension.
information on creating a GrafTalk chart.
To export data to GrafTalk to he used independent of

DataBase, use the GrafTalk export format (see the
Export section of this chapter for more information).
5-21
Volume

Format Types
DataBase automatically assigns a disk destination on the Print Style

screen when you save a GrafTalk chart format. When the
procedure is run, the output is written to a file which is passed to
GrafTalk. DataBase automatically creates a unique DOS file name
for this file. If you wish, you can overwrite this filename on the
Print Style screen (be sure to include the drive letter
from
if
it
is
different
the default data drive).
When
the procedure
is
run.
DataBase executes the
.call
command,
invoking GrafTalk and providing both the GrafTalk chart (the %r

parameter) and DataBase data filename (the %e parameter). After
the chart
created. GrafTalk automatically returns control to
is
DataBase.
To modify
the GrafTalk chart definition, enter GrafTalk and use the
Restore Chart Utility to load the chart and

wish. After you save the revised chart
in
make any changes you

GrafTalk.
it
is
automatically called by DataBase whenever you run the report.

It's
the
procedure
is
run.
not necessary to resave or modify the DataBase procedure in
any way
report.
to reflect the
changes to the
chart.
Whenever you run
this
GrafTalk recreates the chart with your new data.
How to
The
When
DataBase executes the .call

command, invoking GrafTalk
and specifyini^ both the
GrafTalk chart and
DataBase datafde names.
Create a GrafTalk Chart Format
steps to automatically create a GrafTalk chart format from
DataBase are summarized below.
1.
Define your query as desired.
2.
Select GrafTalk chart as the format.
3.
Save the procedure using Option
DQL
7.
Save Procedure, on the
menu. You must save the procedure before going any
farther,
because DataBase uses the name of the procedure
when
names
Volume
it
Whenever you run this

procedure. GrafTalk
recreates the chart with your
new
data.
the GrafTalk chart.
5-22

Format Types
4.
Select Option 2. Start

to help
5.
New
memory
Procedure. This clears
DataEase run the procedure.
Select Option
Run Procedure, and
1,
select the procedure
you
have just saved.
6.
If the Print
Style Screen displays, just press F2
SAVE. Do
not change anything on this screen. GrafTalk uses the

values that have been automatically entered there by
DataEase.
7.
In a
few moments, the GrafTalk Main Menu displays.
Design your chart as desired, following the instructions in the

GrafTalk manuals on how to create a chart. Make sure you
specify whether you want your chart to display on the screen
(the default) or
8.
go
to a printer, plotter, etc.
You do
not have to enter data, since your data will come

from DataEase automatically. However, you must use the
GrafTalk Select Data option to select the data to be included

in the chart. See the GrafTalk manuals for more information.
9.
Use the GrafTalk Chart Utilities to save the chart. Do not

change the default name provided by DataEase. DataEase
uses this
Be
name
to find the chart
sure to answer
no
to the
when
save
the procedure
data'.'
DataEase provides new data each time you use the

10.
From now
on.
when you
is
run.
question, since
chart.
run the procedure, the chart will
automatically display (or print).
You
will not
have to use the
GrafTalk menus again.
5-23
Volume

Format Types
1.
Any changes
you make
that
to the data in
your form will be
automatically reflected in the chart the next time you run the
procedure.
12. If
you want
to
make changes
chart in GrafTalk.
restore the chart,
Use
to the chart,
you must
the GrafTalk Restore
edit the
Chart option
to
and then make any desired changes. The
changes will be reflected the next time you run the
DQL
Procedure.
NOTE: DataBase and GrafTalk
each create unique
filenames for the chart based on the DataBase report
Do
name and do not save the

B3 to save
the chart, then return to the GrafTalk Main Menu
and e.xit. You automatically return to the menu from
which the DataBase procedure was run.
name.
not change
this
current data with the chart. Simply Press
Volume
5-24

Format Types
The mailing
labels format lets you quickly generate mailing label
output that can be used with preformatted label sheets.
It
can also
be used for any "multi-wide" output report.
The mailing labels format produces output
similar to the field per
The mailing labels format

generates output that can he
used for mailing purposes with
or without preformatted label
sheets.
DataEase positions each output field on a separate

are omitted from the format. Each field
value begins at the left margin. The fields in each record appear
directly below one another. A single blank line is inserted between
line format.
The Field Names
line.
records.
When you
select
How many
mailing labels, DataEase prompts:
labels across?
Enter the number of records to be printed across

direction).
(in a horizontal
DataEase then asks?
How many columns
per label?
Enter the number of characters
in the
widest
answered both of these prompts, press F2
field.
SAVE
When
you've
to save the format.
For example, suppose you want to print each customer's full

NAME, ADDRESS, CITY. STATE, and ZIP CODE on mailing labels that
come
3 across on preformatted sheets. We'll assume that the
widest field
is
25 characters. The query looks like
this:
Query
for
CUSTOMERS
records
FULL NAME
list
ADDRESS
CITY
state;
;
ZIP
end
5-25
Volume
DEFINE FOR MAT/ PRINT
DESIGNING REPORT OUTPUT
ST'tLE:
Format Types
answer to the labels across? question, type 3. In answer to the

columns wide!' question, type 25 (each column is one character).
The report format and output are shown below.
In
Format
.items across 3 wide
25
.end
To
1
print the city, state,
move
and zip code on one
line,
the cursor into the city field, press FIO.
on the format
and specify
suppress spaces; 2) type a comma after the cit'i

paste the state and zip fields onto the same line.
Report Output
John Adams
Lynn Anderson
30 Bainbridge Ave.
Commack, NY 11725
8 Smallwood Drive
Longbranch, NJ 07740
NOTE: When printing

specify the
on continuous form
page length as on
shown
Specification screen (as

chapter).
It
may
format, adding
Volume
field;
labels,
3) cut
and
Pat Brown
25 Evergreen Circle
Norwalk. CT 06851
be sure to
the Print Style

at the
end of this
also he necessary to modify the
e.xtra
blank lines between records.
5-26

Format Types
Export Format
The export format

program.
creates a disk file to export data to another
merge a DataBase data file with a

word processed document such as a form letter, or to export
The export format is used to

export data to another
numerical data from DataBase into a spreadsheet or business

graphics program. DataBase provides eight export formats,
program.
It is
often used to
including tho,se for Lotus 1-2-3, Lotus Symphony, WordPerfect,

WordStar, MultiMate, and most other programs.
When you
What
select export,
is
DataBase asks:
the export format?
DataBase can export data in

formats used hy Lotus 1-2-3.
Lotus Symphony. WordPerfect,
WordStar. MultiMate. and
most other popular programs.
and displays the available formats.

1
Mail-merge
2:
MultiMate
3:
WordPerfect
4:
GrafTalk
5:
Lotus 1-2-3
Export to a Wordstar document.
Bxport to a MultiMate document.
Export to a WordPerfect document.
Export to DataBase GrafTalk.
Export to Lotus 1-2-3 or Lotus
Symphony.
6;
Variable Length
Export variable length ASCII
records.
7:
Fixed Length
8:
DIF
Bxport fixed length ASCII records.
Bxport using the Data Interchange Format.
Files created using export formats are intended to be read

into other
programs. Therefore, the formats do not include headers, footers,
or other non-data output. When creating an export,
be sure to
direct the report output to a disk destination
screen and be sure no printer
5-27
name
is
on the
Print Style
specified.
Volume
DEFINE FORMAT/PRINT
ST'iLE:
DESIGNING REPORT OLTPLT
Export Format
Mail-merge
The Mail-merge export format generates a disk file

merged with WordStar documents (such as merging
information
form
in
that
can be
the addressee
letters).
The Mail-merge export format displays one record on each
carriage return
is
used to separate records and a
comma
is
The Mail-merge export format

exports data in u format that
can he merged with documents
created with WordStar or
other programs that use the
line.
used
Text fields are enclosed in quotation marks.

and Numeric String Fields are listed without quotation
marks (if quotes are required, you can edit the format, inserting the
quotes at either end of the field, before the field separators). After
selecting Mail-merge, you have the option of including Field
to separate fields.
Mail-merge communications
format.
Number
Names
as the first line of the output (the Field
enclosed
Names
are also
in quotes).
For example, suppose you want to include each customer's full

NAME, ADDRESS. CITY, STATE, and ZIP CODE, with the Field Names
in
your report output. The query looks as follows:
Query
for
CUSTOMERS
records
FULL NAME
list
ADDRESS
CITY
STATE
ZIP
end
Format
FULL NAME
.items
_M
ADDRESS
",.,-,,"
,
CITY
",
,
-*
STATE
_ll
"-.r^"
,
ZIP
.end
Report Output
"FULL NAME", "ADDRESS", "CITY", "STATE", "ZIP"
"John Adams", "8 Smallwood Drive", "Lorigbranch", "NJ", 07740
"Lynn Anderson", "30 Bainbndge Ave.", "Commack", "NY", 11725
"Pat Brown", "25 Evergreen Circle". "Norwalk", "CT", 06851
Volume
5-28

Export Format
MultJMate
The MultiMate export format generates a disk file that can

be
merged with MuhiMate documents. When you create a
MultiMate
export file, remember to add the .doc filename
extension used by
"
MultiMate.
documents.
The MultiMate format positions each Field Name on

line. The field value is inserted under
the Field Name
The MultiMate expon format

exports data in a format that
^^ merged with MultiMate
a separate
in the
format. DataEase inserts special codes in the

format to delimit
(I-) and records
(j_).
fields
For example, suppose you want to include each

customer's full
NAME, ADDRESS, CITY, STATE, and ZIP CODE, with the Field
Names
your report output. The query looks as follows:
in
Query
for
CUSTOMERS
records
FULL NAME
list
ADDRESS
CITY
STATE
ZIP
end
Format
.items
l-FULL NAMEI-
l-ADDRESSIl-CITYI-
_L
.end
.call
MMERGE
-q
%m %e
5-29
Volume

Export Format
MultiMate (cont.)
In this format, the
MuhiMate
formatting
commands
(|-)
are inserted
by DataBase on either side of the Field Names and after each

value. The (J) formatting command is the MultiMate end of
field
record symbol.
The
.call
named
command
calls a special
DataBase conversion program
MMERGE that converts the output into the required
MultiMate format.
After DataBase generates the format:
SAVB
1.
Press F2
2.
Select Option 6, Define Print Style on the
DQL menu.
3.
When
is
to save the format.
the Print Style Specification screen
displayed, select
the disk destination.
4.
When you name
the output
file,
be sure to include the
DOS
path for the MultiMate directory, and the MultiMate filename
extension .doc as shown below.
C:\MM\MAILLIST.DOC
When you
select
Run Procedure,
the output file
is
automatically
formatted for use as a MultiMate secondary merge document, with

the following restrictions from the MultiMate program:
The maximum number of records

time
is
The maximum
The maximum number of fields
Field
Volume
that
can be converted
at
one
254. Excess records are discarded.

field
width
Names of more
than
is
156 characters.
is
64 per record.
2 characters
may be truncated.
5-30

Export Format
WordPerfect
The WordPerfect export format generates a disk

merged with WordPerfect documents.
The WordPerfect format

line separated
end of each
Field
can be
positions field values in one continuous
by a hexidecimal code (@[120A])
field.
file that
Names
The WordPerfect export

format exports data in a
format that can he merged
with WordPerfect documents.
that signals the
are omitted.

NAME. ADDRESS, CITY, STATE, and ZIP CODE in your report output.
The query looks
as follows:
Query
for
CUSTOMERS
records
FULL NAME
list
ADDRESS
CITY
STATE
ZIP
end
Format
.items
^@[120A]i
i@[1 20A]s3a8@[1 20A]i@[1 20A]î@[050A]\
.end
In this format, the
@[120A]
that
generates the WordPerfect Merge
The @[050A] generates
is
DataEase
each field value.
the WordPerfect "end
inserted by
Code C^R)
CÊ) Merge Code,
after
of record" code.
5-31
Volume

Export Format
WordPerfect
(cont.)
After DataBase generates the format:
F2
Press
SAVE
to save the format.
2.
Select Option 6, Define Print Style on the
DQL
3.
When
is
menu.
displayed, select
the disk destination.
4.
When you name
DOS
the output
file,
be sure to include the
full
path for the WordPerfect directory, or the directory
where you want
to store the file.
When you
select Run Procedure, the output file is generated as a

WordPerfect secondary merge file. There are no restrictions on the
number of records or
Volume
the length of the fields.
5-32
DATA EASE REFERENCE MANUAL

Export Format
GrafTalk
The GrafTalk Export format creates an output file in a format

can be read by GrafTalk, our companion business graphics
program. Unlike the GrafTalk Chart format described earlier
that
in
chapter (which calls GratTalk and creates a chart from within a

DQL Procedure), the export format creates a file that you use
separately to create a chart or graph with GrafTalk, after you've
exited from DataEase. Use this format if you have DataEase and
this
The GrafTalk Export format

can he used to create GrafTalk
charts and graphs.
GrafTalk installed on different computers.
When you
you want
yes, the
select the
GrafTalk Export format, DataEase asks
to include the Field
record
first
in the
Names
output
file
in the
format.
If
you
contains the Field
Names
which are used as column names by DataEase GrafTalk.

select no, Field
Names
and give the
file,
of the
file
DataEase
created by DataEase.
eight characters of the DataEase Field

in
you
enter GrafTalk and use the data to
In GrafTalk, specify the input as a
DOS name
If
are not included in the report output.
After you create the export

create a chart.
if
select
Names
file,
The
first
are available for use
GratTalk as column names.
For example, suppose you want to produce a chart that shows the
account balance information for each customer. The query looks as
follows:
Query
for
CUSTOMERS
list
records
CUSTOMER #
ACCOUNT BALANCE
;
end
Format
CUST
ACCT BAL
.Items
.end
NOTE: When
usin^^ GrafTalk. field names cannot he longer

than H characters. For this reason, we've changed
the format to CUST #
5-33
and acct
bal.
Volume
3
I

Export Format
GrafTalk (cont.)
Report Output
ACCT BAL
CUST #
2235
4009
3525
6420
1248
5512
7860
1514
0900
6002
595.00
350.00
250.00
725.00
300.00
865.00
525.00
675.00
140.00
425.00
Once you've created a GrafTalk export

column names within these restrictions:
1
GrafTalk uses the
first
format, you can change the
eight characters of the Field
Name
as
column name, which can include single embedded spaces

only. The first character of the column name must be a letter.
the
2.
Column names must be
3.
The column name format

formatting command.
separated by
line
two or more
must remain above
spaces.
the .items
For further information on DataBase GrafTalk, see the GrafTalk

Reference Manuals. The Reader section provides information on
GrafTalk Menu Mode.
Volume
5-34

Export Format
Lotus 1-2-3
When you
Lotus 1-2-3 export format. DataBase creates a
select the
report format file that can be read by Lotus 1-2-3 or Lotus
Symphony.
To
create the
appropriate
Lotus 1-2-3 format, specify a disk filename with

extension on the DataEase Print Style Screen;
can he read into a Lotus

spreadsheet. Do not send a
Lotus export to the screen:
doing so can lock your system.
file
.WKS
for Lotus 1-2-3 Version
.WKl
for Lotus 1-2-3 Versions 2
.WRK
for Lotus
When
the
The Lotus 1-2-3 export format

the Lotus
columnar format
file,
the data
is
arranged
spreadsheet. DataEase creates a
spreadsheet for each record
column containing a
and 3
Symphony
program reads the

in the
field.
in the
source data
file,
in a
row
in the
with each
Since DataEase exports values, not
formulas, the data exported by DataEase
is
compatible with
all
three Lotus formats.
The format
for a Lotus 1-2-3 export looks like this:
Format
.export Lotus 1-2-3
There are three special considerations to keep

preparing a Lotus 1-2-3 export:
DataEase does not display the
in
mind when
field layout
and you
cannot edit the Lotus 1-2-3 export format.
2.
The Lotus
it
3.
1-2-3 output
is
not in
ASCII
format. Sending
to the screen can lock the system.
You cannot
totals, or
use the in groups, in groups with
any type of
DQL
statistical
group
operator in a
Lotus export.
5-35
Volume

Export Format
Variable Length ASCII
The Variable Length export format generates an ASCII
file that
can be easily imported and used by most popular programs.
The Variable Length export format displays one record on each

line. If the program employs specific record and field separator
characters, use these in the format.
If not,
The Variable Length export

format that can he read hy
most popular programs.
use a carriage return to
separate records, and use any character that does not appear in the
DataBase also asks
data to separate fields.

the Field
Names
as the
first line
if
you want
to include
of the output.

NAME, ADDRESS, CITY, STATE, and ZIP CODE, with the Field Names in
your report output and you specify a tilde (~) as the field separator
character.
The query looks
as follows:
Query
for
CUSTOMERS
records
FULL NAME
list
ADDRESS
CITY
STATE
ZIP
end
Format
FULL NAME-ADDRESS-CITY-STATE- ZIP
.
items
.end
Volume
5-36

Export Format
Variable Length ASCII (cont.)
Report Output
FULL NAME-ADDRESS-CITY-STATE-ZIP
When
choosini; field
and
the data will incorrectly interpret the characters in the data as field
record separators, never itse

any character that appears in
your data. If you use any
character other than a
carriage return as the record
separator, you must enter that
character at the end of the
format line followed hy a
or record separators.
backslash.
John Adams~8 Smallwood Drive~Lonqbranch~NJ~07740

Lynn Anderson~30 Bainbridge Ave. -Cfommack-NY-1 1725
Pat Brown~25 Evergreen Circle~NonA/alk~CT~06851
When
choosing
field
and record separators, be careful not to use a

in your data. If you do, the program reading
character that appears
you use any character other than a carriage return as the record
separator, enter that character at the end of the format line followed
by a backslash. For example, if the
sign is used as the record
separator, it is inserted at the end of the format line followed by a
If
backslash as shown below.
5-37
Volume

Export Format
Fixed Length ASCII
The Fixed Length export format
many programs,
read by
but
it
creates an
ASCII
should be used only
can be
no other
file that
if
export format can be used by the target program.
The Fixed Length export

format many programs can
it should only he
used when no other export
format can he used hy the
target program.
read, hut
Because each output record

export format produces a
ASCII
is
file
the
same
length, the
Fixed Length
containing a continuous stream of
There are no field or record separators. For example,

each customer's full name, address, city, state, and zip
your output, the query and format look as follows:
data.
to include
CODE
in
Query
for
CUSTOMERS
records
FULL NAME
list
ADDRESS
city
state
ZIP
end
Format
.items
-\
.end
inserts a backslash character at the
end of
the format line to suppress the carriage return. This character does
not appear in the output.
Report Output
John Adams
Lynn Anderson
Pat Brown
NOTE:
8 Smallwood Drive
30 Bainbridge Ave.
25 Evergreen Circle
Longbranch NJ
Commack
Norwaik
07740
NY 11725
CT 06851
Because the Fixed Length export format has no field

or record separators,
it
can lead
errors in the target program.
to
For
data import
this reason,
we
recommend that you only use this format if no other

formal
Volume
is
acceptable.
5-38
DATA EASE REFERENCE MANUAL

Export Format
DIF (Data Interchange Format)
The DIF export report format generates a file in Data Interchange

Format. The DIF format was established for VisiCaic and can be
used by many other programs to import and export data.
When you
select the
DIF
format, DataBase asks whether you
v\
DIF export formal

The
can he read hy many popular

programs.
ant
to:
Include
If
field
you answer
names
yes.
in
the format
DataBase includes the Field Names in quotes as

you answer no, the Field
the first record just before data output. If
Names
are not included in the export format.
DIF
is a very specialized format; do not try to edit a DIF export

unless you're thoroughly familar with the Data Interchange Fonmat.
5-39
Volume

Format Types
Custom Format
The custom format
you design any kind of format you want.

form letters or designing
output to conform to preprinted business forms. However, because
you must design a custom format from scratch, it should only be
used if none of the predefined formats can produce output close to
the final format you want. If a predefined format produces output
close to your requirements, use the predefined format and then edit
it to serve your custom report requirements.
It is
lets
particularly useful for generating
When you
The custom format gives you

complete control over the
appearance of a report, but it
requires a little extra work to
design a custom format. For
this
reason,
we recommend
whenever possible you

select one of the predefined
formats and modify it to suit
your needs.
that
custom, DataBase displays a blank screen.

You design the report format from this starting point, using any
combination of formatting commands, form text, and fields.
Remember that a format must always include at least two
commands: .items and .end. Other formatting commands are
optional. A custom format with several formatting commands is
shown below.
select
header
footer
itens
Add header text/fields here.
.end
ftdd
footer text/fields here
Add forMat text and

list fields here.
F4
F5
ESC
Fia
- Sample Formatting Commands

Used to Create a Custom Format
Figure 5-3
Volume
5-40

Format Types
Custom Format
(cont.)
Specifying Fields
in
Custom Format
When you
design a custom format from scratch, you have two

options for specifying fields. One method is to select all the fields
as
items in the query and then simply position them

format.
list
in the
Report fields are usually

specified as list items in the
query. Fields that do not
require sorting, grouping, or
can he specified in
the report format without
statistics
The other method
is
to specify only those fields that require sorting,
grouping, or
may
statistical output as list items. The remaining fields

be directly specified in the format. However, you are not
assisted by
menus
to select Field
Names from
if
you use
appearing
in the query.
this
second method.
Cursor Movement on the Format Screen

DataBase formats can be up
screens long.
To
to
4000 characters wide and up
scroll the display to the right or left, just
to 16
move
the cursor off the
A format van have up
scrolls
characters and occupy up to

16 screens.
edge of the screen. The display immediately

one half-screen (40 characters) in the chosen direction.
Alternatively, hold down the CTRL key while pressing either
Arrow key for "express" cursor movement. CTRL -> moves the
cursor 40 positions to the right; CTRL <- returns immediately to
Column
NOTE:
4000
1.
The Formatting Comrtiaiids and procedures

described in the pages that follow can he used
create a custom format or to edit a predefined
formal.
to
When you move the cursor off

the side of the screen, the
display automatically scrolls
in the
5-41
to
chosen direction.
Volume
DEFINE FOR MAT,'PRINT ST\LE: DESIGNING REPORT OUTPUT

Custom Format
Formatting
Commands
DataBase provides eight Formatting Commands that control the

appearance of report output, whether it is displayed on screen or
printed as hard copy. Formatting
Commands
are inserted in the
report format, but they are not displayed in the report output.
Each Formatting
placed
in
Command
Column
When you
is
at the left
type a period in the
displays the following menu:
preceded by a period and must be

margin of the format.
first
column of
the format. DataBase

Custom Format
Formatting
Commands (cont.)
The page-level Formatting Commands are .page, .header, and

.footer. The page commands can be used as options in any
report format. The .header and .footer commands specify text
and/or field values that you want to print
at the
top and/or
bottom of the pages of the report. The .page command

advances the report to a new page even if the output has not
reached the end of the current page.
The external call Formatting Command can be used

option at the very end of any format.
When
all
Formatting Commands can he

used in any combination as
long as the format contains an
.items command, an .end
command, and a .group
trailer command for each
group header command.
as an
the records
have been processed and the output created, the program

specified by the .call command is automatically invoked.
When the called program is completed, control returns to
DataEase. You must select Start New Procedure before
running a procedure that contains a
The
DQL
Formatting
Commands
.call
can be used
as long as the format contains an .items
command.
in
any combination
command, an .end
command, and one .group trailer command for each .group

header command. Figure 5-4 shows a basic format that includes
only the two required commands, .items and .end. All the
formatting commands are discussed in greater detail in the pages
that follow.
itens
FULL NftME
ADDRESS
CITY
end
Figure 5-4
5-43
Basic Format
Volume 3

Custom Format
Required Formatting
Commands
The Required Formatting Commands

format must contain one .items
and
are .items
and .end.
command and one
command
.end
cannot contain more than one of each of these commmands.
it
The .items Command

above the .items and any .header command
lines is known as the Report Header Area. Any information placed
in the Report Header Area before the first Formatting Command
prints once at the beginning of the report.
In the format, the area
The area between
known
.items
command and the next command is

Any information placed between the
The area before the .items and

.header commands is called
the Report Header Area. The
information in this area is
printed once at the beginning
of the report.
the .items
as the Items Area.
command and
the next Formatting
Command
is
printed once
for each record processed by the query. The Items Area usually
contains all the fields and form text you want repeated for each
record.
The area between the .items
command and the

Formatting
ne.xt
Command is
called the Items Area.

Information in this area is
printed once for each record
processed by the queiy.
The .end Command

end of record processing. The area
following the .end command line is known as the Report End Area.
Any information following the .end command is printed once at the
end of the report, after all the records have been processed. If you
place a field after the .end command, statistics for that field can be
The .end command
specifies the
generated from all the records processed

for an individual group.
field
all
If
and place the
field after the
records in the report
a .page
command
End Area,
For example,
is
is
you request a
is
Information in this
printed once at the end
of the report, after all the

records have been processed.
sum
for a
a grand total for
placed after
all
output lines
in the
the printer skips to the top of the next page
in the
area
in the report, rather than
command,
.end
End Area.
generated.
report has finished printing.
placed
if
The area following the .end

command is called the Report
If
a .call
Report End Area and
it
command
is
when
used,
must be the very
Report
it
the
must be
last line in
the format.
Volume
5-44

Custom Format
Required Formatting
Commands (cont.)
To
illustrate the Required Formatting Commands, the

example
below shows a query, a predefined columnar format, and output for
a report that lists the state, last name, and account balance
field
values for each customer.
Query
for
CUSTOMERS
list
records
STATE
last name
;
account balance
end
Format
STATE
LAST NAME
ACCOUNT BALANCE
.Items
.end
Report Output
STATE
LAST NAME
ACCOUNT BALANCE
NJ
Adams
NY
CT
NY
CT
$595.00
Anderson
Brown
Cooper
S350 00
Davis
$300.00
;;250.00
1725.00
!
Volume

Custom Format
Required Formatting
Commands (cont.)
Remember that anything between the .items command line and the
command line displays once for each record processed by the
query. For example, if we edit the format adding a dotted line in
next
the Items Area, like this:
Format
STATE
LAST NAME
.items
.end
The
altered output looks like this:
Report Output
STATE
ACCOUNT BALANCE

Custom Format
Command Options
Required Formatting
There are two options you can add to an .items command to control
how the information in the Items Area of the format appears in the
output:
The .items
The
nosplit
.items nosplit
Command
command
tells
DataBase not
When
from a record between two pages.

end of a page, if there are not enough
to split information
the output approaches the
on the page to print

lines left
the required output for the current record,
The .items nosplit command

prevents data from a single
record appearing on tvi-o
different pages.
advances to a new page.
M Command
The .items across N wide

Normally, information
record
in vertical
command
lets
in the
Items Area
output lines.
you
is
record every
wide
prints
When you
use this
records across the page, starting a
M characters.
You
and M, as long as the product
The .items across
N wide M
command prints several
print this information horizontally as well as
vertically (as mailing labels often require).
option, DataBase
printed once for each
The .items across
new
records across the page.

This is useful for printing
special jobs like "3 across"
mailing labels.
can assign any value you want to
M does not exceed the total
specified width for the report.
N wide option, either value may be

you specify one and not the other, DataBase
divides the output device width by the specified value and
calculates the other value. For example, if you are using an
80-column printer, .items across 3 would print the second record
beginning in column 27 and the third in column 53 (80 / 3 = 26
When
using the across
specified
first.
If
plus).
The nosplit and/or across

the .items
command on
the
wide
options must appear after
same line in the format. These two
options can only be used in conjunction with the .items Formatting
Command
(they cannot be used to
modify header, group, or
trailer
output).
5-47
Volume
DEFINE FORMAT/PRINT STYLE: DESIGNING REPORT OUTPL'T

Custom Format
Required Formatting
How to Use the

If
you
Command Options
.items across
are printing mailing labels
Command
and the label sheet has two labels
per row and each label (including the space between the labels) is
option in
30 characters wide, you could insert the across N wide
a predefined Record Entry format as follows:
Format
.items across 2 wide
30
.end
The
final report output
starting in
column
might look
like this,
with the second label
Report Output
John Adams
8 Smallwood Drive
Longbranch, NJ 07740
Lynn Anderson
30 Bainbridge Ave.
Commack, NY 11725
Pat Brown
25 Evergreen Circle
Norwalk, CT 06851
64 Lake Street
Alameda, CA 94501
NOTE: The
Paul Carter
mailing labels format, which
is
designed to
speed address label printing, incorporates the .items

across
and
Volume
wide
M values.
M option and prompts you for the N
5-48

Custom Format
The Group Level Formatting Commands

.group
are .group
header and
Group Level Formatting
Commands
trailer.
when
Group Level Formatting Commands are used with a query that

includes fields specified either in groups or in groups with
group-totals (groups in Quick Reports). The Group Level
Formatting
in the
Commands
control
how and where
query's grouped fields appears
in the
in the
the information
There must he one group

command for each
.group header command in
the format.
trailer
query.
For each .group header
specified in groups or in
groups with group totals.
output.
The Group Level Commands are always used in pairs. There must
be one .group header and one .group trailer in the report format
for each li.st field specified in groups or in groups with
group-totals
should he used
the query contains fields
command
a coirespondinii .group trailer
in a report
command.
If
format there must be

you have more than
one .group header and .group trailer in a format, they correspond

to each other as follows: \hQ first .group header corresponds to the
last .group trailer, the second .group header corresponds to the
second from last .group trailer, etc. They are paired from the top
and bottom inward as shown in Figure 5-5.
.group header
.group header B
.items
.group
.group
trailer
trailer
.end
Figure 5-5
5-49
Pairing
Group Formatting Commands
Volume
DEFINE FORMAT/PRINT STYLE: DESIGNING REPORT OLTPLT

Custom Format
Group Level Formatting Commands (cont.)
The area between

Formatting
.group header
Command
information placed
is
in a
known
command and
as a
the next
Group Header Area. Any
Group Header Area
prints
of each group. The area between a .group trailer

the next Formatting
Any
Command
information placed
in
is
known
Group
end of each group. Fields with group
Group
as a
Trailer
once
the start
command and
Group
Area
at
Trailer Area.
once at the
must be placed
prints
level statistics
The area between a .group

header command and the ne.xt
Formatting
Command is
called the Group Header

Area. The information in this
area is printed once at the
start of each group.
Trailer Area.
in
field that has statistics specified in the
than one position
in the
format.
query can appear
For example, you
in
may want
more
the
ACCOUNT BALANCE field valuc to appear in the .items area, the group
of the account balance field to appear in the .group trailer
area, and the overall account balance total to appear at the end of
total
the report.
NOTE:
You can include a .page command
Header or Group
in the
Group
Trailer areas to print each group
on a separate page.
Volume
5-50

Custom Format
(cont.)
The example on
this page and the next contains a query, format,

and part of the output for a report that asks DataBase to list the
STATE. LAST NAME, and ACCOL NT BALANCE for cach customer in the
CUSTOMERS
form.
Group
level totals are included in the output.
Query
for
CUSTOMERS
list
records

LAST NAME
ACCOUNT BALANCE item SUm
end
Format
LAST NAME
STATE
ACCOUNT BALANCE
.group header
.items
.group
trailer
State Total
.end
Grand
Total
$^^m
example, the .group header text is the state field value.

trailer form text (State Total), which is not a field
value, is typed directly in the format where you want the text to
appear in the report output. The report boundary lines (===) are
In this
The .group
entered in the format where you want them to appear

output.
In addition to
group
totals, this
Total statistic which appears after the .end formatting
5-5
in the report
format includes a Grand
command.
Volume

Custom Format
(cont.)
Report Output
STATE
CT
LAST NAME
ACCOUNT BALANCE

Custom Format
Page Level Formatting Commands
The Page Level Formatting Commands

information to print
advance
to a
new
page.
tell
DataBase what
top and bottom of each page and
when
The Page Level Formatting Commands
at the
to
.page, .header, and .footer are explained below. An example that

illustrates the use of the Report Header, the .header command, and
.footer
commands appears on
the facing page.
The .page Command

The .page command tells DataBase to immediately advance to a
new page before continuing to print any further output. If the .page
command line is placed first in a Group Header Area, each group,
including Group 1, starts printing on a new page. If it is placed
first in a Group Trailer Area, each group's detail information and
The .page command advances

the printer to a
new paê.
on a new page. If you want each

on a new page, but you want Group
on
the same page as the Report Header, place the .page command last
group-level statistics
start printing
group
to begin printing
in the
Group
Trailer Area.
If you place the .page command at the end of the Report End Area.
DataBase advances to the top of a new page when the report
completes printing. If it is placed first or last in the Items Area,
each record is printed on a new page (placing it between fields
causes the records to be

can be used in a format.
The .header
[N]
split).
Any number
of .page
commands
Command
The .header command specifies information to be printed at the top

of each page in a report. The .header command should be placed
near the beginning of the format. There can be only otw .header
in a format, although none is required.
command
The area between
Command
the .header
known
command and
the next Formatting
Page Header Area. Any information

placed in the Page Header Area prints once at the top of each page.
The most common use of a Page Header is to repeat column
headings at the top of each page of a report that prints on more than
one page.
is
printed at the top of each page

in a report. There can he only
one .header command in a
format.
as the
you don't want Page Header information to appear

you can add the optional N parameter to the
.header command, where N is a page number. For example, if you
specify .header 3, in the report format, the Page Header
information begins on page 3 and prints on every following page in
If
until a certain page,
The .header command

specifies information to he
The area between between the

.header command and the
next formatting command is
called the Page Header Area,
hiformation in this area is
printed at the top of each page.
the report.
5-53
Volume
EFINE FORMAT/PRINT STYLE: DESIGNING REPORT OUTPUT

Custom Format
(cont.)
Format
For example, the following format:
DATAEASE TRAINING COURSE SCHEDULE

CITY
DATE
LOCATION
DATE
LOCATION
.header 2
CITY
(cont.)
.footer
For more information, contact the DataBase Training

Department at (203) 374-8000.
.items
.end
in which the report title (DataBase Training
Course Schedule) appears only on the first page and the column
produces a report
heading information
every page.
(cit^',
date, location) appears
at the
top of
important to understand the difference between the Report

Header Area (the area above the first formatting command), and the
Page Header Area in a report format. Information in the Report
Header Area prints once at the start of the/;/-.?? page of a report.
Information in the Page Header Area prints once at the start of each
page of a report. Note that if your report includes a Report Header
Area and a Page Header Area which is to print on the first page,
the Page Header prints before the Report Header.
It's
You cannot use more than

one .header command in a
format. The command
named .header 2 in this
example is t/ie only .header
command in the format. The
information that appears
only on the first page is the
Report Header (it is not part
of the .header command).
example above, in order to avoid printing the column

heading information before the report title, it is placed under the
report title in the Report Header Area (to be printed only on
In the
Page
and then is repeated in the Page Header Area, using the

.header 2 command in the report format (to be printed on every
1
page, starting on Page
Volume
2).
5-54
DATAHASE REFERENCE MANUAL

Custom Format
The
The
.footer [N]
.footer
(cont.)
Command
command
specifies information to be printed at the
bottom of each page in a report. The .footer command should be

placed at the beginning of the format, right after the .header
command. There can be only one

although none
is
placed
is
in the
command
in a
format,
the .footer
known
the bottom of each page in a

report. There can he only one
.footer
command in
a format.
command and
the next Formatting
Page Footer Area. Any information

Page Footer Area prints once at the bottom of each
as the
The most common use of a Page Footer is to place page

numbers, running totals, footnotes, etc.. at the bottom of each page
page.
of a multi-page report.
If
specifies
information to he printed at
required.
The area between
Command
.footer
The .footer command
you don't want Page Footer information
page, you can add the optional
to
appear
until a certain
The area hcnvecn
the .footer
command and the next

formatting command is
the
called
Page Footer Area.
Information in this area is

printed at the bottom of each
page.
parameter to the .footer

command, where N is a page number. For example, if you specify
.footer 3 in the format, the Page Footer information begins on page
3 and prints on every following page in the report.
Fields with
placed
summary
in the
statistics (for example: salary: sum) can be

Page Footer Area. Field statistics placed in the Page
Footer Area represent statistical information for all records

processed up to the end of the current page (unlike after the .end
command, where the statistical information takes into account every
record processed in the report).
5-55
Volume

Custom Format
The
.call
Command
.call command is a Custom Formatting Command that lets you

and run another program at the end of a DataBase procedure.
DataBase swaps itself to either disk or expanded memory (EMS),
thereby freeing most conventional memory for the guest program.
The
call
.call command is inserted after the .end command. The .call

command should be the last line in the report format (it is executed
last, regardless of where in the format it appears). When the
DataBase procedure is completed. DataBase frees as much memory
The
as possible and immediately calls the specified program.
The
called
program must be
in the
in a different directory located in
same
your
directory as DataBase, or
DOS PATH. When
program ends, control automatically returns

menu from which the report was run.
called
The syntax of the
.call
command
is
to the
the
DataBase
shown below:
The
.call
command lets you
execute an external program
PROGRAM [/D] [%e] [%r]
.call
at the
end of a DataBase
report.
PROGRAM
is the name of the program to be executed

.BAT, .COM, or .BXB command for this program).
(the
DOS
The /D option generates

called
program
to store
a unique disk filename for use by the

any output it may generate.
%e option returns the output filename entered on the

DataBase Print Styles screen. This is the name of the
DataBase data file to be used by the called program.
The
The
%r option returns the DOS filename of the DataBase
procedure. This
the called
There
is
Volume
is
program
used to return control to DataBase when

is
an example of the
completed.
.call
command on
the next page.
5-56

Custom Format
The
.call
Command
(cont.)
The following command

procedure and
the
list
records
named on
.call
it
to
calls DataBase GrafTalk at the end of a

draw a chart using the data generated by
command
in the
The data generated by
Report).
file
tells
the
query (or
the query
list
is
fields in the
Quick
stored in the output
DataBase Print Styles screen.
GrafTalk /D
%e %r
The /D parameter creates the unique filename of the GrafTalk chart

definition. The %e parameter passes the output filename specified
on the DataBase Print Styles screen. The %r parameter passes the
filename of the DataBase procedure.
NOTE: A
procedure containing a
.call
command cannot be
memory. You must first unload

the procedure using the Start New Procedure option
on the DQL menu (he sure to save the procedure
first). Then use Run Procedure and select the
run while loaded
in
appropriate procedure from the
5-57
list.
Volume

Editing Formats
Editing Function
When you
Keys
custom format or modify any predefined format

created by DataEase, you follow the same basic procedures you use
create a
in defining
and modifying a DataEase database form. Function keys

summarized below:
The function keys can he used

to cut, copy,
and move
text in
a format just as they are used

in
Form
Definition.
are assigned editing functions as
Function Key
F2
Use
SAVE
Saves the format
F3CUT
F5
Removes
COPY
Copies
F6 PASTE
F7
in the
computer's memory.
fields or text for pasting or deletion.
Command menus.
fields and/or text.
Pastes cut or copied text onto the format.
DELLN
Deletes the line on which the cursor
F8 INSLN
rests.
Creates a blank line immediately above the

line
where the cursor
rests.
SH-F9 PRINT
Prints the procedure/report specification.
FIO FIELD
Adds
the specified field into the report format
where the cursor
NOTE: When
Editing functions are also

available from the Pull Down
editing a format, keep in
Formatting
Commands must
is
currently positioned.
mind
that all
begin with a period
column 1 at the left margin of the report format.

Although all Formatting Commands can be edited,
moved, and deleted like form text, you must be
in
when changing or repositioning commands

since they control when and where various output
careful
lines are created.
Volume
5-58

Editing Formats
Format Text
You can
The
any format text in the format.

page numbers, column header information,
and other format text can be changed without
edit, delete, or fully replace
report
boundary
titles,
lines,
Format
text can he freely

edited without affecting
report data.
affecting the report data output.
For example, if you're using the default Columnar format, you

might want to change the column headings selected by DataBase.
Simply cursor down to the text and type over them. Alternatively,
you can press F7 DELLN to delete the default Field Names. Then
INSLN to insert a new

own column headings.
press F8
your
blank line on which you can type
ASCII Extended Character Set

When you press ALT-FIO, DataBase gives you
Extended Character
set.
access to the
These characters can be used
ASCII
to create a
number of
special format effects, including single or double borders
around
or part of the report layout. Refer to
2,
all
Form
to use the special
5-59
Volume
2.
Chapter
and Relationships for more information on how

ASCII characters in form design and modification.
Definition
Volume

Editing Formats
How To Add
You
or Modify Fields
can add or modify fields
in a
To
format just as you do on any
inside the field
you want
to modify),
insert afield in a format,
just place the cursor
form. Just place the cursor where you want to add the field (or
where
vow want the field to appear

and press FIO FIELD.
and press FIO FIELD.
you are adding a field, DataBase displays the Report Field

Definition screen and a menu that lists the names of all the output
If
fields specified in the report
query (see Figure 5-6). Select the
field
you want from the menu by highlighting it, then press RETURN.
The field (represented by a shaded rectangular area) is immediately
inserted at the cursor position in the format on the screen.
BOK^SSQ^
âBSSS^MSHE
header
HasSOMESMSBMia^SSr
Mane ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^|
(for neu field, leave blank and press RETURN)
footer
itens
Field Type
end
Suppress Spaces
iitFiy^ Fsri^m F78Rim
r&iannnMBff; F7nraron
Figure 5-6
Report Field Definition Screen
you are modifying a field, when you position the cursor in the
and press FIO FIELD the current field definition is displayed
on the Report Field Definition screen. If the field you specify is a
Number field, DataBase asks which type it is. If you want to
change the number's appearance in the report, you can change the
type in the format (for example, from Floating Point to Fixed Point
or Integer). This change affects only the current report, not the
If
field
actual field definition.
Volume
5-60

Editing Formats
If
you want
add a
to
skip the
menu
window
inset in the
field tliat
(cont.)
you have not specified in the query,

RETURN. DataBase displays a
choices and press
Report Field Definition screen (see Figure 5-7).
If you want to add afield that

you have not specified in the
query, skip the menu choices,

press RETURN, and type the
name of the field or afield

derivation formula in the
window
that
DataBase
displays on the Report Field

Definition screen.
Suppress Spaces
Sgjgj Fhjp
Figure 5-7
qp
F7|q5pp[g
l^"tBFP|il
Report Field Formula
in
Window
Report Field Formula window, you can enter the name of a

from any form specified in the query, a current system
In the
field
variable (such as current date), or a Derivation
4000 characters
in length.
You cannot
use the
Formula up
all operator,
to
or any
sorting, grouping, or statistical operators (except relational

statistical operators) in the
Report Field formula.
You can
use
relational statistical operators in the formula.
When
the
entered
DQL Procedure
in this
items specified
window
in the
In certain cases, if
DataEa,se
field
may
Quick Report)
you misidentify
named SHIP TO
report field formula,
is
run, the fields

list
query.
a field in a report field formula,
nevertheless use the correct
value from the SHIP
5-61
(or
are included in the report output just like
is
field.
incorrectly called SHIP
For example,
TO ADDRESS
if
the
in a
DataEase may accept the formula and use the
TO
field.
Volume
DEFINE FORMAT/PRINT STYLE; DESIGNING REPORT OUTPUT

Editing Formats
(cont.)
Field Lengtlis and Field Types

The second question on the Report Field Definition screen is Field
Length. If you want, you can specify a length greater or less than
that of the field itself.
You might do
this to
avoid truncating an
output value or taking up unnecessary space in the report output.

Again, this change affects only the current report, not the actual
DataEase asks you
Number fields.
yes. the output
want
If you
is
answer
modified as
is no
on the Field Definitions.
requested, hut there

effect
field definition.
if you
suppress commas and

decimal points from list item
to
you specified more than one statistic for the field in the query,
DataEase also asks what statistical value should be output in this
position in the format. If you want the field value itself to appear,
specify item; if you want the total of the field values (such as for a
group total or grand total), specify sum, and so on.
If
Depending on
Type. DataEase asks one
the specified Field
additional questions
when you
to three
are creating or modifying a report
format.
If
Number
you specify a
field,
Suppress the commas?

Press
RETURN
commas
included in the output.
If
answer of no and include

you don't want commas
to accept the default
in the output.
which commas
DataEase asks:
Answer yes
You might
if
use this for an export format in
are used to separate fields.
you specify a non-integer
Number
Suppress the decimal point?
RETURN
field,
DataEase asks:

the decimal point in the output. Answer yes if you don't want a
decimal point included in the output. You might use this for an
export format where the target program works with an assumed
Press
decimal point, or
(percentages,
Volume
if
the field value
is
normally not decimalized
etc.).
5-62

Editing Formats
(cont.)
Suppressing Spaces
For any type of
field.
DataBase asks:
Suppress Spaces?
Press
RETURN
spaces

you don't want the unused
in the output.
Answer yes
if
spaces from the field definition included in the output. This

you print related fields (such as first name and last name)
adjacent to each other without a
spaces.
If
you answer
yes, all
on the same
line
move
DataBase asks
number of empty intervening
unused spaces before the
character in the field and after the

fields
lets
last
first
character are deleted. Other
a corresponding
number of spaces
to
the left in the report output.
For example,
if
Answer
yes:
John
Answer
no:
the format has a
John
if you
want
to
suppress leading and trailing

spaces from list item fields. If
you answer yes. the spaces are
suppressed in the report only
(there is no effect on the Field
Definition).
hrst name and last name
field:
Adams
Adams
format has a line with just fields (no form text) and all fields
are set to Suppress Spaces, the line does not print if all the fields
If the
for
any record are blank. Instead, the line is moved to the end of
This feature can be very helpful if you are printing
the print area.
mailing labels with a variable number of lines (such as optional

lines for a person's title or a second address line). All lines are
printed together with no inappropriate blank lines, and the first line
printed on the next label (or preprinted form) is always printed in
the right place.
For other information on printing
labels, see the mailing labels

and the Print Style Specification
Example: Printing on Continuous Labels at the end of this chapter.
format earlier
5-63
in this chapter,
Volume

Editing Formats
Saving a Format
After inserting or modifying each field in the format, press

F2 SAVE to include the field in the format. When you finish
all
make, press F2 SAVE to save

the modified format in memory. Then, select Option 7, Save
Procedure on the DQL menu. This saves the format on disk as
the additions or changes
you want
to
When you finish all the additions

or changes you want to make,
select Save Procedure to save
the modified format as part of
the procedure.
part of the procedure.
Volume
5-64

Editing Formats
Printer Control
Commands
DataEase provides a number of special Printer Control commands

you can use to control highlighting and spacing for any part of the
When you
enclose
report.
precede
In addition to the
commands provided by DataEase, you can send
any control
you want
string
specif)' the
siring in the forma!,

it
it
in t>rackets
with an
control
you must
and
@ sign.
your printer. When you specify the

you must enclose it in brackets and
for example: @[1B4333]. However,
to
control string in the format,
precede
it
with an
@ sign,
DataEase does not check these strings for validity or check the
results in any way. Consult your printer manuals for information
on control strings accepted by your printer.
The
The
@ (At Sign) Command
@ command
italics,
you highlight report information
lets
or any special feature your printer supports.
placed anywhere
in a
in boldface,
The
@ can be
format except on a line containing a
Command. The
character must be immediately
followed by a special character or character group representing the
Formatting
printer function
The
you want
@ Formatting Command and
Entry form
is
highlight
report information in boldface,
italics, or any special feature
your printer supports.
following characters do not
its
do not advance
@ commands are ignored when the report
rather than to a printer
@ sign Printer Control
Command lets you
to use.
take up space in your output; they
The
The
(i.e.,
not displayed
text that
in
appears
in
is
the print head.

sent to the screen
color on the Record
color in the record entry report
format).
However, the corresponding
example,
if
print
text is highlighted with the
command
@u command
is
used.
For
during
Record Entry, when the record entry format is used, that text will
be underlined. See the section on Field Highlighting in Volume 2,
Chapter 2, Form Definition, for more information. If the report is
depends on the printer defined on the Print
is designated on the Print Style screen, the
printer control codes generated by the
commands are written in
the disk file as printer codes. If there is no printer designated on
sent to disk, the output
Style screen. If a printer
the Print Style screen, the
NOTE: If you
@ commands are ignored.
want an
output, enter
at sign (@) to appear in a report

two consecutive at signs (@@) in the
format.
5-65
Volume

Editing Formats
Special Effects (Highlighting)
your printer definition includes special effects options, you can

access them in the report by specifying the
sign and any
one of the following commands in the format. For complete
If
information on defining printers, see

Administration.
Command
Volume
2,
Chapter
4,
System

Editing Formats
Characters per Inch (CPI)
If your printer definition includes multiple CPI options,

you can
access them during the report by specifying the
sign and any
one of the following commands in the format:
Command
The CPI (Charaeters per Inch)
Commands
control the
character width in a report.
Print Effect
cl
First
CPI (Character Per Inch)
setting in
printer definition.
c2
Second CPI
c3
Third CPI setting
c4
Fourth CPI setting
For example,
CPI and
if
is
command
@c3This
in printer definition.
your printer definition supports
the default
following
setting in printer definition.
text will
10 (the
first
in the report
specified),
if
10, 12, 16 and 4

you enter the
format:
be sixteen characters per inch.@c1
The @ci command causes the printer to switch to 16 CPI.

The (cl command returns it to the default 10 characters per
See Volume
2,
Chapter
4,
inch.
System Administration, for more
information on printer definitions.
5-67
Volume

Editing Formats
Lines per Inch (LPI)
your printer definition includes multiple LPI options, you can

access them during the report by specifying the
sign and any
one of the following commands in the format:
If
Command
Print Effect
11
First
LPI (Line Per Inch)
The LPI (Lines per Inch)
Commands
interline
control the
spacing
in
a report.
setting in printer
definition.
12
Second LPI
13
Third LPI setting
14
Fourth LPI setting
setting in printer definition.
For example, if your printer definition supports 6, 8, 12, and 16

LPI, and your default is 6 LPI, if you enter the following command
in the format:
@l4This text would appear in the smallest available LPI, in this

case 16 LPI (since there are more than 6 lines per inch, the
text is more compressed). This is considered compressed
format. @I1
The @14 command causes the printer to switch to 16 LPI.

The @11 command returns it to the default 6 lines per inch.
See Volume
2,
Chapter
4.
System Administration, for more
information on printer definitions.
Volume
5-68
DATAEASE REFERENCE MANU
A L
Editing Formats
Page Size
Page Size
DataBase creates and transmits printer control
use of the special
strings based
@ report formatting commands.
on your
However, it
does not adjust page breaks to take into account the spacing
changes made by
formatting commands.
DataBase inserts page breaks

based on the margin and page
length information you enter
on the Print Style
Specification screen.
DataBase provides automatic page breaks based only on the

page
size, margins, and lines per inch specified
on the Print Style
Specification screen. Therefore, if in the middle of a page,
you
change to a type style using fewer lines per inch, the page
may fill
before DataBase provides the automatic page break. If
you change
to a type style with
more
lines per inch,
the bottom of a page.
Similar problems
automatic line wrap
you change type
if
empty space may be
may occur
sizes in the
in
left at
providing
middle of a
line.
You can compensate
for these formatting adjustments by specifying

and margins on the Print Style Specification
screen. For example, when using more compressed
LPI (lines per
inch), specify a shorter page length; with less
compressed LPI,
specify a longer page length.
different page sizes
5-69
Volume
DEFINE FORMAT/ PRINT STYLE: DESIGNING REPORT OUTPUT

Define Print Style
The
The
Print Style Specification screen
is
a special
DataBase System
used to specify the destination, margins, spacing, type
form
that is
size,
and other physical characteristics for report output.
The Print Srsle Specification

defines die destination
and
dimensions of the report

output. It can he used to
select Option 6, Define Print Style on the DQL menu,

DataBase displays the Print Style Specification screen (shown
below). The values you enter in the fields on this screen define the
report destination and the physical appearance of the report output.
When you
temporarily override the

settings stored in the Printer
Definition record.
For more
information see "Define

Printers." in
Chapter
4.
Volume
2.
System
Administration.
1:
Screen
Printer
DiEk
PRINT STVLE SPECIFICflTION
flllou Style nodif ication at run-tine
Report Destination: ^^^^|
If disk Output, Filenane:
Z:
J:
Nou press DEFAULT UIEU to get default ualues for the renaining fields.
Printer Nane
Pause after each page 7
IF PRINTER NAME IS
SPECIFIED flBOUE
-HeaderPAGE SIZE AND P OSITION ON

Uidth
Length
^m
Text
^H
^^M
^^|
TVPE STYLE
Characters Per Inch
Highlights 1
-Footer-
Fscjaii fz^w^ Fniîi/Jinamjiii rsfjiiaagiiaari FftHippiBaiiiRni
Figure 5-8
NOTE: If you
output
Volume
inches)
Starting position
MARGINS (in inches): SEE F IGURE ON LEFT

l.Left
Z. Right
4. Header to Text
3. Top to Header
S. Footer to Botton
b.Text to Footer
ftrea
F4'aaiBiaiR]
C flRRIflGE (in
HHJ
Print Style Specification Screen
do not specif- a Print Style Specification, the

is sent to the screen by default.
5-70

Define Print Style
Defining the Report Destination
The
first choice on the Print Style Specification screen lets you

choose the report's destination. You can send a report to either the
Screen, a Printer, or a Disk File. The default destination is Screen.
Each destination
is
report can either he sent to

the screen, sent to a printer, or
it
can he saved as a disk pie.
defined as follows:
Screen: displays the report on the computer's monitor.

Printer: sends the report to a printer device to generate hard
copy output.
Disk: creates a disk

printed
at
file for storage. The disk file may be

a later time or used as input by another program.
Each report destination
5-7!
is
described in detail in the following pages.
Volume
DEFINE FORMAT /PRINT STYLE: DESIGNING REPORT OUTPUT

Define Print Style
Report Destination: Screen
you select Screen as the report destination, you don't have to

answer any other questions on the Print Style screen. Just press
If you select the
If
F2
SAVE
When
is
questions to answer.
SAVE to save the
to save the destination.
Press F2
always pauses after each page

displayed. You must tap the Spacebar to continue running the
a report
is
Screen
no
destination, there are
sent to the screen,
destination.
it
report.
Screen Report Scrolling

When a report is sent to the screen,
the following keys are used to
through the report.
scroll
To
Key
Scrolls
PgDn
PgUp
Next Screen
Previous Screen
Start of the Report
Next Screen if you haven't viewed the
HOME
END
Report yet
OR
Highest Numbered Page that you
have viewed so
CTRL^
CTRL^
Half Screen (40 columns) to the Left

Full Screen (80 columns) to the Right
->
<-
Full Screen (80 columns) to the Left
Reports with
Two
If a report is usually
need
far
Half Screen (40 columns) to the Right
be printed,
to
Destinations
displayed on the screen but
fill
then go back to the destination and change

pressing F2
SAVE.
modification
at
If
may
occasionally
in the fields as if the report is to
you also
run-time,
when
change the report destination
tell
it
DataEase
the report
is
be printed,
to Screen before
to allow style
run you only have to
to print the report.
If a report is usually printed, but
may
occasionally need to be
exported, don't specify any printer values (they cause problems for
the target program).
report
VIEW
is
Instead, choose the Disk destination.
to generate the printer
Volume
name and press F3

control commands.
run, specify the printer
When
the
DEFAULT
5-72

Define Print Style
Report Destination: Disk
you select Disk as the report destination you must also tell
DataEase the name of the file and the directory where you want
If
store the reoort
to
lf\ou select the Disk

destination, you must specify
''"" storage location for the
output file.
Enter this information
If
in the field
following the prompt:
disk Output, Filename:
DataEase accepts either a pathname or a disk drive
letter.
For
example, either
C:\WP\ADDRESS.DTA
or
A:PRINTOUT.DOC
is
acceptable.
NOTE: If you
specify a Disk destination
Printer
Name,
and include a
the printer control codes for that
printer are included in the output file
assumes the report
will eventually
DataEase
he printed rather
than processed by another program. If you are
planning
to
process the report rather than print
it,
you should leave the printer fields blank.
5-73
Volume

Define Print Style
Report Destination: Printer
If
you
select Printer as the report destination,
several questions about your printer and the
you must answer
way you want
Ifvou select the Printer

destination. \ou must specify
the
Name and the
output printed. The following pages discuss the various printer
the Printer
questions in detail (after the page on Print Style Modification).
dimensions of the output.
First,
you must specify the name of the
printer that
you want to
use.
All printers attached to the system are defined in the Define
Printers option of System Administration.

printer
name and
4,
display the default
System
DEFAULT VIEW.
See Volume 2.
System Administration, for more information on printer
Configuration form, press F3
Chapter
To
specifications as entered on the
definitions.
When prompted
response
When
is
the report
on
specified
the
Alternatively,
Local
2,
for the
name of
is
most flexible
symbol in this field.
the printer, the
to place an asterisk (*) wild card

run, the output
is
sent to the default printer
System Administration form.
you can specify the
Network
1 or
Network
printer
number (Local
2) as listed
1,
on the System
Configuration form.
When
the report
is
run,
DataBase uses the appropriate printer
control codes for the specified printer in addition to the information

in the Print Style Specification
Volume
when
it
generates the report output.
5-74

Define Print Style
Print Style Modification
The prompt on
the Print Style Specification screen that follows
your procedure/report destination choice reads:
You can set up a report so the

Print Style can he modified
each time the report is run.
Allow style modification at run-time?
you answer yes, DataEase displays the Print Style screen each
time you run the procedure, so you can modify the current
If
If you modify the Print Style without saving the

procedure afterward, the changes are not saved on disk. If you
save the procedure after making modifications, the modified Print
Style specification is saved, replacing the previous one.
specifications.
If you answered yes to this question, but you now want to run the
procedure without changing the Print Style, just press F2 SAVE
when
will then run the
is
displayed.
DataEase
unmodified procedure.
you answer no to the run-time style modification question,

DataEase does )\ot display the Print Style screen. It immediately
If
runs the report using the
last
saved Print Style choices.
After running a procedure, you can recall the last used Print Style
Specification immediately by pressing F5 DEFAULT FORM. If
you only want to view certain fields, you can recall each field
individually by moving the cursor into the field and pressing
F6 DEFAULT FIELD. However, once you exit the procedure or
load a new procedure, you can only access the Print Style
Specification that was saved with the procedure.
5-75
Volume
DEFINE FORMAT/PRINT STYLE; DESIGNING REPORT OUTPUT

Define Print Style
Completing the Print Style Specification: Page Size
After choosing the report destination, press F3

the report
DEFAULT VIEW
being sent to a printer or being sent to
is
printer codes (to be printed later).
disi<.
if
with
DataEase displays the default
answers to the remaining questions. You can change any of these

default responses as explained below:
The next prompt

Pause
after
asks:
each page?
Answer yes
if you're printing on hand-fed single sheet paper or

DataEase will pause after each page and let you change
the paper. Press any key to continue printing.
envelopes.
Answer no
The next
if
you're printing on continuous feed/form paper.
you change the default
part of the Print Style screen lets
values for Page Length, Page Width, and/or Starting Position.
Enter the Page Length and Page

are different
from the
Width
values in inches
if
they
defaults.
The Starting Position field should be left blank unless your

printer's form feed mechanism won't let you align the left edge of
the paper with the left edge of the platen.
the distance
NOTE: These
values affect printed reports
to disk; tfiey
Volume
If this is the case,
between the paper edge and the platen edge
Imve no
ejfect
and reports
specify
in inches.
sent
on a screen report.
5-76

Define Print Style
Completing the
The
Print Style Specification:
left, right, top,
Margins
bottom, header and fooler margins are specified
on the Print Style screen. All margin values

should be specified in inches. The margins are defined as follows:
in the next six fields
The distance between
Left:
and Xhe first column of
2.
The margin values can he

modified by simply typing in
replacement values. Margin
values are specified in inches.
the left edge of the paper
text.
Right: The distance between the last column of text
and the right edge of the paper.
3.
Top
to
Header: The distance between
the paper
and
header, this margin
.header
line
\\\q first
ignored.
command
is
the top edge of
of the header.
You must
If there is
format to create a margin
in the
no
include a
at
the top of the page.
4.
Header
to Text:
the header
header, this field
5.
The distance between
and \ht first

is
line of text.
the last line of
no
If there is
ignored.
Footer to Bottom: The distance between the
last line
of the footer and the bottom edge of the paper.

is
no
footer, this
a .footer
the
6.
margin
command
is
in the
ignored.
You must
format to create a margin
at
bottom of the page.
Text to Footer: The distance between the

text
If there
include
and
Xhs.
of the footer.
first line
last line
If there is
no
of
footer,
this field is ignored.
NOTE: The Margin fields
are
left
indicating a value of 0.
the Print Style Screen
affects
5-11
is
blank as a default
The chart at the left side of

a guide showing which field
which margin area.
Volume

Define Print Style
Completing the Print Style Specification: Type Style
on the Print Style screen let you specify the type

style used for the report as a whole. You can override these
(At Sign) Printer
settings for portions of the report by inserting
The
last five fields
Control
commands
in the
format.
The
five type style choices are
defined as follows:
1.
If
lets
you specify the

and
rype size, line spacing,
other printer features for the

wiwle report as well as for
emphasis in specific areas of
the report.
Characters per Inch: For normal printing

be 10.
DataBase
this
value should
your printer supports variable CPI, specify a higher
value for condensed printing or a lower value for expanded

printing.
The value
specified must be included on the Printer
Definition form.
2.
Lines per Inch: For normal printing

If
this value
should be
6.
your printer supports variable LPI, specify a higher value
for
condensed printing or a lower value for expanded

The value specified must be included on the Printer
printing.
Definition form.
3.
Highlights:
You can
specify up to 12 special user-defined
highlights supported by your printer.
The
highlights
specified must be stored in the Printer Definition form as
Special Effects.
The
entire report
is
by your choices. The menu choices
1:
2;
highlighted as specified
are:
Bold
Underline
3: Italicize
4:
5:
Special 1
Special 2
12: Special 9
For more information on printer definitions, see Volume

4, System Administration.
Volume
2,
Chapter
5-78

Define Print Style
Saving/Modifying
Saving the Print Style Specification

When you
F2
all
finish filling in the Print Style Specification form, press
SAVE to save your specifications. DataEase checks to be sure

required fields are filled and saves the specification form. If one
more required
or
fields are blank,
Print specification
Do you want
If
to
is
DataEase prompts:
incomplete
complete the specification
you answer yes and you also answered yes
Modification
at
When you finish filling in the

Print Style Specification, press
F2 SAVE
to save it in the
computer's memory. To
permanently save the Print
Style on disk, select Option 7.
Save Procedure, on the DQL
at run-time?
to the Print Style
run-time question, the incomplete specification
is
accepted and DataEase returns to the DQL menu. If the

specification is incomplete and you answered no to the run-time
modification question, DataEase prompts:
Data
The
required
cursor
F2
in this field is
in the first
SAVE
incomplete
form remains on the screen with the

field. Complete the form and press
again.
Modifying the Print Style Specification

If
you answered yes
to the question:
Allow style modification at run time

the Print Style Specification form appears on the screen
you run the
report.
You can
before running the report.
F2
SAVE
When you
finish
making changes, press
to run the report with these changes.
You can change your answer

selecting
whenever
then change any fields you want
to the style modification question
Modify Print Style from the
DQL menu
by
and overwriting
your previous response.
5-79
Volume
DEFINE FORMAT /PRINT STYLE: DESIGNING REPORT OUTPUT

Define Print Style
Examples
Screen Destination: To send the report output

Printer Name and related fields blank.
P RINT
to the screen, leave
ST YLE SPECIFICftTION
Allou Style Modification at run-tine
^^^^^
Report Destination:
If disk Output.
Filename!
Nou press DEFAULT UIEU to get default

Printer Nane
Pause after each page ?
IF
-.v
alues for the
r enaining
PRINTER NAME IS SPECIFIED ABOUE
fields.
HeaderPAGE SIZE AND POSITION ON C ARRIAGE < in inches)

Length ^^^| Uidth |^^| Starting position |
MARGINS (in inches):

l.Left
3. Top to Header
5. Footer to BottoM
Text
Area
SEE F IGURE ON LEFT

Z. Right
4, Header to Text
6. Text to Footer
^^M
^^H
^^H
TYPE STYLE
Characters Per Inch
Highlights 1
-FooterS
Screen Preview: To preview a printed report on screen, specify the

Printer destination. After
all
change the report destination

formatted as
it
will
related questions are answered,

to Screen.
The screen output
appear when printed on
is
the specified printer
(within the limitations of the screen).
P RINT ST YLE
Report Destination:
If disk Output.
^^^^Q
SPECIFICATION
Filenane:
Nou press DEFAULT UIEU to get default u alues for the r enaining fields.
Printer Nane
3
IF PRINTER NAME
IS
SPECIFIED ABOUE
-Header4
Text
Area
-Footer5
Volume
PAGE SIZE AND P OSITION ON C ARRIAGE (in inches)

Length Q|]^H Uidth |^^| Starting position |
MARGINS (in inches): SEE FIGURE ON LEFT

Z. Right
l.Left
4. Header to Text
3. Top to Header
6. Text to Footer
5. Footer to BottOM
TYPE STYLE
Characters Per Inch
Highlights 1
5-80

Define Print Style
Examples
To print on continuous roil

Leave Margins fields blank.
Printer Destination:
Page Length
as 0.
labels, specify
P RINT ST YLE SPECIFICATION

Report Destination: j^^Q^D
flUou Style nodification at run-tine
If disk Output. Filenane:
Nou press DEFAULT U EU to get default

Printer Nane
v alues
IF PRINTER NAME
for the
r enaining
IS SPECIFIED ABOUE
fields.
HeaderPAGE SIZE AND P OSITION ON C ARRIAGE

in inches)
Length S^^| Uidth ^^^B Starting position |
<
Text
MARGINS in inches): SEE F IGURE ON LEFT

l.Left
Z. Right
3. Top to Header
4. Header to Text
B. Footer to BottoM
b. Text to Footer
<
Area
^^m
^^H
^^^
TYPE STYLE
Characters Per Inch
Highlights 1
-Footer
5
Fsraam r^^wa FîiiamnKMinsii
Printer Destination:
To
^ Fhiaiawwa^^
Fsmagf
on individually inserted pages,

Pause question.
each page to let you insert the next sheet or
print
specify the complete print style and answer yes to
DataEase stops
after
envelope.
P RINT
Report Destination;
If disk Output.
ST YLE SPECIFICATION
|2QQ
Filenane:
Nou press DEFAULT UIEU to get default u alues for the

Printer Nane
3
IF
r enaining
fields.
Headei
4
Text
Area
5 -XI
PAGE SIZE AND P OSITION ON C ARRIAGE (in inches)

Length E|B| Uidth |^^B Starting position |
MARGINS (in inches):

l.Left
3. Top to Header
5. Footer to Botton
SEE F IGURE ON LEFT

Z. Right
HJH
^^H
^^H
4.
6.
Header to Text
Text to Footer
Volume

Define Print Style
Examples
Disk Destination: To export the repon output to another program,

specify the filename including a pathname if appropriate. Be sure
that Printer Name and related fields are blank.
P RINT
Report Destination;
If disk Outp
ST YLE SPECIFICATION
[^Q^^|
CSCUSTOMERS
Nou press DFFrtlH.T UIEU to get default
Pniitfr Nane
^^
alues for the
IF PRINTER NAME
r et-ta
ining fields.
SPECIFIED ABOUE
IS
PAGE SIZE AND POSITION ON CARRIAGE (in inches)

Length ^^^| Uidth ^|^B Starting position |
Text
Area
&
Footer
MARGINS in inches): SEE F IGURE ON LEFT

Z. Right
1. Left
4. Header to Text
3. Top to Header
5. Footer to Botton
^^^| t.Text to Footer
(
^^H
^^H
TYPE STYLE
Characters Per
Highlights 1
nch
ni.u/J*lldi
Disk Destination: To save
the report
on disk for
later printing,
specify the report Printer destination. After answering
all
related
questions, change the report destination to Disk and enter the
filename and target drive
be printed
later
using the
letter.
The
resulting disk file output can
DOS COPY command.
This output
cannot be printed on individually inserted sheets.
PRINT STVLE SPEC F CftTION

rtllou Style Modification at run-tiMe
Report Destination: [^Q^^|
If disk Ou tput. FilenaMB:
I
Nou press DEFAULT I'lEU to get default ualues for the renaining fields.
U:Kml>\UZStmm
Printer Nane
3
IF
-Headei
4
Teyt
Area
8
-Footer
5
in inches!
PAGE SIZE AND P OSITION ON C ARRIAGE
Length 3^^| Uidth ^^^| Starting position |
C
MARGINS in inches): SEE

l.Left
3. Top to Header
S. Footer to Botton
I
^^H
^^H
^^|
IGURE ON LEFT
Z. Right
4.
6.
Header to Text
Text to Footer
TVPE STVLE
Characters Per Inch
Highlights 1
u^mssasEiim
Volume
5-82
Chapter 6
DQL Lexicon
INTRODUCTION
DQL
In this Lexicon, each entry
complete list of all the DataBase Query

Language concepts, terms, and symbols presented in alphabetical
order. Each query language term is identified and explained in the
he
Lexicon
is
lexicon in the following format:
Keyword: The
Type:
term or symbol as
it
appears
DQL
Identifies the type of the term.

five
in the
DQL.
begins on a separate page.

However, some entries
continue for two or more
pages. If an entry Joes not
require one of the format
sections defined on this page,
that section is omitted from
the explanation.
terms are divided into
main groups: commands, functions, keywords, operators,
and symbols. Each of these groups contains several

subordinate types.
Purpose: An overview
Syntax:
that explains the general
purpose of the term.
generic query statement that demonstrates the proper format
in
which the term
syntax format
is
itself,
used
in a
query. For an explanation of the
see Typographical Conventions on the
next page.
Returns:
Specifies the type of value that
is
returned by a function or
operator.
Usage:
Additional details concerning the use of the term
in
general
and special purpose contexts.
LAN:
Special considerations or restrictions that govern the use of
when running DataBase on
the term
LAN
(Local Area
Network).
Example: One
or
more examples
that
demonstrate the use of the term
a query statement or a complete query.
query
is
in
complete
presented, an explanation of the query and an
example of
See Also: A
When
the report output
is
generally included.
cross reference of related terms, including
same type and other important temis used
all
in the
terms of the
preceding
example.
6-1
Volume
DQL
LEXICON
DQL LEXICON TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS

Except as noted below, the typographical conventions used in this lexicon
are the same as those used in the previous chapters. These conventions
are explained in Chapter 1. Introduction to DQL Advanced Processing.
Syntax Diagrams
In the syntax diagrams, items enclosed in brackets
included in the statement.
If
may
or
may
not be
they are included, the quotation marks and
When items are separated by a

be used. For example, in the syntax statement:
parentheses must appear where shown.

vertical bar
I,
either
may
FORMNAME RELATIONSHIP [named "UNIQUE

RELATIONSHIP NAME"] [with (selection criteria)] FIELDNAME
any
you can use either a
FORMNAME or a RELATIONSHIP in
the query
can be included or
not. If selection criteria are included in the statement, the criteria must be
enclosed in parentheses. A FIELDNAME rtntst be included at the end of
the statement followed by a semicolon.
A "UNIQUE RELATIONSHIP NAME"
statement.
shown in lower case (any, named, and

The words shown in upper case (FORMNAME,
In the syntax diagrams, the terms
DQL
with) are
terms.
RELATIONSHIP, UNIQUE RELATIONSHIP NAME, and
FIELDNAME)
are generic terms. In an actual query you replace such

terms with specific data by typing in the actual database names or
selecting the appropriate items from the Interactive menus.
Margin Notes
The notes
printed in the margins contain cross references, syntax
restrictions,
and other important information. Unlike the
DataBase Reference Manual,
may
facts given in the lexicon
rest
of the
margin notes
not appear elsewhere on the same page.
Typesize
The
typesize used in the lexicon
is
slightly smaller than the size used in
the previous chapters.
Database Forms Used

Most of
the
INVOICES
Volume
in
the Examples
examples in the lexicon are based on the CUSTOMERS and

forms shown in Figure 3-1 at the start of Chapter 3.
6-2

Symbols
Symbols
are tools that clarify a query's meaning, perform basic
operations, and help retrieve data
you want
query
to retrieve.
Form
when you
The symbols
listed
Definition derivation formulas as well as

operations.
There are four groups of
DQL
math
can't recall the exact values
below can be used
DQL
in
Advanced Processing
symbols as specified below:
Punctuation Symbols
Punctuation Symbols
(semicolon)
(colon)
(period)
Punctuation symbols are used to clarify, separate, and conclude various

operations specified in a query. The double dash symbol precedes
comments used to annotate a query.
(parentheses)
"
(quotation marks)
"
--
(dash)
Math Symbols
Math Symbols
Math symbols
are used to perform arithmetic operations on numeric
values.
+ (plus)
-
Wildcard Symbols
Wildcard symbols are used to specify unknown characters
(minus)
(multiplication)
(division)
in selection
criteria text values.
Wildcard Symbols
Comparison Symbols
Comparison Symbols are used to compare one value to another. The
Assignment Operator symbol is used to assign a value to a field or
(asterisk)
(question mark)
(tilde)
variable.
For a full explanation of any of the DQL symbols, see the entry in the
Lexicon. The symbols are presented first, beginning on the next page.
Comparison Symbols
< (less than)
<=
(less than
or equal to)
(equals)
> (greater than)
>= (greater than

or equal to)
:=
Assignment
Operator
6-3
Volume
DQL LEXICON
DATAtASE REFERENCE MANUAL

Symbols
(cont.)
See Also: +,
Keyword:
/(division)
Type:
Arithmetic Symbol
Purpose: The
The
Syntax:
Returns:
symbol
Example:
to divide
Value
by Value
2.
result is the quotient of the division.
VALUE
DataBase
tells
VALUE
numeric value.
When
monthly rent
:=
annual rent
typing fractions like

DataBase requires
that you type a space t>efore
10
12
12,
and after
the
division
svmhol.
Q
Keyword:
* (multiplication)
Type:
Arithmetic Symbol
Purpose: The
Value
Syntax:
Returns:
Example:
6-5
symbol
2.
value
The
*
tells
DataEa.se to multiply Value
result
value
is
by
See Also: +,
-, /
the product of the multiplication.
numeric value.
wages
:=
hourly wage
total hours worked
Volume
DQL LEXICON
Symbols
(cont.)
Q
Keyword:
* (wildcard)
Type:
Wildcard (Character Pattern) Symbol
Purpose: The
for
* asterisk wildcard character
can be used to substitute
any number of unspecified characters
string.
It
can be used up to twice
unspecified
number of
characters
The symbol can be used
in
an alphanumeric
in a string to
show
may have been
that an
omitted.
any logical comparison or record
in
selection context.
Example
for
CUSTOMERS
with last
records
LAST NAME in order
name =
"
*son"
list
end
This query tells DataBase: List the records for customers whose last name
ends with the letters son. The report output for this query, arranged in
alphabetical order by LAST name, might look as follows:
LAST NAME
Anderson
Bateson
Davidson
Hanson
Robertson
Example
2: for
CUSTOMERS
with last
records
last name in order
name =
"'s?n"
list
end
DataBase: List the customers whose last name ends with
and /;. with an unknown value between them. The report
output for this query might look as follows:
This query
tells
the letters s
Andersen
Anderson
Bateson
Davidson
Hansen
Hanson
Robertson
Volume
6-6

Symbols
(cont.)
See Also:
Keyword:
? (wildcarci)
Type:
Wildcard (Single Character) Symbol
Purpose: The
? wild card character
unspecified character
in
is
used
to substitute for exactly
an alphanumeric
however, be used repeatedly
string.
It
one
can,
in a field to specify the exact
number of characters that have been omitted. The symbol can

be used
Example
1: for
in
any logical comparison or record selection context.
CUSTOMERS
with last
records
LAST NAME in order
FIRST NAME
name
= "Anders?n"
list
end
DataBase: List the records for customers named Andersen
lists customers named Andersan. Andersin. or
Andersitn, if any exist). The output for this query, arranged in
alphabetical orcler by LAST NAME, might look as follows:
This query
or
tells
Anderson
(it
LAST NAME
also
*,
DQL LEXICON
Symbols
(cont.)
See Also:
Keyword:
- (tilde)
Type:
Wildcard (Sound Pattern) Symbol
Purpose: The ^ wildcard
character
used to find data that "sounds

The ~ symbol can be used before
is
like" a specified text string.
any number of characters or words;

that
have a similar sound
comparisons with the

pattern:
^.
it
locates
all
the records
to the specified string. In
making
DataEase matches the consonant
vowels and spaces between words are ignored.
Consonants with similar sounds (such as f and ph) are treated

as the same character. The ~ symbol can be used in any
logical
used
comparison or record selection context and may be
in a text string after
See Volume
Example:
for
1.
Chapter
CUSTOMERS
list
another wildcard symbol (* or
2.
Record Entry,
with LAST
NAME =
for
?).
more information.
-Foster"
records
LAST NAME
FIRST
NAME
in
order
end
This quer\- tells DataEase: List the records for customers whose
sounds like Foster. The report output for this query, arranged in
alphabetical order by LAST NAME, might look as follows:
LAST NAME
last
name
*.

Symbols
(cont.)
Keyword:
Type:
Punctuation Symbol
See Also: item, sum, mean,

max, min, std.dev., std.err.,
variance {Statistical
Operators) and item, count,
percent (Conditional
(colon)
Purpose: A colon
is
statistical
inserted
operators
between a field name and one or more

when you want to include statistics in the
report output.
Syntax:
VALUE
Example:
for
statistical
operators
CUSTOMERS
list
records
LAST NAME in order

ACCOUNT BALANCE
item
sum
end
This query tells DataBase: List the CUSTOMERS records showing each
customer's LAST NAME, ACCOUNT BALANCE, and the total of all the
ACCOUNT BALANCE values at the end of the report. The report output for
this query, artanged in alphabetical order by LAST NAME, might look as
follows:
LAST NAME
Adams
ACCOUNT BALANCE
Statistical Operators).
DQL LEXICON
Symbols
(cont.)
a
Keyword:
Type:
Punctuation Symbol
...
(parentheses)
Purpose: Parentheses
are used as separators in selection criteria
and
function arguments and to clarify the sequence of mathematic

operations.
The use of parentheses
is
especially important
when combining selection criteria using the and and or

operators or when clarifying the order of evaluation of
otherwise ambiguous expressions and operations.
Example:
for
CUSTOMERS
with ACCOUNT BALANCE

or STATE = "NJ")
500 and (state = "NY"
records
LAST NAME in order
list
ACCOUNT BALANCE
STATE
end
With
the parentheses as
customers from either
shown,
this
New York
or
query
New
tells
DataBase
Jersey whose
to
list all
ACCOUNT
BALANCE is greater than 500. The report output from this query,
arranged alphabetically by LAST NAME, might look as follows:
LAST NAME
Adams
ACCOUNT BALANCE
STATE
the

Symbols
(cont.)
D
Keyword:
Type:
See Also:
(period)
(semicolon)
Punctuation Symbol
Purpose: A
period marks the end of an action that
may
or
may
not be
followed by other actions.

In a query,
Any
1.
Any
2.
3.
you must
DQL
insert a period after:
Control
command.
In a
assign, break, deflne. or exit Procedural
and
after
The
last
each action
item
in
in a
case,
if,
or while
for
CUSTOMERS
command
command.
records, modify records,
list
delete records, or enter a record Processing
Example:
command.
records
LAST NAME in order
list
ACCOUNT BALANCE
STATE
end
This query
tells
DataBase: List each customer's LAST NAME, ACCOUNT

output, arranged in alphabetical order by
BALANCE, and STATE. The report

LAST NAME, might look like this:
LAST NAME
Low Level query,
a period marks the end of the

procedure. In Hii;h Level,
multiple actions are permitted.
DQL LEXICON
Symbols
(cont.)
0]
See Also:
Keyword:
Type:
Punctuation Symbol
Purpose:
semicolon
is
The semicolon
used to separate items

is
always used
in a
after a for
query action.
command
that
specifies the query's Primary form; after ad-hoc selection
each output item except the
criteria are specified;
and
last in a list records,
modify records, or enter a record
after
command.
Syntax:
FIELDNAME CONSTANT VALUE
Example:
for
CUSTOMERS
with
records
LAST NAME in Order
list
ACCOUNT BALANCE
STATE
end
This query tells DataEase: For customers whose ACCOUNT BALANCE is

greater than 500. list each customer's LAST name, ACCOUNT BALANCE,
and STATE. The report output, arranged in alphabetical order by LAST
NAME, might look
LAST NAME
Adams
(period)
(semicolon)
as follows;
ACCOUNT BALANCE
STATE
The semicolon is used after a

for command that specifies the
query' s Primary form; it is not
used when the for command
specifies a form other than the
Primary form.
Symbols
.A
.Ji
S E
REFERENCE
Type:
Punctuation Symbol
(quotation marks)
Purpose: Quotation marks
are always used to enclose a text constant.
Quotes are also used
command and
define
when
IS first
It
to
to
enclose the
name of
a variable in a
enclose an optional relationship
specified in a query by the
"TEXT
CONSTANT
define
temp "VARIABLE NAME"
named
of CUSTOMERS named "HIGH VOLUME"

with
for
CUSTOMERS
list
with state
"NY"
records;
LAST NAME in Order

ACCOUNT BALANCE
STATE
name
operator.
'
sum
end
This query tells DataEase: For customers who live in New York,
list each customer's last n,ame. accolnt b.al.ance, and state.
The report output, arranged in alphabetical order by LAST NA.ME,
miaht look as follows:
LAST NAME
.A
\ t AL
Sec Also: define,
"..."
Example:
(cont.)
Keyword:
Syntax:
.'^
named
DQL LEXICON
Symbols
S
Keyword:
:=
Type:
Operator Symbol
Purpose: The assignment
operator symbol
of a variable or field
fieldname
Syntax:
address
:=
is
is
used whenever the
alue
assigned or modified.
assigned value
VARIABLE NAME
Example
See Also, assign
(Assignment Operator)
:=
ASSIGNED VALUE
data-entry
address
This query statement tells DataBase to modify the address field by

copying the value entered in the ADDRESS field on the Data-entry form.
Example
2:
assign temp discount

0.10
:=
INVOICES order total
This query statement assigns a value to a temporary variable named

DISCOLNT. The value assigned to the variable is 109f of the order
total on the invoice.
Volumes
6-14
DATA
Symbols
ASF.
R E F
R E N C E
F.
MAN
L:
AL
(cont.)
a
AIsd: <=, =, >, >=
between, not
.Sec
Keyword:
< (less than)
Type:
Comparison Operator Symbol
Purpose: The <
(less than)
another.
is les.s
Syntax:
Example:
symbol
is
used
to
compare one value
specifies that the value to the
left
of the
to
s\ inbol
than the value to the right of the symbol.
value
for
It
<
value
CUSTOMERS
with
account balance < 500
This query statement selects CUSTOMERS records that have a value less
than 500 in the ACCOUNT BALANCE field.
Keyword: <=
Type:
(less than or
equal
to)
Purpose: The <=
(less than or equal to)
value to another.
symbol
is
It
symbol
is
used to compare one
Sec Also: <. =,

between, not
>,
>=
specifies that the value to the left of the
less than or equal to the value to the right of the
symbol.
Syntax:
Example:
value
for
<= value 2
CUSTOMERS
witfi
ACCOUNT balance
This query statement selects CUSTOMERS records that have

than or equal tn .SOO in the ACCOUNT BALANCE field.
6-15
500
a
value less
Volume
DQL LEXICON
Symbols
(cont.)
B
Keyword: =
See Also: <, <=, >, >=,

between, not
(equals)
Type:
Purpose: The -
(equals)
another.
It
symbol
is
used to compare one value
specifies that the value to the left of the
to
symbol
is
equal to the value to the right of the symbol.
VALUE
Syntax:
Example:
for
VALUE 2
CUSTOMERS
with
account balance = 500
This query statement selects CUSTOMERS records that have a value

equal to 500 in the ACCOUNT BALANCE field.
B
Keyword: >
Type:
(greater than)
Purpose: The >
(greater than)
another.
It
symbol
is
used
compare one value to

the left of the symbol is
to
specifies that the value to
See Also: <, <=, =, >=,

between, not
greater than the value to the right of the symbol.
VALUE
Syntax:
Example:
for
>
VALUE
CUSTOMERS
with

greater than 500 in the ACCOUNT BALANCE field.
Volume
6-16
DATABASE REFERENCE
DQL LEXICON
abs
Keyword: abs
(absolute value)
See Also:
Type:
Math Function
Purpose: The abs
ceil, floor,
mod,
random
function converts a numeric value to a positive,
unsigned numeric value.
Syntax:
abs(NUMERIC VALUE)
Returns:
Usage:
The abs function can only be used with
numeric value.
a
numeric value.
non-numeric value always returns a value of
0.
Examples: abs(-453)
Returns:
453
abs(4.53)
Returns: 4.53
Volume
6-18

acos
Keyword:
acos (arccosine)
Type:
Trigonometric Function
See Also: asin, atan, atanl,

cos, cosh, sin, sink, tan, tank
Purpose: The acos function calculates the

The result is an angle expressed
Syntax:
between
and
7t.
acos(NUMERIC VALUE)
Returns:
Usage:
The
numeric value.
valid range of the input value
value
unless
Example:
arccosine of a numeric value.

in radians
is
it
outside the range,
it
may
is -1
to
1.
If the input
cause the system to freeze
has a math coprocessor.
acos(0.5)
Returns: 1,047195755
acos(-0.8)
Returns: 2.49809154
6-19
Volume
DQL LEXICON
Ad-hoc Relationship
Keyword: Ad-hoc
Relationship
any, count of,
lowest of, mean of,
named. Relationships
See Also:
Type:
Concept
highest
sum
Purpose: Like
a predefined relationship, an
relationship between
relationship
two
ad-hoc relationship
sets of records, but
is
of,
all,
of,
an ad-hoc
created during a queiy instead of being
is
specified on the Relationships form during the
An
Definition process.
ad-hoc relationship
lets
Form
you
easily
access records in another form while processing a procedure.
However, because
the ad-hoc relationship isn't stored as a
part of the database,
An
it
ad-hoc relationship
must be redefined
is
which new selection
When you
is
used
each procedure.
created by combining a relational
(or relational statistical) operator with the
unrelated form, or the
in
name
name of an
of a predefined relationship to
criteria are added.
create an ad-hoc relationship, the
to give the set of related records a
lets DataBase identify each

from a given form.
named
operator
unique name. This
distinct set of records selected
relational operator FORMNAME

RELATIONSHIP [named
"UNIQUE RELATIONSHIP NAME"] [with (selection criteria)]
Syntax
[FIELDNAME]
Usage:
Once an ad-hoc
relationship
criteria, the criteria
is
created with certain selection
cannot be changed during the remainder
If you want to select another set of records, you

must create a new ad-hoc relationship and give it a new name
of the query.
using the
named
-^
Volume
operator.
This entry continues on the next page
6-20

Ad-hoc Relationship
Example:
for
(cont.)
CUSTOMERS
list
with
records
LAST NAME
sum
of
in
order
INVOICES named
"MAY" with
(CUSTOMER # = CUSTOMERS CUSTOMER

and DATE between 05/01/89 to 05/31/89
ORDER TOTAL
#
)
end
As
there
a predefined relationship between
is
INVOICES
based on the
sum
of
customer
CUSTOMERS
and
# field, the statement;
INVOICES named
"MAY" with

ORDER TOTAL
#
)
creates an ad-hoc relationship by adding the additional
DATE
selection
criteria to the existing predefined relationship.
This query tells DataEase: 1) Select all the CUSTOMERS records that
have a account balance greater than $500. 2) Find all these customers'
invoices in the related INVOICES form that are dated during May 1989.
3) For each record selected from the CUSTOMERS form, list the
customer's last name and the sum of that customer's May invoices.
Note
that if
JUNE
we
invoices,
also
want DataEase
we have
list the sum of these customers'

new ad-hoc relationship and give it
to
to create a
unique name as shown below:

for
CUSTOMERS
with
records
LAST name in order
ACCOUNT balance > 500
list
sum
of
INVOICES named
"MAY" with

ORDER TOTAL
of INVOICES named
#
)
sum
"JUNE" with
(CUSTOMER # = CUSTOMERS customer

ORDER TOTAL
#
)
end
6-21
Volume
DQL LEXICON
all
Keyword:
all
Type:
Relational Operator
See Also: any
Purpose: The
all
operator selects every record
in a related
form
that
matches the current record being processed.
Syntax:
Returns:

RELATIONSHIP NAME"] [with (selection criteria)) FIELDNAME
all
The
specified value from every matching record in the related
The type of value returned
form.
specified field.
For example,
the returned value
Usage:
The
all
items
if
is
the
same
operator can only be used to specify report output
in a list
records command.
one Tertiary form,
etc.).
CUSTOMERS
list
cannot be used
It
all
level
(i.e.,
See Example
with
to specify
from more than
one Secondary form,
2.
records
LAST name
all
fields,
is text.
one form on each relationship
for
as that of the
you're selecting text
selection criteria or to select related records
Examplel:
in
groups
INVOICES INVOICE #
INVOICES ORDER total
;
end
have an ACCOUNT balance greater than $500. 2) Find all these
customers' invoices in the related INVOICES form. 3) For each record
selected from the INVOICES form, list the invoice # and the ORDER
total. The output from this query, arranged in groups by LAST NAME
(from the CUSTOMERS form), miaht look as follows:
LAST NAME

all
The
(cont.)
all
operator
lets
you
To demonstrate
relationship level.
from one form on each
E.xample 2 introduces a third

form called RETURNS. The RETURNS form keeps track of any returned
merchandise and the amount refunded for each invoice. The RETURNS
form is related to the INVOICES form by the INVOICE # field.
Exampie2:
CUSTOMERS
for
list
this,
with
records
LAST NAME
all
in
groups
INVOICES INVOICE #
INVOICES ORDER TOTAL
INVOICES all RETURNS refund total
;
all
end
have an ACCOUNT balance greater than $500. 2) Find all these
customers' invoices in the related INVOICES form. 3) For each record
selected from the INVOICES form, list the invoice # and the order
TOTAL. 4) For each invoice, find the related record in the RETURNS form
(i.e., the record with the same INVOICE
#) and list the REFUND TOTAL.
The output from
CUSTOMERS
LAST NAME
Adams
Cooper
Evans
this
query, arranged in groups by LAST
form), might look as follows:
NAME
The e.xample on this page

shows how all can he used to
access information in a
Tertiary form by iisini; a
related Secondary form
The all operator cannot he

used to access information
from more than one form on
the
all
ivers
(from the
same
relationship level.
DQL LEXICON
ampm
Keyword: ampm
Type:
See Also: current, hour,

minutes, seconds, timeampm
Time Function
Purpose: The
ampm
function evaluates a value expressed in the
24-hour time format

abbreviation
Syntax:
AM
(HH:MM:SS) and
(before noon), or
PM
returns the appropriate

(after noon).
ampm(TIME VALUE)
AM or PM).
Returns:
Usage:
Time values from midnight (00:00:00) to

:59:59) return
AM. Time values from noon (12:00:00) to (23:59:59) return
PM.
text value (either
Examples: ampm(08:15:25)
Returns:
AM
ampm(1 5:30:50)
Returns:
Volume
PM
6-24

and
Keyword: and
Type:
See Also:
between,
Logical Operator
Purpose: The and

Syntax:
<=,
not
=,
>,
>=
operator combines two sets of selection criteria.
SELECTION CRITERIA
Returns:
<
or,
The values
and SELECTION CRITERIA 2
records that satisfy both of the selection criteria
in
statements.
Usage:
The and operator
requires that a record meet all the specified
The or operator requires

meet any of the specified criteria to be
selection criteria to be processed.

that a record
When
processed.
Examples:
combined with both the

criteria must be
selection criteria are
and and or
operators
enclosed
parentheses to clarify the meaning.
for
in
in
one statement, the
CUSTOMERS with state = "NY"

and ACCOUNT balance > 500
;
This statement
that contain
tells
NY
DataBase: Process only those CUSTOMERS records

STATE field and a value greater than 500 in the
field. Only records that satisfy both these criteria are
in the
ACCOUNT BALANCE
processed.
for
CUSTOMERS with (STATE = "NY"

and account balance > 500
or
STATE = "NJ")
This statement
tells
500
in
the
Again, only records
6-25
DataBase: Process only those
NY
NJ in the STATE
ACCOUNT BALANCE field.
that contain either
or
field
CUSTOMERS
and
records
a value greater than
that satisfy horli sets of criteria are processed.
Volume
DQL LEXICON
any
Keyword: any
Type:
See Also:
Relational Operator
Purpose: The any
operator selects the first record
in a related
form
all
that
matches the current record being processed.

Syntax:
Returns:
any
The
specified value
related form.
of the specified
Usage:
from
the//;-i7
matching record
The type of value returned
is
in the
same
the
as that
field.
The any operator can be used
to:
Note that the any operator

(unlike the all operator) can
access information in any
number offorms on the same
relationship level.
1.
Specify output items
2.
Specify selection
relationship level
etc.).
for
(i.e..
See Primary
INVOICES
with
records command.
criteria.
Select related records from
3.
Example:
in a list
more than one form on each
Secondary forms. Tertiary forms,
Form
for details
on relationship
order total > 500
records
INVOICE # in order
levels.
list
ORDER TOTAL
any
end
CUSTOMERS
last name
This query tells DataBase: 1) Select all the INVOICES records that have
an ORDER TOTAL greater than 500. 2) For each record selected from the
INVOICES form, list the invoice # and the ORDER TOTAL. 3) For each
record selected from the INVOICES form, find the first (and only the
first) related record in the CUSTOMERS form. 4) For each record
selected from the CUSTOMERS form, list the customer's LAST NAME.
The output from this query, arranged in order by INVOICE #, might look as
follows:
INVOICE*
A1 17095
ORDER TOTAL
LAST NAME

asm
Keyword:
asin (arcsine)
Type:
Purpose: The
The
See Also: acos, atan, alan2,

asin function calculates the arcsine of a numeric value.

result
is
an angle expressed
in
radians between -nil to
nil.
Syntax:
asin(NUMERIC VALUE)
Returns:
Usage:
The
numeric value.
valid range of the input value
value
unless
Example:
Z2
is
it
outside the range,
it
is -1
may cause
to
1.
If the input
the system to freeze
has a math coprocessor.
asin(l)
Returns:
1.570796
asin(-0.50)
Returns
-0.5235988
6-27
Volume
DQL LEXICON
assign
See Also: define, global, temp
Keyword:
assign
Type:
Procedural
Command
Purpose: The assign command
or global variable.
used to give a value to a temporary
is
variable
is
used to store a value, such as
a text string or a calculated result, that can change during the
processing of a procedure.
specifying the variable's name,
By
the stored value can be used like any other value in a query.
The status of a variable can be global (denoted by the

keyword global) or temporary (denoted by the keyword
temp).
temporary variable can only maintain a value during
the current procedure.
from one procedure
global variable can pass
to another.
To
its
value
pass a value from one
procedure to another, the variable must be defined identically

in
Syntax:
each procedure.
assign global
temp VARIABLE
The assign command
Usage:
is
NAME
:=
ASSIGNED VALUE
followed by:
The status of the variable (global or temporary).

The name of the variable (without quotation marks).
The assignment operator.
The value assigned to the variable.
A period.
Example:
define
for
temp "DISCOUNT" Number
INVOICES
with
ORDER TOTAL > 500

:= INVOICES order total
;
assign temp DISCOUNT

0. 15
modify records
.
ORDER TOTAL
:=
ORDER TOTAL
temp DISCOUNT
end
This query
tells
DISCOUNT to
DataEase:
store a
1)
Create (define) a temporary variable called

the current query. 2) Find
number while processing
records that have a value greater than 500 in the order

the DISCOUNT variable a number value
determined by multiplying the ORDER total on each invoice by 157r.
4) Modify these INVOICES records by subtracting the value of the
all
the
TOTAL
INVOICES
field. 3)
Give (assign)
DISCOUNT variable
Volume
from the value
in the
ORDER total
field.
6-28

atan
Keyword: atan
Type:
(arctangent)
See Also: acos, asin, atanl,

Purpose: The atan function calculates the arctangent of a numeric

value. The result is an angle expressed in radians between
-nil to
Syntax:
Returns:
7t/2.
atan(NUMERIC VALUE)
numeric value.
Examples: atan(500.3)
Returns
.56879753
atan(-359.4)
Returns
6-29
-1.5680139
Volume
DQL LEXICON
atan2
Keyword: atan2
Type:
See Also: acos, asin, atan,

(arctangent 2)
Purpose: The atan2
function calculates the arctangent of Value
divided by Value
2.
The
result
is
an angle expressed in
radians between -n to n.
Syntax:
atan2(NUMERIC VALUE
Returns:
1,
NUMERIC VALUE
2)
numeric value.
Examples: atan2(3,127)
Returns
0.02361766
:
atan2(1,
Returns
Volume
1)
:
0.7854
6-30

backup db
Keyword: backup db (backup
See Also: db status,
database)
reorganize, restore db
Type:
Control
Command
Purpose: The backup db command

current database.
When
processing reaches a
command, DataBase automatically

It
The backup db command
backup copy of the
creates a
backup db
locks the current database.
functions like selecting

Backup Database {Option 2)
on the Maintenance menu.
then displays a series of prompts asking you to specify the
drive on which the
you want
to
backup copy should be stored and how
handle any errors that occur during the backup
For more information on

database backups, see
Volume I Chapter 4,
Database Maintenance.
,
procedure.
Syntax:
Usage:
backup db
When you backup
a database using the
backup db command,
DataEase copies the database using a special format;

therefore, the
backup copy can only be restored using
DataEase restore db
command
or Maintenance
When you backup and
restore a database,
been deleted since the
last
all
menu
the
option.
records that have
backup and restore operation are
permanently erased.
LAN:
On
LAN
(Local Area Network),
if
another user
is
currently
backup db command,
using any resource required by the
DataEase displays a Resource Conflict message. While
message
the
is
command
at brief intervals.
procedure during
When
this
displayed, DataEase automatically tries to execute
this time,
the required resource
you want
If
you must reboot
becomes
to abort the
the computer.
available,
DataEase
automatically resumes processing and executes the rest of the
procedure.
for
See Volume
2,
Chapter
more information on resource
4,
System Administration
conflicts
and Multi-User
Locking Options.
Example:
record entry "CUSTOMERS"

.
backup db
This query tells DataEase: 1) Display the CUSTOMERS form so the

operator can enter new customer records. 2) When the operator finishes
entering records, run the procedure named PRINT INVOICES. 3) After
running the PRINT INVOICES procedure, make a backup copy of the
current database.
6-31
Volume
DQL LEXICON
between
See Also: <=, <, =, >, >=,
not
Keyword: between
Type:
Comparison Operator
Purpose: The between
operator
is
within a specified range.
used to indicate that a value
greater than or equal to Value
Value
Returns:
Example:
All records for
for
which
CUSTOMERS
499
Volume
the
to
is
less than or equal to
VALUE
comparison
with
is
true.
account balance between
CUSTOMERS
and 499 (inclusive)
and
to
This query statement selects
between
2.
TEST VALUE between VALUE
Syntax:
falls
specifies that the test value
It
in the
records that have a value
account balance
field.
6-32

blank
Keyword: blank
Type:
Keyword
Purpose: The blank keyword
is
used to assign a
/;////
value to a field or
variable.
Syntax:
blank
Usage:
null value
is
an unspecified value, not a zero.
statistics are calculated
included
in
on a
in the calculation.
generating
field,
Zero
blank values
field values
When
are not
are included
statistics.
Field or variable values can be
compared
to
blank, and blank
can be assigned as a value to any field or variable.
Examples:
for
CUSTOMERS
with
account balance = blank
delete records
end
This query tells DataBase: Delete the CUSTOMERS records that have a
blank value in the account balance field. It might be used to delete
inactive
6-33
CUSTOMERS
records.
Volume
DQL LEXICON
break
Keyword: break
See Also: exit
Type:
Procedural
Command
Purpose: The break command

a for or while
is
used to immediately stop the action of
command and
continue processing the
procedure.
When
processing reaches a break
command, DataBase
immediately abandons the current action.

processing the procedure w
ith
corresponding end command.
Syntax:
It
resumes
the first action listed after the

call
menu
menu
Keyword:
call
Type:
Control
See Also: call program
Command
menu command
Purpose: The
call
Syntax:
menu "MENU NAME"
call
displays the specified menu.
menu command,
menu name should he
hi a call
enclosed
Usage:
The
call
menu command
can be used
to display either a
DataBase system menu or a user-defined menu
at
unless
any point
in the
the
menu
is
displayed, you can
make
selections
from
quotation marks
specified as a
variable. User-defined menus

are called hy the name entered
during a Control Procedure.
When
in
it is
the
it
the
Menu Name field when
menu was
created.
and perform the associated DataBase operations normally.
When
the
a chain
menu
is
menu
called,
is
it
automatically executed, but
is
not displayed.
The DataBase system menus
are called by the following
MAIN (Main Menu)

FORMS (Form Definition menu)
RECORDS (Record Entry menu)
QUICK REPORTS (QBE Quick Reports
DQL PROCEDURES (DQL menu)
MAINTENANCE (Maintenance menu)
-
UTILITIES
(Utilities
menu
For more information on the

use of menus, see Volume 2,
Chapter 3.
Menu Definition.
menu)
menu)
ADMINISTRATION
When
titles:
function
(Administration menu)
is
completed and you press ESC, the
Control Procedure resumes with the action following the call
menu command.
Example:

.
call
menu "MAINTENANCE"
This query tells DataBase: 1) Display the CUSTOMERS Record Entry

form so the operator can enter new records. 2) Run the PRINT
INVOICES Procedure. 3) Display the Maintenance menu.
6-35
Volume
DQL LEXICON
call
program
Keyword:
call
Type:
Control
program
See Also: call menu
Command
program command runs
Purpose: The
call
Syntax:
program
call
the specified
DOS
program.
"PROGRAM NAME [OPTIONAL ARGUMENT
".
In a call program
the
Usage:
The
call
program
The
program command
at
used to
is
call
and run another
any point during a Control Procedure.
called program can be any
command must
program. The
on which the called program
is
command,
program name and
arguments should he enclosed

in quotation marks unless a
variahle
is
specified.
.BAT, .COM, or .EXE

specify the drive and directory
stored
if
it
is
not stored in the
current directory.
The command can include
1)
or an expression involving
functions and variables (Example
When
the called
The command
optional arguments.
can be a constant (Example
2).
program has been executed, DataEase
resumes processing the Control Procedure with the action

following the call
program command.
CAUTION: Do
not try to call a memory-resident program from within

DataEase. Doing so may damage your system.
NOTE: DataEase
can he swapped
or disk to free enough
enough
EMS memory
transfers itself into

If there is not
itself to disk.
program and
DataEase
to either
memory for
E.xpanded
Memoiy (EMS)
the called program.
If
e.xpanded memory.
is
available,
enough memory, you can make DataEase swap

To do this, you must add the name of the called
its
memory requirement
PROGCALL.DAT
which you can
edit with
file.
(in bytes) to the
This
any ASCII
is
an ASCII text
file
text editor.
The following information must be entered in the

PROGCALL.DAT file for each program you intend
to call
from DataEase:
PROGNAME
-^
Volume
bytes
6-36

call
program
(cont.)
PROGNAME
name of
the
is
.BAT, .COM, or .EXE file

may be included in the call
the .DAT file.
the
with no parameters.
Parameters
program command,
but not
in
Following the program name,
insert a space
followed by a
number representing the program's memory requirement in

bytes. This number should be entered with no commas or
decimal points
(e.g.,
384K
is
entered as 384000).
If you do not have EMS. you must add this information for
each program you want to call from within DataEase. If you
don't have sufficient EMS. a call will not be executed unless
the
program information
file.
To
ensure that
is
included
all calls
in the
are executed,
PROGCALL.DAT
we recommend
that
you add any programs you intend to call to this file, even if
you think you have enough EMS to make swapping to disk
unnecessary.
When DataEase
is
shipped the
includes three programs
COMMAND)
Example:
each of which
run procedure
call
PROGCALL.DAT
file
(CONVERT, GRAFTALK,
is
The
and
assigned 360K.
"MONTHLY SALES"
program "C:\GT\GRAFTALK BARCHART.1"
This query tells DataEase 1) Run the predefined MONTHLY SALES

Procedure which sends a summary of the monthly sales to a disk file.
2) Call the DataEase GrafTalk program and run the predefined GrafTalk
chart BARCHART.I. which uses the output file created by the
previous
procedure to draw a graph of the monthly
sales.
Example: 2 define temp "CHART" TEXT.

assign temp CHART := "BARCHART.I"
define temp "PROG" TEXT.
assign temp PROG := "C:\GT\GRAFTALK"
.
run procedure
call
program
"MONTHLY SALES"
jointext
PROGCALL.DAT file
includes three programs:
DataEase Convert (included

with DataEase). which is used
to convert data from Lotus
and/or Paradox into a
DataEase database (for more
information on converting a
Lotus or Parado.x Application,
see Volume 2. Chapter 5.
Database Utilities): DataEase

GrafTalk (separate product
available from DataEase
International), which is used
to create charts and graphs
from vour data: and the DOS
C0MMAND.COM program.
(PROG, CHART)
This query does exactly the same thing as the simpler one above, but
shows the proper use of an expression as an argument for the call
program command.
NOTE:
6-37
The aii-umcms of the jointext function (PROG. CHART) are

not enclosed in quotes because they are variables.
Volume
DQL LEXICON
case
See Also: break, end, exit, if,

nested actions, others, value,
Keyword:
case
Type:
Procedural
while
Command
Purpose: The case command

with multiple
functions like an if-then-else statement
It tells
ifs.
to a series of values
DataEase
to
compare an expression
and execute a different action (or group
of actions) based on which comparison
When
processing reaches a case
compares
is
true.
command, DataEase
the expression that follows case to each of the
statements specified by the keyword value.
comparison
If the first
DataEase executes
is true,
all
The keyword value
the
actions between that value statement and the next value

statement.
If the first
comparison
compared
to the next
is
not true, the case expression
is
automatically inserted after

the case expression in High
Level Interactive Mode.
is
value statement. This comparing of
values continues in top-to-bottom sequence from one value

statement to the next until the case expression has been
compared
As soon
each value statement.
to
as the actions following
any single statement are
executed, processing passes to the
end command
If
first
action following the
for the case structure.
none of the specified value comparisons are
true,
DataEase
executes the actions specified after the keyword others.
others keyword
is
specified actions,
Syntax:
If the
not present, DataEase executes none of the
it
continues processing the query.
case (EXPRESSION)
value
COMPARISON
ACTION SERIES
[value
COMPARISON
1.
ACTION SERIES 2]
[value
COMPARISON N
ACTION SERIES N]
[others
OTHERS ACTION
SERIES.]
end
-^
Volume
6-38

case
(cont.)
Usage:
The case command
requires a case expression, at least one

value statement, and an end command. Subsequent value
statements, actions, and the others

If
others
is
used,
it
keyword
must follow the
last
The case expression must be enclosed

be a
field, a variable, or
are optional.
value statement.
in parentheses.
It
can
any other expression except a
boolean expression (true or
Each comparison value
false).
can be a constant, a variable, an expression, or a range of

values.
An
command
action can specify any valid procedure
including another
command must
first
while, or case
if,
command. Each nested
be completed before processing passes to the
action after the
end command
(see the nested actions
entry in this Lexicon).
When
case
commands
matched with
applies to
for,
Example:
if,
all
end corresponds
are nested, the first
to
and each case comand must be
the last preceding case,
a corresponding
end command. This
nested Procedural
commands
rule
(including case,
and while).
case (current user name)
"FRANK"
menu "ADMINISTRATION"
value "TOM"
call menu "UPDATE"
value "CAROL"
value
call
run procedure "DAILY"

others:
record entry
"CUSTOMERS"
end
This query tells DataEase: If the current user is Frank, display the
Administration menu. If the current user is Tom. display the Update
menu.
user
is
If
the current user
is
Carol, run the Daily Procedure.
anyone other than Frank, Tom, or Carol, display the
If the
current
CUSTOMERS
Record Entry form.
6-39
Volume
DQL
LEXICON
ceil
Keyword:
ceil
Type:
Math Function
See Also: abs, floor, mod,
random
Purpose: The
ceil function
rounds up a numeric value
to the next
integer.
Syntax:
ceil(NUMERIC VALUE)
Returns:
Examples:
An
integer value.
ceil(5.000)
Returns:
ceil(5.001)
Returns;
Volume
6-40

comments
B
Keyword:
--
Type:
Symbol
See Also: The double dash

(-) comments symbol at the
front of the lexicon.
(comments)
Purpose: The -- (comments) symbol is used to insert annotative

comments in a query. Comments have no effect during
Comments can only he added

the
to
a query
in
Edit Mode.
execution of the procedure.
Syntax:
Usage:
-COMMENT TEXT
Comments can
DataBase
treats
symbol and
To
continue a
dash symbol
Example:
the
for
only be added to a query
Edit
Mode.
each character between the double dash
end of the
line as part
comment on more
at the
with
of the comment.
than one
beginning of each
CUSTOMERS
list
in
line,
use the double
line.
account balance >= 500
records
LAST name
ACCOUNT BALANCE
end -- THIS QUERY LISTS THE VOLUME BUYERS.
-IT SHOULD BE UPDATED ON THE TENTH DAY
-OF EACH MONTH.
;

greater than or equal to 500 in the ACCOUNT BALANCE field and lists the
customers' last name and CURRENT balance values. The comment at
the
end of the query has no
that follows the
effect on processing. DataEase ignores text

double dash comment .symbol.
NOTE: Comments
are for your reference purposes only. DataEase

ignores comments when processing the query.
6-41
Volume
DQL LEXICON
Comparison Operators
Keyword: Comparison Operators
Type:
See Also: <=,

between, not
<, =, >,
>=,
Operator
Purpose: Comparison Operators
are used to
another in record selection
criteria,
compare one value to

math formulas, and in
other text and numeric expressions.
The
DQL
uses seven Comparison Operators:
Both sides of the comparsion have the same

value.
The value on
the left side of the
less than the value
The value on
on the right
comparison
is
side.
the left side of the
comparison
is
greater than the value on the right side.
<=
The value on
to the value
>=
The value on
to the value
between
The value
the left side
on the
the left side
on the
lies
is
less than or
equal
right side.
is
greater than or equal
right side.
within the specified range
(inclusive).
Reverses the meaning of the operator that
not
immediately follows
Examples:
for
CUSTOMERS
with
and STATE not = "NY"
for
INVOICES
to
Volume
01/31/89
it.
with date
between 01/01/89
6-42

Conditional Statistical Operators
Keyword: Conditional
Operators
Statistical
See Also: count, item, percent
Type:
Operator
Purpose:
Conditional Statistical Operators generate statistical

information about specific conditions that occur in a set of
records.
The
DQL
uses three Conditional Statistical Operators: item,
count, and percent.
item
returns a
YES
comparison
count
returns the
is
or
NO
answer indicating
if
the
true or false.
number of
true responses within all
the specified records as well as specified groups.
percent
returns the percentage of true responses

(the
number of true responses divided by

number of records processed,
the total
multiplied by 100).
at the
Usage:
percent also works
level.
in a query, the Conditional Statistical

after a
item that
list
operator
is
is
compared
Operator
is
inserted
to a specified value.
The
separated from the comparison by a colon.
->
6-43
group
Volume
DQL LEXICON
Conditional Statistical Operators (cont.)
Example:
for
CUSTOMERS
records
LAST NAME in order
list
ACCOUNT BALANCE
;
item count percent
end
This query tells DataEase: 1) Process all the CUSTOMERS records.
2) List each customer's LAST name and ACCOUNT balance. 3) For each
customer, display a YES or NO answer indicating if the customer's
ACCOUNT BALANCE is greater than 500. 4) Display the total number of
customers whose ACCOUNT balance is greater than $500.
5) Display the number of customers that have an ACCOUNT BALANCE
greater than 500 as a percentage of all the customers.
The output from
this query arranged

might look as follows:
LAST
in alphabetical
order by LAST
name

Constant Value
Keyword: Constant Value

Type:
See Also: variable
Concept
Purpose:
constant value
procedure
is
is a value that does not change while a

being processed (the opposite of a variable).
Constant values are used
in selection criteria
math formulas, proper names, and other
text
comparisons,
and numeric
expressions.
Usage:
In a query, a constant value
type
is
allowed.
can be used wherever
The value types of constants
the basic field value types: text,
its
are the
number, numeric
value
same
as
string, date,
time, and dollar.
The format
for typing constant values
--Enclose Text constants
-Use slashes in Date

-Use colons in Time
-Do
-Do
Example:
for
as follows:
double quotes ("TEXT").
constants (01/01/89).
constants (09:30:00).
not type formatting characters in numeric strings.

not type
commas
CUSTOMERS
and
ZIP
in
In this
query statement, both the

are constant values.
Number
with last
> 90000
90000
6-45
in
is
last
constants.
name = "SPENCER"
name SPENCER and
the zip
code
Volume
3
I
DQL LEXICON
Control Procedure
See Also: Processing

Procedure
Keyword: Control Procedure

Type:
Concept
Purpose: A Control procedure
is
High Level procedure
that lets
you
link other procedures together with or without conditional
processing actions specified by Procedural commands.
Control procedure can link any number of procedures
system menus such as
many
Procedural commands.
Although a Control procedure can
link Processing procedures
together, you cannot use a Processing
Control procedure
itself.
Note
command
also, that a
in the
Control procedure
itself
cannot enter, delete, or modify records, or create output.
For a
full
individual
Example:
run procedure
etc.
Control procedure can include any combination of Control
commands and
if
explanation of any of the
command
Commands
operations
Database. Install an Application,
Usage:
Control
shown on DataBase
Record Entry, Run Procedure, Backup
together and can invoke
DQL commands,
see the
call
menu
call
program
record entry
import
reorganize
db status
backup db
restore db
lock db
unlock db
install application
entry in this lexicon.
current user = "PAUL" then

call
menu
"UTILITIES".
run procedure
else
call
"MAILING LIST"
menu "MAIN"
end
This Control procedure tells DataBase: If the current user is Paul,
1) Display the Utilities menu. 2) Run the procedure that generates an
up-to-date mailing list. 3) If the current user is not Paul, display the Main
Menu.
Volume
6-46

copy
from
all
Keyword: copy
Type:
ail
from
Processing
See Also: data-entry, enter a

record, modify records
Command
Purpose: The copy all from command copies values

named fields from one form to another.
The copy
all
from command
Command menu
because
it
is
in identically
not listed on the
High Level
can only be used following either
modify records or enter a record command. When you

commands. DataEase asks if you want
use the copy all from command to transfer data from one
form to another.
a
select either of these
Syntax:
Usage:
copy
all
from
FORMNAME
to
data-entry
The copy all from statement must specify a Source form.

The Source form can be any form or relationship previously
specified in the query or the Data-entry form.
The Target form is specified at the end of the mandatory

modify records or enter a record command. The Target
form can be any form you specify; the default is the Primary
form. Data is copied into each Target field from the
identically
named
Example: Assume we've
CUSTOMERS.
field in the
When yoit use the copy all

from command, data is only
transferred between fields with
the same fieldname.
Non-matching fields are

ignored.
Source form.
defined a target form called
CATALOG
This form contains only those customers
who
receive a special Christmas promotional catalog.

for
CUSTOMERS
with
any INVOICES order total > 500

enter a record in CATALOG CUSTOMERS
copy all from CUSTOMERS
end
;
have any related INVOICE record with an ORDER TOTAL greater than
$500. 21 For each CUSTOMERS record selected, enter a record in the
CATALOG CUSTOMERS form and copy all the information frotii the
source CUSTOMERS record into the target CATALOG CUSTOMERS
record, based on matching field names.
b-Al
Volume
DQL LEXICON
COS
Keyword:
cos (cosine)
Type:
Purpose: The cos
function calculates the cosine of an angle expressed
in radians.
Syntax:

cosh, sin, sink, tan, tank
The value returned ranges between
-1
and
1.
cos(NUMERIC VALUE)
Returns:
numeric value.
Examples: cos(3.1415928)
Returns:
cos(-22)
Returns:
Volume
-1
.9271838
6-48
cosh
Keyword: cosh
Type:
(hyperbolic cosine)
Purpose: The cosh

expressed
Syntax:
Returns:

atanZ, cos, sin, sinh, tan, tank
function calculates the hyperbolic cosine of an angle

in radians.
cosh(NUMERIC VALUE)
numeric value.
Examples: cosh(2.34)
Returns: 5.23878166
C0Sh(-5.4)
Returns: 110.70547
6-49
Volume 3
LEXICON
DQL
count
See Also: count

percent
Keyword: count
Type:
of, item,
Conditional Statistical Operator
Purpose: The count
operator counts the
number of records
in the
form
being processed that satisfy a condition specified by a
comparison of two values. The

statistic in the
Syntax:
Usage:
CONDITION
To count
that
is
Example
is
count [other
result usually appears as a
area at the end of a report.
statistical
operators]
the records processed by a query, use a statement
true for every record, such as
shown
1: for
all
summary
in
Example
CUSTOMERS
"A" = "A". This method
2.
records
LAST NAME in order
list
ACCOUNT BALANCE
;
COunt
end
This query tells DataBase: 1) List the CUSTOMERS records showing
each customer's last name and account balance. 2) Count the
number of customers who have an ACCOUNT BALANCE greater than $500.
The output from this query might look as follows:
LAST NAME
To count all the records

processed hy a query, use a
sraiement that is true for every
record, such as "A" = "A".

count of
Keyword: count
Type:
of
See Also:
highest
Relational Statistical Operator
Purpose: The count of
form match the specified selection

appear as a
list
statistic in the
Syntax:
all,
any, count,
lowest
of,
mean
of sum of named
how many
operator counts
of,
records in a related
criteria.
The
result
can
item in the detail area of a report or as a
summary
area
at the
end of a
report.
of FORMNAME
RELATIONSHIP [named "UNIQUE
RELATIONSHIP NAME"] [with (selection criteria)]
count
Example:
for
CUSTOMERS
list
There's an important
records
LAST NAME # in Order

ACCOUNT BALANCE
ACCOUNT BALANCE > 500 item count
count of INVOICES with (Order total > 100)
;
end
This query tells DataBase: 1) Process all the CUSTOMERS records.
2) List each customer's last name, and account balance. 3) For each
customer, display a YES or NO answer indicating if the customer's
ACCOUNT BALANCE is greater than 500. 4) Count the total number of
customers whose ACCOUNT BALANCE is greater than $500 and display this
total as a statistic at the end of the report output (this is generated by the
count operator). 5) Count the number of related INVOICES records that
have an ORDER TOTAL greater than $100, and display this number as a list
item for each customer (this is generated by the count of operator). The
output from this query might look as follows:
LAST
difference between the

conditional statistical
operator count and the

relational statistical operator
count
of.
count finds the
number of records
that satisfy
a specified condition among

the records being processed.
count of calculates the

number of matching records
related to the records being
processed by the query.
DQL LEXICON
current
See Also: data-entry, global,
Keyword: current
input,
temp
Keyword
Type:
Purpose: The current keyword
lets
you access any of the eight
system-determined variables defined below:
current date returns the date recorded by the system clock

(a date value).
current time returns the time recorded by the system clock

(a time value).
current page
number
returns the current page
number
for
multi-page report output (a numeric value).
number
current item
returns the
number of the
current record by
automatically counting records as they are processed by the query (a
numeric value).
name
current user
returns the
name used
to sign onto the database
(a text value).
current user level returns the current user's security level

value from
numeric
current computername returns the name of the workstation

processing the procedure
Network
(a
to 7).
when
operating DataBase on a Local Area
(a text value).
current status returns a numeric value depending on which key the

user presses
when
entering data using the
DQL input command.
This value can then be used to control subsequent processing (see

input for an example).
The value
stored in the current status variable
Key Pressed
Action
ESC
EXIT
F2
F8
F7
SAVE
MODIFY
DELETE
is
shown below:
Value Returned
1
2
3
Volume
6-52

current (cont.)
Syntax:
Example:
current variable
for
CUSTOMERS
list
name
ACCOUNT BALANCE
with
> 500
records
LAST NAME in order

ACCOUNT BALANCE
current date
current page number
current user name
;
end
This query tells DataBase: 1) Select the CUSTOMERS records that have
an ACCOUNT BALANCE value greater than 500. 2) List the LAST NAME
and ACCOUNT balance values from each record that is processed. 3) List
the current date (today's date), the current page number, and the
current user name (the name of the user who generated the report).
The output from
this
query might looks as follows:
PAGE: 1
USER: GEORGE McGRAfH""DATE:l)l720/89
=====================================================
=================================================___
LAST NAME
ACCOUNT BALANCE
'^f^
Adams
generated by DataBase.
Cooper
Evans
Hill
'vers
6-53
$595.00
$725^00
$865.00
$525.00
$675.00
The double boundary
lines at
the top of this output are part
custom report format;
Volume
DQL LEXICON
data-entry
Keyword:
data-entry
Type:
Keyword
See Also: input, record

entry
Purpose: The data-entry keyword
identifies the Data-entry
form as the
source of the specified value.
Syntax:
data-entry
Usage:
FIELDNAME
Data-entry values are used in a query exactly like any other

value or expression.
form name
The keyword data-entry
is
used as the
to specify a value entered in a Data-entry form.
The keyword can only be used
if
a Data-entry
form has
already been defined for the procedure.

In Interactive
Mode,
DataBase offers
if
a Data-Entry
menu
of
all
form has been defined,
the fields defined
on the form
for use in the query.
Example:
for
CUSTOMERS
CUSTOMER
with
customer
= data-entry
modify records
all from data-entry
copy
address
end
:=
data-entry
new address
This query might be used to post address changes into the CUSTOMERS
form. It tells DataBase: 1) Find the CUSTOMERS record that has the
same customer # as the customer # specified on the Data-Entry form.

Modify the CUSTOMERS record by copying the value from the
NEW address field in the Data-entry form to the address field in the
2)
CUSTOMERS
is
form. After each record is modified, the Data-entry form

redisplayed so the operator can enter the next change of address.
Volume
6-54
date
Keyword:
date
Type:
Date Function
Sec Also: current, day, Julian,

month, spelldate, spellmonth,
spellweekday, year, yearday,
yearweek
Purpose: The date
function constructs a date value from three separate
numeric values.
Syntax:
date(MONTH, DAY, YEAR)
where
the
MONTH
is
the
number of
day of month (1-31), and
month
the
YEAR
(1-12),
the last
is
two
DAY
is
digits of
year.
Returns:
date value in the format specified on the System
Configuration form. For example,
American date format on

date value
Usage:
If
is
the
if you specify the North

System Configuration form, the
MMfDDfYY.
returned in the order
any input value
invalid (e.g.,
is
DataBase calculates
month >
a future date, for
becomes 07/15/89. Decimal values
12 or day
>
31),
example, 6,45,89
are automatically
truncated.
Examplel: date(7,1,89)
Returns
Example
2:
07/01/89
FIRSTDAY := date(month(TODAY), 1, year(TODAY))

LASTDAY := date((month(TODAY)+1) 1,
year(TODAY))
This portion of a query uses a variable named

current date) and
TODAY
first
and
The
result, if the current date is July 4th, 1989.
last
07/01/89;
NOTE:
(which holds the
two other date functions, month and year,
to find the
days of the current month.
LASTDAY
= 07/31/89. This
routine
is:
is
FIRSTDAY =
accurate for any date.
If your
system is configured for the International

date format, the date value is returned in the order
DD/MM/YY. If your system is configured for the
Metric date format the date value is returned in the order
YYIMMIDD. Regardless of how your system is configured,
the three numerical values this function requires are always
input in the order MONTH. DAY. YEAR.
.
6-55
Volume
DQL LEXICON
day
Keyword: day
Type:
See Also: current, date,

Julian, month, spelldate,
Date Function
spellmonth, spellweekday,
Purpose: The day
function extracts the day of the
month
(1- 31)
from a
year, yearday,
yearweek
date value.
Syntax:
day(DATE VALUE)
Returns:
An
integer value between
and 31. The date format selected
System Administration changes the date sequence but does

not effect which value is returned by a Date function.
in
Examples: day( 12/31/89)

Returns: 31 (North American format)
day(31/12/89)
Returns: 31 (European format)
day(89/12/31)
Returns: 31 (Metric format)
NOTE:
In
Form
Definition,
you can use the derivation formula
day! lookup current date) to stamp each record with the
date of the month. For more information, sec Volume
Chapter
Volume
2.
Form
2.
Definition.
6-56

db status
Keyword: db
status (database status)
See Also: backup db, restore
db
Type:
Control
Purpose: The db
Command
status
command
generates a report that displays the
status of the current database.
When
processing reaches a
db
status
command, DataBase
automatically locks the current database.
It
then displays a
prompt asking you to specify which of the following items

you want to include in the report: forms, procedures, or
imports.
Depending on your reply,

more of the following:
the status report includes
The number of system and user defined forms
The name of each form.
The
The number of existing records
The number of deleted records
The name of each procedure.
The
The name of each import
The
one or
The db status command

Database Status (Option
in the database.
J on
Database Maintenance
menu. For more information,
see Vohmie 1 Chapter 4.
Database Maintenance.
I
the
DOS
filename and filesize of each form.
in
each form.
each form.
DOS filename and filesize of each procedure.
DOS
specification in the selected directory.
filename and filesize of each import specification.
->
6-57
in
Volume
DQL LEXICON
db status
Syntax:
(cont.)
db status
To
Usage:
print the
db
status information, press the
SH-F9 PRINT
key.
On
LAN:
LAN
if
DataBase displays
message
the
is
is
currently
Resource Conflict message. While
this
displayed. DataEase automatically tries to execute
command
at brief intervals.
procedure during
When
another user
db status command.
using any resource required by the
this lime,
you want
If
to abort the
you must reboot the computer.
becomes
available.
DataEase
Volume 2. Chapter 4. System Administrarion.

more information on resource conflicts and Multi-User
procedure. See
for
Locking Options.
Example:

run report "PRINT INVOICES"
db status
.
This query tells DataEase: 1) Display the CUSTOMERS form so the

entering records, run the previously defined report named PRINT
INVOICES. 3) After running the PRINT INVOICES report, display the
requested status information for the current database.
Volume
6-58

define
Keyword:
define
Type:
Procedural
See Also: assign, global, temp
Command
Purpose: The define command

variable.
variable
is
is
used to create a global or temporary
used to store a value such as a text
string or a calculated result that can
processing of a procedure.
By
change during the
specifying the variable's name,
the stored value can be used like any other value in a query.

temp).
temporary variable can only maintain a value
during the current procedure.
value from one procedure to another.
one procedure
to another, a variable
To
its
pass a value from
must be defined
identically in each procedure.
Syntax:
Usage:
define global
temp "VARIABLE NAME" TYPE [LENGTH]
The define command
is
followed by:
The status of the variable (global or temporary).

The name of the variable (enclosed in quotation marks).
-The type of the variable (any field type except Choice.
Dollar, or Yes/No).
-The
length of the variable (optional, see below).
A period.
pjeriod
The define command
requires a concluding
not a semicolon.
The length specifies the number of characters for Text and

Numeric String variables. The default length is 25; you can
specify any length up to 255 characters.
are always 14 digits long.
NOTE:
characters long.
The
specify a length
in the
variables
default length
define
is
used
if
are 8
you do not
command.
You can define a variable as any field type except Choice.

Dollar, or YesINo fields.
6-59
Number
Date and Time variables
Volume
DQL LEXICON
define (cont.)
Example:
define
for
INVOICES
witti
order total > 500

:= INVOICES order total
;

0. 15
modify records
.
ORDER total
:=
ORDER TOTAL
temp DISCOUNT
end
This query
tells
DISCOUNT to
all
the

the current query. 2) Find
records that have a value greater than 500 in the order
DataEase:
store a
INVOICES
1)
number while processing
field. 3) Give (assign) the DISCOUNT variable a value determined

by multiplying the ORDER TOTAL on each invoice by 15'7f
4) Modify these INVOICES records by subtracting the value of the
DISCOUNT variable from the value in the ORDER total field.
TOTAL
Volume
6-60

delete records
Keyword:
delete records
See Also:
lisl
records, modify
records
Type:
Processing
Purpose: The
Command
delete records
command
deletes records in the specified
form.
Syntax:
delete records
in
FORMNAME RELATIONSHIP
|
RELATIONSHIP NAME"]
When you
Usage:
is
Example
delete records in the Primary form, the
omitted and no punctuation
command
[named "UNIQUE
[with (selection criteria)]
Example
(see
is
keyword
in
used after the delete records
1).
CUSTOMERS
1: for
INVOICES date
with (highest of
delete records
01/01/80)
end
This query deletes records
most recent invoice

January
1st,
When you
in the
Primary form
(in the related
INVOICES
(CUSTOMERS) whose
form)
is
dated prior to
1980.
form other than the Primary form, the

precedes the form name, and the command ends with a
semicolon (or a period if it is the last in a series of actions
keyword
see
delete records in a
in
Example
Example
2).
2: for
CUSTOMERS
The delete records comnumd

does not permanenetly delete
records until the specified
form
form
reorganized. Until the

reorganized, deleted
records can he retrieved hy
pressing CTRL-FJ to access
is
is
them hy record niimher. and

then re-activating them iisinq
F8 MODIFY. Deleted records
cannot he retrieved once the
form
is reorganized. If
records cne frequently added
and deleted, reorganizing the
form will increase efficiency.
delete records in INVOICES named "OUTDATED"

with (CUSTOMER # = CUSTOMERS CUSTOMER #
and INVOICES date < 01/01/80)

end
This query deletes records in the related (INVOICES) form that are dated
prior to January 1st, 1980. The named operator is used to assign a unique
relationship name to the group of outdated records in the related form.
Note
that
when you
relationship,
you
you must again
named operator to create an ad-hoc

any predefined relationship. Because of this,
DataEase how the CUSTOMERS and INVOICES
use the
forfeit
tell
including the phrase (customer # = CUSTOMERS

ad-hoc criteria, you are telling DataEase that the
INVOICES records you want to delete must have the same customer #
as the CUSTOMERS record that is currently being processed anJ a date
before January 1st, 1980.
forms are
related.
CUSTOMER
6-61
By
#) in the
Volume
DQL LEXICON
do
See Also: while
Keyword: do
Keyword
Type:
Purpose: The do keyword
is
component of
the while
command
syntax.
When
If the specified
condition
is
true.
The keyword do
command, DataEase
processing reaches a while
keyword while.
evaluates the condition that follows the
DataEase executes
all
the
keyword do until it reaches the

corresponding end command. DataEase then reevalutes
actions that follow the
original condition.
If the
condition
executes the do action series again.

processing passes to the
command
Syntax:
while
first
is still true.
If the
is

the specified while condition
in High Level Interactive
Mode.
the
DataEase
condition
h false.
end
for the while statement.
CONDITION do
ACTION
ACTION 2
1
ACTION N
end
Example:
define
assign
temp "serial" Number

temp serial :=
.
temp serial < 1000 do

temp serial := temp serial +
while
list
records
jointextC'SYSTEM DISK", temp serial)

end
This query
SERIAL.
tells
2)
DataEase:
1)
Give (assign) an

initial
3) Print a series of labels joining the

that
is
labels,
5)
the current value of the
value of
words
SERIAL
to the
SERIAL
SYSTEM DISK
variable. 4)
variable.
to the
While printing
number
the
increment the variable by one each time a new label is printed.

the value of the variable exceeds 999, stop printing labels.
When
The while command
tells DataEase to reevaluate the value of the variable

each time it prints a label. As long as that value is less than 1000,
DataEase prints another label. When the value of the variable exceeds
999, DataEase stops performing the action following the do keyword.
Volume
6-62

else
Keyword:
else
Type:
Procedural
Purpose: The
See Also:
else
The
if
if
Command
Command
keyword
command
is
component of
command
syntax.
executes one of two different actions (or
series of actions) based
When
true or false.
the if
on whether the specified condition
processing reaches an
if
DataBase evaluates the condition
that follows the
If the specified
DataBase executes
condition
actions which follow the
is
true.
keyword then
reaches the corresponding end or else

specified condition
\s
false.
until
is
command,
keyword
all
if
the
processing
command.
DataBase executes
all
If the
the actions
keyword else until processing reaches the

corresponding end command. If there is no else. DataBase
jumps directly to the statement following the end command.
that follow the
Syntax:
if
CONDITION
then
[ACTION
ACTION
ACTION N]
[else
ACTION
ACTION
ACTION
N.
end
Example:
for
CUSTOMERS
highest of INVOICES date < 01/01/80 then

delete records
else
delete records in INVOICES with (date < 01/01/80)
if
end
end
This query
tells
DataBase:
most recently dated record
1)
For each
CUSTOMBRS
in the related
INVOICBS
record, find the
form.
2) If the
most
dated before January 1st. 1980, delete the CUSTOMERS

record. 3) If a customer's most recent invoice is dated on or after January
1st. 1980, delete all of that customer's INVOICBS records dated prior to
1980. Note that the first end marks the end of the if cotnmand that selects
recent invoice
is
which records
to delete.
command
6-63
The second end marks
that selects the records
from
the
end of the for
the Primary form.
Volume
DQL LEXICON
end
See Also: break, case,
if, and while
Keyword: end
exit,
for,
Type:
Procedural
Command
Purpose: The end command marks
end of the span of control of
the
other processing and/or procedural
Syntax:
ACTION
ACTION
ACTION
N.
commands.
end
An end command
Usage:
is
required following the last specified
action invoked by a for, case,
When
multiple procedural
the proper positioning of
processing.
procedural
if,
commands
in the
Example
for
(see
query.
Example
CUSTOMERS
records
LAST NAME
is
critical to correct
refers to the
most recent
Each procedural command
controls processing of the query until
end command
command.
are used in a query,
end commands
Each end command
command
or while
it
reaches
its
matching
2).
list
ACCOUNT BALANCE
end
This query tells DataEase: Process all the CUSTOMERS records and list
each customer's LAST NAME and ACCOUNT BALANCE in the report output.
Volume
6-64

end
(cont.)
Example
2: for
CUSTOMERS

delete records
else
if
end
if
highest of INVOICES date > = 01/01/89 then

list records
LAST NAME in Order
.
end
end
This query
tells
DataBase: 1) For each
INVOICES
record, find the
form. 2)
If the
most
dated before January 1st. 1980, delete the CUSTOMERS

a customer's most recent invoice is dated on or after January
recent invoice
record. 3) If
CUSTOMERS
in the related
is
of that customer's INVOICES records dated prior to

customers with invoices dated on or after January 1st
1989, list the customers in order by LAST NAME and show the date of each
customer's most recent invoice.
1st,
1980. delete
1980. 4) For
all
all
Notice that for each
end command. The

selects
if
which records
command
The
if
third
command
first
to
that selects
end marks
the
in the
query, there
is
a corresponding
end marks the end of the if command that

delete. The second end marks the end of the
which records to include
end of the for command
that .selects the records
from the Primary form.
NOTE:
6-65
Although DataBase does not require an end command

in Low Level queries, most High Level queries do. Since
most users eventually convert Low Level queries into High
Level, we recommend that you make a habit of using an end
command at the end of a query to ensure that the synta.x
requirements for High Level are satisfied.
Volume
DQL LEXICON
enter a record
Keyword:
See Also: copy
enter a record
all from,
data-entry, input, record entry
Type:
Processing
Command
Purpose: The enter a record command adds
a record to the specified
form.
Syntax:
enter a record
in
FORMNAME
The enter a record command must
Usage:
specify a target form and
you
the field values to be input into the form. Alternatively,
can specify another form to copy
copy
from command
all
entered
in the
(see
field data
Example
2,
from using the
below).
form, automatic error checking
is
As data
is
performed,
including checks for uniqueness, required fields, range checks,
Any
etc.
Example
1: for
errors are logged to an exception
CUSTOMERS
with
enter a record
in
file.
CATALOG CUSTOMERS
:= CUSTOMERS FIRST NAME

NAME
NAME 2 ;= CUSTOMERS last name;
HOME ADDRESS := CUSTOMERS address
HOME CITY ;= CUSTOMERS city
HOME STATE := CUSTOMERS STATE
ZIP code := CUSTOMERS zip
end
1
This query
have an
tells
DataBase:
1) Select all the
ACCOUNT balance
CUSTOMERS
CUSTOMERS
CUSTOMERS
CUSTOMERS
CUSTOMERS
greater than $500.
records that
2) For each
record selected, enter a record in the
CATALOG
form, by copying the information from each field in the
form
to the assigned field in the
CATALOG
form.
simply copies information from the CUSTOMERS form into

If you rename the fields so both forms are identical, the
same result can be accomplished with the simpler query shown in
Example
the target form.
Example
2.
Example
2: for
CUSTOMERS
with
enter a record
in
copy
end
Volume
all
from
CATALOG CUSTOMERS
CUSTOMERS
6-66

exit
See Also: break, end
Keyword:
exit
Type:
Procedural
Purpose: The
Syntax:
Command
exit
command
exit
command can
is
used
to
immediately terminate a query.
exit
Usage:
The
is
be used anywhere
returns control to the calling
Example:
in a
query.
When
it
executed, the query immediately stops processing and
for
menu
or procedure.
CUSTOMERS
records
list
ACCOUNT BALANCE in reverse

LAST NAME
current item number > 5 then
;
if
exit
end
end
This query
DataBase: List the five customers with the highest
tells
ACCOUNT BALANCE
the query.
Note
values.
that
When
the fifth record
two end commands
syntax requirements even though the exit
The output from
BALANCE
field,
LAST NAME
this
processed, terminate
is
are required to fulfill the
command
query, arranged in descending order on the
DQL
terminates processing.
ACCOUNT
DQL LEXICON

firstc
Keyword:
See Also firstlast,firstw,
firstc
jointext, lastc, lastfirst, lastw,
Type:
Purpose: The
(n)
Syntax:
length, lower, midc, midw,

proper, lextpos, upper
Text Function
firstc function extracts a specified
from the beginning
firstc(TEXT
VALUE,
(left)
Usage:
Leading blanks are included
Examples:
characters
n)
Returns:
text string
number of
of a text value.
n characters in length.
in the
firstcC'DataEase International,
Returns; DataEase
count of characters
(n).
Inc.", 8)
firstcC'New User", 4)
Returns: New
firStC(LAST NAME, 4)
Returns: The first four characters in the last name
field for every record that is processed. If a record
contains the value Holmes in the last name field,
the function returns Holm.
6-69
Volume
DQL LEXICON
firstlast
Keyword:
See Also, firstcflrstw,
firstlast
Type:

proper, textpos, upper
Text Function
Purpose: The
firstlast function converts a text value
Last Name. First
Name
Last Name. The [M.]
Syntax:
firstlast(TEXT
Returns:
Usage:
This function
from
[M.] to the format: First
is
an optional middle
the format:
Name [MJ
initial (or
name).
VALUE)
text value.
is used when names are stored in a single field.

The contents of the field are rearranged so the first word (i.e.,
the last name) becomes the last word in the returned string. If
the name is followed by a comma, the comma is deleted.
Examples:
firstlast("Anthony,
Returns:
Susan
B.
Susan
B.")
Anthony
firstlastC'Eliot, T.S.")
Returns: T.S. Eliot

firstlast(FULL name)
Returns: The value in the full name field in the format

shown above for every record that is processed.
a
If
record contains the value Holmes, Sherlock in the

last name field, the function returns Sherlock Holmes.
Volume
6-70

firstw
Keyword:
Sec Also: firstcfirstlast,
firstw
Type:
Purpose: The
from
Syntax:

Text Function
firstw function extracts a specified
number of words
the beginning (left) of a text value.
firstw(TEXT
VALUE,
n)
Returns:
Usage:
firstw( FIELDNAME, n) returns the first
text value
n words
in length.
n words
including intervening punctuation symbols.
in the field,
Leading spaces
are treated as delimiters. Trailing spaces are ignored.

are n or fewer
words
in the field,
If there
firstw returns the original
text value.
Examples: firstw("DataEase International, Inc.",

Returns: DataBase International,
firstw("New User",
Returns:
2)
1)
New
firstW(BOOK TITLE, 2)
Returns the first two words in the book title field for
every record that is processed. If a record contains
the value The Hound of the Baskervilles in the book
title
6-71
field,
the function returns
The Hound.
Volume

for
Keyword:
for
Type:
Processing
Purpose: The
See Also: end, with
for
Command
command
specifies the
form from which records are
selected for processing and the criteria used to select them.
Usage:
The for command
is
always the
first
word
in a
Low
Level
//;
query.
A Low
Level query can have only one for
specifies the query's Primary
command which
form (see Example
1).
High Level query can have multiple for commands

from different forms (see Example 2).
High Level query, for commands can be nested
program actions (see Example 3).
automatically inserted at the

start of the queiy. To start a
High Level query with any
other command, press Home
(to
to
move
position).
select records
In a
Low Level Interactive

the for command is
Mode,
to alte
and Fl
Mode.
the cursor to the start
F9 (High
Level),
to return to Interactive
the sequence of
When used to specify a query's Primary form, the for

command requires a concluding semicolon. Otherwise,
for command does nor require a semicolon.
The
for
command
is
always terminated by an end command.
All the actions specified between a for
corresponding end
the
command
command and
its
are executed once for each
record selected hy the for command.
Syntax:
Note:

RELATIONSHIP NAME"] [with (selection criteria)] [;]
for
The for command is the most frequently used word in the

DataBase Quety Language. Most Processing procedures
begin with this command.
-^
6-73
Volume
DQL LEXICON
for (cont.)
Example
Low
Level Query
Using for
for
Command
CUSTOMERS
to
with
records
LAST NAME in order
Access the Primary Form
list
ACCOUNT BALANCE
end
This query tells DataBase: 1) Select the CUSTOMERS records that have a
value greater than $500 in the ACCOUNT BALANCE field. 2) For each
selected record, list the customer's LAST name and ACCOUNT balance.
The output from

might look
LAST NAME
Adams
this
query, arranged
in
alphabetical order by
like this:
ACCOUNT BALANCE
LAST NAME.

for (cont.)
Example 2 tells DataBase: 1) Select the CUSTOMERS

records that have a value greater than S500 in the account balance
Th,e.quer>' for
field.
2) For each selected record,
3) Select
list
the
all
the
invoice
INVOICES
#
list
records.
the customer's
4) For each
last name.
INVOICES
record,
and the order total.
Since its impossible to properly align information that is processed and

printed in sequence from two different forms, this query produces output
that is very difficult to read as shown below.
LAST NAME
INVOICE #
DQL LEXICON
for (cont.)
Example
3:
High Level Query

With Nested for Commands
for
CUSTOMERS
for
with
INVOICES
list
records
CUSTOMERS
invoice #
in
LAST NAME
order
ORDER TOTAL
in
groups
end
end
In this query, the second for
command, which
is
nested within the
selects all the related records in the
INVOICES form
actions between the second for and
its
end
for
first,
and performs
all
the
each related record.
This query tells DataBase: 1) Select the CUSTOMERS records that have
a value greater than S500 in the ACCOUNT balance field. 2) Find all the
related INVOICES records for each CUSTOMERS record selected in
Step 1. 3) For each selected CUSTOMERS record, list the customer's
LAST NAME 4) For each selected INVOICES record, list the INVOICE #
.
and the ORDER TOTAL.
The output from
this query,
LAST NAME
arranged
in
LAST NAME,

Functions
List of
Keyword: Functions
Type:
Concept
Purpose: The 58 DataBase
functions execute calculations, manipulate
and perform other time-saving data-entry operations.

There are nine groups of functions listed to the right side of
text,
this
The
if
page and briefly summarized below.
function returns one of two values based on
its
evaluation of a
specified condition as true or false.
Date functions convert a date
number representing
into a
the day,
month, year, day of the week, or day of the year on which the
specified date falls.
Spell functions convert a date or numerical value into
its
equivalent
text value.
Time
functions extract the hour, minutes, or seconds from a 24-hour

format time value or assign the appropriate
or PM suffix.
AM
Text functions are used
to concatenate, truncate, or manipulate a text
value.
Financial functions calculate either the beginning value, end value,

interest rate, installment amount, or number of payment periods for a
financial transaction, given the values of the other four variables.
ScientiHc functions raise a base value to a power, derive natural and

base 10 logs, or derive the square root of a value.
Trigonometric functions convert

expressed
Math
numeric value into a value
in radians.
functions perform
common
mathematical rounding operations
or return the absolute value of a specified numeric value.
random
function generates a pseudo
The
random number.
For a full explanation of any of the DQL functions, see the entry
under the function's name in this Lexicon.
6-77
listed
DQL
Functions
DQL LEXICON
futurevalue
See Also: installment, rate,
Keyword:
futurevalue
Type:
Financial Function
periods, presentvalue
Purpose: The futurevalue
function calculates the final value of a
financial transaction given the presentvalue, installment
payment,
Syntax:
interest rate,
and number of payment periods.
futurevalue(presentvalue. installment, rate, periods)
Returns:
Usage:
If the
numeric value
(the final value after all
installment
investment
(e.g.,
payment increases
payments are made).
the value of the
an annuity), the installment must be
expressed as a positive amount.
If the
payment decreases
the value of the investment (e.g., loan amortization), the
installment must be expressed as a negative amount.
The
interest rate, installment
payments, and time periods must
be based on the same terms. For example,
if
payments are
made monthly on a five-year loan, the number of periods is

(12 * 5) or 60. The interest rate must be expressed in the
same terms
(the
monthly
interest rate
is
the annual rate
divided by 12). The interest rate must also be expressed as a
whole number
(10<7f is 10,
not 0.10).
Examplel: futurevalue(lOOOO, 100, 10
When
12. 120)
10
Returns: $47,554.91
that
This example calculates the futurevalue (accumulated balance) of a

monthly savings plan, if you start with S 10,000 and add $100 every month

DataBase requires
12,
you type a space before
and after
the
division
symbol.
for 12 years at an annual interest rate of \09c.
Example
2:
futurevalue(lOOOO, 1200, 10, 12)

Returns: $57,045.42
This example calculates the futurevalue (accumulated balance) of an

annual savings plan, if you start with SI 0.000 and add S12(X) every year
for 12 years at an annual interest rate of lO'^. Both examples assume that
installments are always paid at the start of each period.
NOTE: DataBase financial functions

shown below. (The double
power") cannot be used
in
futurevalue = principal
* ((]
(meaning "raise
to the
a query).
(installmentl(ratellOO)) * (({I
Volume
are derived from the formula
asterisks
+ (rate/JOO)) ** periods) +
+ (rate/JOO)) ** periods) -
I)
6-78
global
Keyword:
global
Type:
Keyword
See Also: assign, define, temp,

variable
Purpose: The keyword global
variable
is
specifies a global variable.
used to store a value such as a text string or a
calculated result that can change during the processing of a
procedure.
By
specifying the variable's name, the stored
value can be used like any other value
in a
query.

temp).
temporary
variable can only hold a value during the
current procedure.
Syntax:
Usage:
another.
To
variable
must be defined
global
When
its
pass a value from one procedure to another, a

variable name
processing a Control procedure that links two or more
Processing procedures, each global variable with the same
name and
type
is
considered the same variable and can pass
value from one procedure to another.
If a Control
procedure requires data retrieved from a relationship, the data
can be obtained in a Processing procedure and stored in a
its
global variable.
Example:
define global
income" Number
Number
"profit" Number
define global "expenses"

define global
"MONTHLY TOTALS"
run procedure
if
global
INCOME >
run procedure
global expenses then
"PAYROLL BONUS"
else
run procedure
"REGULAR PAYROLL"
end
>
6-79
Volume
DQL LEXICON
global (cont.)
This query
is
a Control procedure that tells DataBase: 1) Create (define)
three global variables called

three different
INCOME. EXPENSES,
numbers while processing
and
the query.
2)
PROFIT to
Run
store
the
MONTHLY TOTALS
procedure. This procedure (shown below)

income and expenses for the month and subtracts the
former to determine the amount of profit. As each of these
calculates the total

latter
totals
from
is
the
calculated,
it
is
assigned to the appropriately
named
global
INCOME variable is greater than the EXPENSES

PAYROLL BONUS procedure using the value stored
variable. 3) If the
variable, run the
in
PROFIT variable to calculate each employee's bonus (a percentage of

the profit based on the employee's salary level). 4) If the INCOME
the
variable
is
not greater than the
EXPENSES
variable, run the
REGULAR
PAYROLL procedure.
The
MONTHLY TOTALS
Example:
Processing procedure looks like
this:
define global "income" Number

define global "expenses" Number
define global "profit" Number
assign global income := sum of INVOICES order

TOTAL with (DATE between 09/01/89 to 09/30/89)
assign global expenses := sum of PURCHASE order
TOTAL with (DATE between 09/01/89 to 09/30/89)
assign global profit := global income
.
global
expenses
end
The key
feature of this
example
is
the fact that the global variables are
identically defined in the Processing procedure
which calculates the value
Control procedure which passes these values

from one Processing procedure to another.
of each variable and
Volume
in the
6-80

Grouping
Keyword: Grouping
Type:
See Also: in groups, in groups

with group totals, Sorting
Concept
Purpose: Grouping
lets
you process records with the same
field value
together.
Usage:
There are two

in
groups and
DQL
in
operators that control grouping:
groups with group-totals.
The
in groups operator causes records with identical field values to be

processed as a single group and the groups are automatically sorted in
ascending order. For example. Democratic Presidents are listed together
as a group followed by the Republican Presidents.
Example
1: for
PRESIDENTS
records
POLITICAL PARTY in groups
LAST NAME in order
FIRST NAME
list
end
The output
is
grouped on the political party
POLITICAL PARTY
DEMOCRATIC
LAST NAME
field
FIRST
(shown
NAME
in bold):
LEXICON
DQL
Grouping
The
in
(cont.)
groups with group-totals operator groups records and generates
statistical totals for
query.
each group
For example,
if
we add
if
any other
new
statistic is
line to the
requested by the
query
in
Example
1;
Grouping operators (in

groups and in groups with
group-totals) always precede
Sortint; operators (in
Example
2: for
PRESIDENTS
and
records
POLITICAL PARTY in groups with group-totals
LAST NAME in order
FIRST NAME
"A" = "A" count
list
end
In this
example, the
line:
"A" = "A"
count
DataBase to count every record that is processed. The count statistic

allows DataBase to also calculate the group total for each political party.
tells
The output includes
the
POLITICAL PARTY
DEMOCRATIC
group
level statistics
LAST NAME
(shown
FIRST
in bold):
NAME
order
in reverse) in the query.

highest of
Keyword:
Type:
highest of
appear as a
list
statistic in the
end of the
Syntax:
highest of
in a related
form.
The
result
can
summary
area at the end of each group or the
|
[named "UNIQUE
FIELDNAME
field.
If a
DataBase returns the highest ASCII

a Choice field is specified, DataBase returns the
field is specified,
value.
If
value in the highest numbered choice (not necessarily the

highest ASCII value).
statistical
operator
for
CUSTOMERS
max finds
records
LAST NAME in Order
the specified field
record selected, find
highest
this
in the set
of matching
query, arranged
in
highest offinds the highest

value among the records
related to the records being
processed.
the related records in the
(those that have a matching
ORDER TOTAL
The output from
all
all
This query tells DataBase: 1) Process all the CUSTOMBRS records and
list each customer's last name in alphabetical order.
2) For each
INVOICES form
among
end
CUSTOMBRS
of.
the highest value in
list
highest of
max and
the relational statistical
operator highest
Example:
of,
sum of
of,
report.
value of the same type as the specified
Text
any, count
item in the detail area of a report or as a
RELATIONSHIP NAME"]
Returns:
mean
of,
operator finds the highest value in a specified
matching records
field in all
all,
lowest
named
Purpose: The highest of
See Also:
customer
INVOICES
3) List the
#).
records.
LAST name.
LAST NAME
HIGHEST OF INVOICES ORDER TOTAL
Adams
$195.00
$225.00
$105.00
$125.00
$ 75.00
Cooper
Evans
Hill
Ivers
you also want to include the highest order total

invoices, change the fourth line of the query to read:
If
highest of
6-83
among
this
item
max
group of
Volume
DQL LEXICON
hours
Keyword: hours
See Also: ampm, current,
minutes, seconds, timeampm
Time Function
Type:
Purpose: The hours

expressed
Syntax:
function extracts the hour from a time value
in a
24-hour format.
hours(TIME VALUE)
Returns:
An
integer value from
00
to 23.
Examples: hours(1 2:00:00) (midday)

Returns: 12
hours(23:59:00) (one minute before midnight)

Returns: 23
NOTE: The
parenthesized text above
the time of day only:
it is
(e.g..
midday)
is
to clarifiy
not one of the function'
parameters.
Volume
6-84

if
Command
Command
Keyword:
if
Type:
Procedural
Command
See Also:
command
executes one of two different actions (or
series of actions)
based on whether the specified condition
Purpose: The
if
if Function
is
true or false.
When
processing reaches an
if
the condition that follows the
command. DataEase
keyword
evaluates
if.
The keyword then

If the
specified condition
is
true.
DataEase executes
all
the
keyword then until processing

corresponding end or else command.
actions which follow the
reaches the
condition
If the specified
the corresponding
Syntax:
if
CONDITION
(ACTION
\%
false.
keyword
DataEase executes
all
is

the specified if condition in
High Level Interactive Mode.
the
else until processing reaches
end command.
then
1
ACTION
ACTION
N.l
[else
ACTION
ACTION
ACTION
N.
end
Example
for
CUSTOMERS

delete records
else
if
end
end
6-85
>
Volume
DQL LEXICON
if
Command
This query
tells
(cont.)
DataBase:
recent invoice
1980, delete
all
INVOICES
in the related
dated before January
3) If a customer's
record.
1st,
is
CUSTOMERS
For each
1)
1st,
1980, delete the
most recent invoice
of that customer's
record, find the
form. 2)
is
If the
most
CUSTOMERS
dated on or after January
INVOICES
records dated prior to
1980.
The
end marks the end of the if command that selects

The second end marks the end of the for command
first
delete.
the records to
that selects the
records from the Primary form.
Usage:
query
may
contain multiple
within one another (see
if
Example
commands
2).
nested (indented)
These additional
commands can appear after either then

nested if command is only processed if
if
or else; however, a
the previous condition
is true.
When
if
commands
the last preceding
are nested, the first
if
and each
if
end corresponds to
be matched
command must
command. This rule applies to all

commands (including case, for. if, and
while). See nested actions and the for command entry for
more information on nesting one command inside another.
with a corresponding end
nested Procedural
Example
2: for
INVOICES
if
INVOICES ORDER TOTAL > 500

STATUS
if
:=
in
DATE between 01/01/89

enter a record
copy
end
end
all
then
CUSTOMERS
PREFERRED
modify records
from
in
to current
date then
CATALOG CUSTOMERS
CUSTOMERS
end
This query tells DataEase to divide the INVOICES records into two
groups and process them as follows: 1) The records with an ORDER
TOTAL greater than $500 are modified by changing the value in the
STATUS field to PREFERRED. 2) The records with an ORDER total
greater than 500 and a date between the start of 1989 and today's date
are modified and also copied into the
In this example, the second if
records selected by the
first if
CATALOG CUSTOMERS
form.
command, which selects a subgroup of

command, is nested within the first if
the
command.
Volume
6-86

if
Function
Keyword:
if
Type:
Conditional Function
Function
See Also: break, case, for,
else, end, exit, if
Purpose: The
whether the specified condition

have multiple
Syntax:
Returns:
if(CONDITION,
The
is
true or false.
query
may
TRUE VALUE, FALSE VALUE)
the specified condition
if
functions nested within one another.
true value if the specified condition
value
Usage:
if
Command,
nested actions, while, then
function returns one of two specified values based on
if
is
true. JYit false
is false.
Generally, you can specify any type of value you want for the
true value
and
false value parameters.
however. DataBase requires
same type
In certain cases.
that these values
must be
the
as the value returned by the specified condition.
For example:
if(ampm(current time) = "AM"
"in
the morning", "in the
afternoon")
is
acceptable because both the value used
("AM"
or
"PM") and
morning" or
in the
condition
the final value returned ("in the
"in the afternoon
')
are text expressions.
Conversely,
if(12 < hours(current time), "in the morning", "in the
afternoon")
might be prohibited because the value used

a numeric value and the final value
return
If
is
in the
condition
we want DataBase
is
to
a text value.
you have trouble saving
a query that contains an if
function, try changing the type of the true and false values.
6-87
>
Volume
DQL LEXICON
if
Function (cont.)
Example:
for
CUSTOMERS
list
records
LAST NAME in order

ACCOUNT BALANCE
if(ACCOUNT BALANCE > 500, "YES", "NO")
end
This query
the
tells
DataBase: For each record
LAST NAME and
BALANCE
the
in the
account balance.
field is greater than
value in the
$500, display the value
ACCOUNT BALANCE
NO. The output from
output. If the value in the
CUSTOMERS
If the
field
is
YES
form,
in the report
not greater than
this query, arranged

$500, display the value
alphabetical order by LAST NAME, might look as follows:
LAST
list
ACCOUNT
in

import
i
Keyword: import
See Also: install application
Type:
Control
Command
Purpose: The import command imports

database.
It
can be used
a data file into the current
import data
to
at
any point during a
Conffol procedure. After executing the import, the data can be
used
Syntax:
in the
import
same Control procedure.
"IMPORT SPECIFICATION FILENAME"
The import command can only be used
Usage:
to
execute a
The import command
previously defined Import Specification. The filename that
follows the import
command
is
the filename of the Import
name must be eight or fewer characters

Volume 2. Chapter 5,
for information on how an Import
This
Specification.
with no intervening spaces. See
Database
Utilities
Specification
LAN:
On
LAN
is
defined.
if
another user
the
is
currently
this
command
you want
time, you must reboot
at brief intervals.
procedure during
When
command.

is
Run
Defined Import (Option 2) on

the Data Import menu. For a
complete e.xplanation of the
Import procedure see Volume
2. Chapter 5. Database
Utilities.
using any resource required by the import
message
fiinctions like selecting
this
If
becomes
to abort the
the computer.
available,
DataEase

procedure. See
Volume
2,
Chapter

Locking Options.
for
Example:
This query
2)
When
6-89
import "MAILLIST"
run procedure "PRINT
4,
System Administration.
conflicts
and Multi-User
tells
the
LETTERS"
1) Execute the MAILLIST Import Specification.

completed, run the PRINT LETTERS procedure.
DataEase:
impon
is
Volume
DQL LEXICON
in
Keyword:
in
Type:
Keyword
Purpose: The
DataBase
in operator tells
query's Primary form
to use a
when executing
form other than the
list
See Also: delete records,

enter a record, list records,
modify records
records, delete
records, modify records, or enter a record
command.

RELATIONSHIP NAME"] [with (selection critena)]
Syntax:
in
When
Usage:
the in operator
used without selection
is
DataBase performs the action on

specified form.
all related
you do not specify a
If
criteria,
records
in the
FORMNAME,
DataBase automatically performs the action on the Primary

form. The in operator should not be used
the query's Primary
Example
1: for
form (see Example
CUSTOMERS
conjunction with
modify records
ORDER TOTAL
in
3).
;=
INVOICES
ORDER TOTAL
in
DISCOUNT
end
This query discounts every related INVOICES record each time a
CUSTOMERS record is processed. Since every invoice is related to
only one customer, each record is discounted only once.
Example
2: for
INVOICES
modify records
ORDER TOTAL
:=
INVOICES
ORDER TOTAL
in
DISCOUNT
end
This example demonstrates an INCORRECT use of the in operator.
This query discounts every INVOICES record each time a record is
processed (each invoice is discounted as many times as there are
records to process).
Example
3: for
INVOICES
modify records
ORDER TOTAL
:=
ORDER TOTAL
DISCOUNT
end
This query
The
in
CORRECTLY
keyword
delete records
is
modifies records in the Primary form.

omitted from a list records, modify records, or
command when
the action
is
performed on the Primary
form.
Volume
6-90

in
groups
Keyword:
in
Type:
Grouping Operator
groups
Purpose: The
See Also: in groups with

group-totals, in order, in
reverse
groups operator tells DataBase to process all the

same value in the specified field together
and display the report output in a grouped format (e.g.. all the
customers from Connecticut, then all those from New Jersey,
in
records with the
then
those from
all
displayed once
New
at the
York.
etc.).
The group
beginning of the group.
identifier is
If statistics are
specified for any output fields, group subtotals are calculated
but the subtotals are not included in default report output
unless you use the operator in
Syntax:
Usage:
FIELDNAME
HI
groups
in
In a query, an item to
hefore
all
order.
groups with group-totals.
be processed in groups should be
listed
other output items including items to be sorted in
When
a field
sorted in groups, the groups are
is
automatically sorted in order

listed before
(all
Alabama customers
are
any Alaska customers).
Grouping operators cannot be used

relational operator
you cannot use
(i.e.. if
in
INVOICES
conjunction with the

is
the query statement: all
all
the Primary form,
CUSTOMERS
state
in groups).
Example:
CUSTOMERS
for
list
records
STATE in groups
LAST name in order
end
;
This query
the
DataEase:
tells
same value
in the
1)
state
Process
all
the
CUSTOMERS
field together as a group.
records with
2) Display the
group identifier (STATE) once at the beginning of each group. 3) Within

each group, arrange the customers in alphabetical order by last name.
The output from
this
STATE
query might look as follows:
LAST NAME
NJ
Adams
NY
Cooper
Evans
Hill
6-91
The in groups operator can

only he used on list items
/()//( ni//(t,' the list records
command. It cannot he used
\\iih the enter a record,
modify records, or delete
records commands.
vers
Volume
DQL LEXICON
in
Keyword:
in
Type:
Grouping Operator
Purpose: The
in
groups with group-totals operator groups records and
generates statistical totals for each group

is
Syntax:
Usage:
if
any other
statistic
requested by the query.
FIELDNAME
The group
in
identifier
of the group.
only displayed once
is
If statistics
at the
beginning
are specified for any output fields,
group subtotals are calculated and the subtotals are

in the default report output.
Grouping operators cannot be used

relational operator
you cannot use

in
Example:
(i.e., if
in
INVOICES
conjunction with the

is
the
CUSTOMERS
the query statement: all
all
Primary form,
STATE
groups with group-totals).

for
CUSTOMERS
list
records

LAST NAME in order
ACCOUNT BALANCE item sum
end
This query tells DataBase: 1) Process all the CUSTOMERS records with
the same value in the STATE field together as a group. 2) Display the
each group, arrange the customers in alphabetical order by LAST NAME.
4) List each customer's ACCOUNT balance, the subtotal for each STATE
group, and the sum of all the account balance amounts combined.
The output from this query might look as follows:
STATE
NJ
LAST NAME
ACCOUNT BALANCE

in
order
Keyword:
in
Type:
Sorting Operator
order
Purpose: The
in
order operator
DataEase
tells
to process records
and
display the report output in sequence from lowest to highest
value in the specified field, (e.g. 0101
01013.
Syntax:
FIELDNAME
Usage:
The
in
1.
before 01012, before
etc.).
order
in
order operator can be used on any type of
Number
Time. Date, or
field is
ordered from lowest to
highest value.
sorted in alphabetical order.
Text
tleld
is
Choice
field
is
field.
sorted by
Choice number.
Sorting operators cannot be used in conjunction with the

relational operator (e.g..
you cannot use

all
Example:
INVOICES
is
all
the Primary form,
the statement:
CUSTOMERS
for
if
INVOICES
LAST NAME
in order
records
list
STATE
ZIP
in
in
groups
order
LAST NAME
in
order
end
This query
tells
DataEase:
1)
Process
all
the
CUSTOMERS
records with
same value in the ST.ATE field together as a group. 2) Display the

group identifier state once at the beginning of each group. 3) Within
the
each group, arrange the customers in lowest to highest zip code order.
4) Within each zip code, arrange the customers in alphabetical order by
last name.
The output from
STATE
NJ
this
query might look as follows
ZIP
CODE
LAST NAME
DQL LEXICON
in
reverse
Keyword:
in
Type:
Sorting Operator
reverse
Purpose: The
in
reverse operator
tells
DataBase
to process records
and
display the report output in reverse sequence from highest to
lowest value
in the specified field, (e.g.,
before 01011,
Syntax:
Usage:
FIELDNAME
The
01013 before 01012,
etc.).
in
reverse
can be used on any type of
in reverse operator
field.
Time, Date, or Number field is ordered from highest

A Choice field is ordered from highest to
to
lowest value.
lowest Choice number.
Text
field
is
sorted in reverse
alphabetical order.
Sorting operators cannot be used in conjunction with the

relational operator (e.g.,
you cannot use

all
Example:
LAST NAME
CUSTOMERS
list
INVOICES
is
the
all
Primary form,
the statement:
CUSTOMERS
for
if
in reverse
records
STATE
in
groups
ZIP in reverse
LAST NAME
in
order
end
This query tells DataEase: 1) Process all the CUSTOMERS records with
the same value in the STATE field together as a group. 2) Display the
group identifier state once at the beginning of each group. 3) Within
each group, arrange the customers in highest to lowest ZIP code order.
4) Within each zip code, arrange the customers in alphabetical order by
LAST NAME.. The output from this query might look as follows:
STATE

input
Keyword:
input
Type:
Processing
See Also: data-entry, record

entry, current status
Command
Purpose: The input command provides

but allows
DQL
into the database.
Syntax:
input using
In the
all
the facilities of record entry
to process records before they are entered

It
can be used
FORMNAME
into
any point
at
in a
procedure.
"TEMPFORM"
In Interactive
syntax, FORMNAME is the name of

TEMPFORM is the name DataEase uses
command
input
the database form.
Mode. DataEase
automatically inserts the word

using after input and the word
into after the name of the
record entry form.
an input record. You can assign any name you

want for this purpose except the name of another form in the
same database. Thefirsr time that the TEMPFORM name is
specified in the query, it must be enclosed in quotation marks.
to reference
number of input commands you can

however, each database form must be
assigned a unique TEMPFORM in the input statement.
There
is
no
limit to the
use in a query;
Usage:
The input command

record entry form.
tells
When
DataEase
to display a specified
the specified
form
displayed, you
is
can either enter or modify a record (in Form View), or scroll

through the form (in Form or Table View) and select any
existing record. You can also use the FIO MULTI key to
view records
in related
forms.
When you press a processing key (ESC, F2 SAVE,

F7 DELETE, or F8 MODIFY), the input record is copied
memory and
is
number
that
Current Status Values

into
corresponds to the processing key

DataEase then
stored in the current status variable.
resumes processing the procedure, using the input record data

The current
just like values entered in a data-entry form.
status value can be used to control subsequent processing.
The input command can only hold one record

under a given
TEMPFORM
name
at
a time.
in
If
memory
you want
to
command, set
variable. To enter an
process more than one record using the input
up a loop using the the current status

input record into the database, you must use the enter a
record command in the query (see Example 2).
in memory, the form

must be displayed in Form View when a processing key is
pressed. Table View is used for selection purposes only.
Since input can only hold one record
>
Key Pressed
LEXICON
DQL
input (cont.)
Example
1: input
for
using
CUSTOMERS
into
"TEMPCUST"
INVOICES
(CUSTOMER* =
with
TEMPCUST customer
#)
records
INVOICE #
list
ORDER TOTAL
DATE
end
This quer>'
tells
all
the
in the
CUSTOMERS form. 2) When

CUSTOMERS record and presses F2. store that
the name TEMPCUST to reference
3) Find
DataEase: 1) Display the
the user selects a specific
record in
memory
(using
INVOICES
TEMPCUST
it).
records with the same
# as the
record. 4) For each related invoice,
and the ORDER TOTAL. The output from
INVOICE* ORDER TOTAL

A1 17095
CUSTOMER
this
DATE
list
CUSTOMER
the
invoice #

input (cont.)
When van press a process ini;

key (ESC. F2. F7. or FS). the
input record is copied into
memory and tlie appropriate
value is stored in the current
status variable. The current
status value can then he used
to control subsequent
processing.
current status = 3. (the user pressed F8 MODIFY when the input

record was on the screen), modify the record in the CUSTOMERS form
If
CUSTOMER*
Unique field) that is the same as the CUSTOMER* on

current status = 4. (the user pressed F7 DELETE
when the input record was on the screen), delete the record in the
CUSTOMERS form with a CUSTOMERS (a Unique field) that is the same
as the CUSTOMER* on the input record. 3) Display the CUSTOMERS
form again so the operator can enter, modify, or delete another record.
with a
the input record.
Example
(a
If
3: while current status not =
CUSTOMERS
input using
case (current status)
value 1
value 2
break
do
into
"TEMPCUST"
TEMPCUST customer code

enter a record in CUSTOMERS
copy all from TEMPCUST
:
if
<= 20 then
else
message
"Invalid
Code, Re-enter the record."
end
others
message "You are
not authorized to modify
or delete records."
window
end
end
This query tells DataEase: 1) Display the CUSTOMERS form. 2) Each
time the user enters a record and presses a processing key, check the value
of the current status variable. If current status = 1 (ESC), stop query
processing without entering a record in the CUSTOMERS form. If
current status = 2 (F2 SAVE), verify that a valid customer code
(<= 20) was entered in the input record.

record into the CUSTOMERS form. If it
valid,
copy
the input
If
it
is
not valid, display an error
is
message. If current status = 3 or 4 (F8 MODIFY or F7 DELETE),

display a message telling the user that he/she is only authorized to enter
records. 3) Display the
form again so the u.ser can enter
CUSTOMERS
another record.
Using the input
When
Command
using the input
with Multiforms
command on
a Multifomi. DataEase treats Main

forms and Subforms differently. If you enter, modify, or delete a Main
form record, the information is copied into the specified temporary fomi
where it can be validated and processed by the query.
you enter or modify a Subform record, however, the new or modified

is entered directly into the Subform in the database. This is
because DataEase is unable to hold all of the entered or modified Subform
records in memory (up to 5000 Subfomi records can be entered or
modified at once) and still continue processing the query.
If
record
-^
6-97
When you use the input

command to enter, modify,
or
delete records in a Multiform,
DataEase treats Main form

and Subform records
differently. If you enter,
modify, or delete a Main form
record,
it
is
copied into the
specified temporary form. If

you enter or modify Subform
records, however, the new or

modified records are entered
directly into the Subform.
Volume
LEXICON
DQL
input (cont.)
If the user presses F2 SAVE to enter a Multiform record, you can use
enter a record to enter the record into the Main form (the Subform
records were automatically entered when the user pressed F2). If the
query tests the Main form for validity (e.g., CUSTOMER CODE <= 20 in
Example 3) and it fails, you must use delete records to remove the
Subform records that were entered when you pressed F2 SAVE.
If the
user presses
F8
MODIFY
to
modify
Multiform record, you can
use modify records to modify the
Main form record, (the Subform

records are automatically modified when the user pressed F8). If the
query tests the Main form for validity (e.g., CUSTOMER CODE <= 20 in
Example 3) and it fails, it is up to the user to remember which Subform
records were modified and then go back to the Subform and undo the
modifications. DataBase cannot automatically undo modified Subform
records.
you delete a Multiform record using the input command, the records
from the form. You must use the query to verify
that a valid record was entered and then use delete records to explicitly
delete the appropriate Main and Subform records.
If
are not directly deleted
Example
4: while current status not = 1

input using INVOICES into
case (current
value 1
value 2
status)
break
if
do
"TEMPINVOICE"
TEMPINVOICE customer code <= 20
enter a record
copy
all
from
message
in
then
INVOICES
TEMPINVOICES
Code, Re-enter the record."

delete records in INVOICE LINE ITEMS with
(INVOICE NUMBER = TEMPINVOICE INVOICE NUMBER)
end
others message "You are not authorized to modify or
or delete records. If you have modified records,
you must manually delete the modifications." window
end
end
else
"Invalid
DataBase: 1) Display the INVOICES form. 2) Each time

and presses a processing key, check the value of
the current status variable. If current status = 1 (ESC), stop query
processing without entering a record in the INVOICES form. If current
status = 2 (F2 SAVE), verify that a valid customer code was entered in
the input record. If it is valid, copy the input record into the INVOICES
form. If it is not valid, display an error message and delete the records
This query
tells
the user enters a record
were automatically entered in the Subform (INVOICE LINE ITEMS).

current status = 3 or 4 (F8 MODIFY or F7 DELETE), display a
message telling the user that he/she is only authorized to enter records.
3) Display the INVOICES form again so the user can enter another record.
that
If
Volume
6-98

install
appi
Keyword:
install
Type:
Control
Purpose: The
appI
(install application)
See Also: import, reorganize
Command
install
procedures
command
appI
in the
you
lets
When
application in the current database.
Syntax:
to specify the
of the Installation File.
install
appI
"INSTALLATION FILENAME"
The filename
that follows the install
filename of the Installation
LAN:
new DataEase
processing reaches
command. DataEase asks you
an install appI
name
replace forms or
install or
current database or install a
appI
Command
command
is
the
This name must
file.
command
be eight or fewer characters with no intervening spaces. See
The
Volume 2. Chapter 3. Database Utilities

on how applications are installed.
functions like selecting;

Install DataEase Application
on the Install/Convert
Application menu. For a
complete explanation of the
Installation procedure, see
On
LAN
if
more information
for
another user
using any resource required by the install appI
is
currently
command,
message
the
is
Volutne
command
at brief intervals.
procedure during
When
this
If
you want
install
2.
Database
appl
Chapter
5.
Utilities.
to abort the
this time,
becomes
available.
DataEase
procedure. See
for
Volume
2,
Chapter
4.
System Administration,
conflicts and Multi-User
Locking options.
Example:
This query
disk
in
appI "A: CATALOG"

run procedure "MAILLIST"
install
tells
DataEase:
CATALOG
drive A: into the current database.
installed, run the
6-99
1) Install the
MAILLIST
2)
When
application from the

the
new
application
is
procedure.
Volume
LEXICON
DQL
installment
Keyword:
installment
Type:
Financial Function
See Also: futurevalue,

periods, presentvalue, rate
Purpose: The installment
function calculates the periodic installment
payment required
for a financial transaction given the
presentvalue, futurevalue, interest rate, and number of
payment periods.
Syntax:
installmenl(presentvalue, futurevalue, rate, periods)
Returns:
numeric value (the installment payment amount).
Usage:
If
the installment
investment
(e.g.,
the function
is
payment increases the value of
the
an annuity), the numeric value returned by
expressed as a positive amount.
decreases the value of the investment
(e.g.,
the numeric value returned by the function
negative amount. The interest
If the
payment
loan amortization),
is
expressed as a
rate, installment
payments, and
time periods must be based on the same terms. For example,

if payments are made monthly on a five-year loan, the
number of periods is 12 * 5) or 60. The interest rate must be
expressed in the same terms (the monthly interest rate is the
(
annual rate
Examples:
/1 2).
installment(15000,
Returns: -318.71
0,
10
12,
60
When
10

DataBase requires
12.
you type a space before

and after the division symbol
that
This example calculates the monthly installment payment required to pay

off a $15,000 loan in 5 years at an annual interest rate of 10%.
installment(0, 15000, 10
Returns: 193.71
12, 60)
This example calculates the monthly installment amount required to

accumulate $15,000 in 5 years at an annual interest rate of 10%.
NOTE: DataBase financial functions

shown below. (The double
power") cannot be used
in
are derived from the formula
asterisks
(meaning "raise
to the
a query).
futurevalue = principal * ((I + (rate/100))) ** periods) +

(installmentl(ratellOO)) * (((I + (rate/100)) ** periods) - 1)
Volume
6-100
item (Statistical Operator)
Keyword: item
Type:
Statistical
See Also: max, min, mean,

std.dev., std.err., sum,
variance, ami also the item
Operator
Purpose: The item
statistical operator tells DataBase to display the

specified field value from each processed record in addition to
any specified statistics. The result appears as a list item in the
coihlitional slatistical
opeialor.
detail area of a report.
Syntax:
fieldname
Usage:
item [other statistical operators]
Quick Report, each specified
In a
included
field value is automatically
In a
DQL
Procedure,
if
other statistics are specified for a field, the field value
name
Example:
for
is
is only included
followed by the item operator.
CUSTOMERS
is
If statistics
specified on a field, the field value

field
no
if
the
list
ACCOUNT BALANCE
item min
max sum
end
This query
tells
DataBase:
BALANCE
(item).
the largest
balance
1)
Process
last name.
the
CUSTOMERS
3) List the smallest
account balance
account balance
(max). 5) List the

amounts combined (sum).
The output from
LAST NAME
this
total
of
records
in
ACCOUNT
(min). 4) List
all
the
an important
operator and the

item conditional statistical
operator. The item
statistical operator tells
DataBase to include the list
item in the report output
when other statistics are
specified. The item
conditional statistical
operator tells DataBase to
evaluate a cotnparison and
return a YBS or NO answer
indicating if the comparison
is true or not.
.account
ACCOUNT BALANCE
Adams
Cooper
Evans
Hill
Ivers
MINIMUM ACCOUNT BAlANci

MAXIMUM ACCOUNT BALANCE
SUM ACCOUNT BALANCE
6-101
all
2) List each customer's
is
statistical
are
records
LAST NAME in order
There
difference between the item
$595.00
$725.00
$865.00
$525.00
$675.00
^$52~5"oO
$865 00
$3 385 00
Volume
LEXICON
DQL
item (Conditional Statistical Operator)
Keyword: item
Type:
Purpose: The item
conditional statistical operator returns a yes or
answer indicating
if
the specified
COMPARISON STATEMENT
Syntax:
Usage:
In a query, the
item operator
comparison
is
item
is
placed after a
list
item that
compared to a specified value. The item operator

from the comparison by a colon.
Example:
for
CUSTOMERS
no
true or false.
is
is
separated
records
LAST NAME in order
list
ACCOUNT BALANCE item min max sum

ACCOUNT BALANCE > 500 item
:
end
This query
tells
DataBase: 1) Process
BALANCE
(item).
LAST NAME.
all
the
CUSTOMERS
3) List the smallest
ACCOUNT balance
records in
ACCOUNT
(min). 4) List
ACCOUNT BALANCE
(max). 5) List the total of all the ACCOUNT

BALANCE amounts combined (sum). 6) For each customer specify a yes
or no answer indicating if the customer's ACCOUNT BALANCE is
greater than $500 (item conditional statistical operator).
the largest
The output from
this
LAST
ACCOUNT
NAME
BALANCE
Adams
ACCOUNT BALANCE
OVER 500

jointext
Keyword:
jointext
Type:
Text Function
Purpose: The
See Also: firslcfirstlast,

firstw, lastc, lastfirst, lastw,
jointext function combines two separate text values into
one.
Syntax:
jointext(TEXT
Returns:
Usage:
When two
text value
VALUE1, TEXT VALUE2)
up
to
255 characters
in length.
text values are joined, leading spaces are
maintained but trailing spaces are deleted.
more
fields,
To
join three or
you can use additional jointext functions
as
either or both parameters.
Examples:
jointext("Data", "Ease")
Returns: DataBase
jointext(jointext("Data", "Ease"),
Returns; DataBase International
In the above example, there
the string International.
is
"
International")
a space at the
start of
jointext{PRODUCT, " 16M")

Returns: DataBase 16M
In the
above example, there
PRODUCT
6-103
is
field holds the value
a space at the start of the string
I6M. The
DatuEase.
Volume
LEXICON
DQL
Julian
Keyword:
julian
Type:
Date Function
See Also: current, day, date,

month, spelldate, spellmonth,
yearweek
Purpose: The
Syntax:
julian function converts a date value to a Julian date.
julian(DATE
Returns:
five-digit integer in the format
YY
Usage:
VALUE)
the
are the last
day
in the
= 365, except
two
YYDDD.
digits of the year.
year (with January

in leap
year
when
1st
it
is
DDD
is
the position of
= 001; and December
31
366).
Examples: julian(07/04/89)
Returns: 89185
julian( 12/31/89)
Returns:
Volume
89365
6-104
Keywords
Keyword: Keywords
See Also: blank, current,
Type:
data-entry, do, else, global, in,

into, others, temp, then,
Concept
Purpose: Keywords
are used to signal special operations such as
using, value
creating variables, performing conditional actions, or

retrieving values
Usage:
In interactive
from
Mode,
inserted in the query
There are thirteen
DQL
a Data-entry form.
certain
keywords are automatically
where required.
keywords
as specified below:
blank returns a
current tells DataBase that you want to access one of the eight
current system variables (date, time, page number, item number, user
name, user level, computer name, or status).
data-entry tells DataBase

on the Data-entry form.
do
tells
null (unspecified value).
to use the value
found
in
the specified field
DataBase what actions
to
perform when the condition
command
is
true.
specified by a while
else tells
DataBase what actions
specified by an
if
command
to
perform when the condition
\s false.
global identifies a global variable.
in tells
DataBase
to enter, delete,
list,
or modify records in a form
other than the Primary form.

is used with the input command
temporary destination form.
into
others
temp
then
name
tells DataBase what actions to perform when

value statements in a case command dre false.
identifies a
all
of a
the preceding
temporary variable.
tells DataBase what actions to perform

specified by an if command is Hue.
using
is used with the input

database source form.
command
when
the condition
to specify the
name of the
value is used with the case command to specify each of the

comparison values to which the ca.se expression is compared.
For a
to specify the
explanation of any of the

Lexicon.
full
in this
6-105
DQL
keywords, see the separate entry
Volume
DQL
LEXICON
lastc
Keyword:
lastc
Type:
Text Function
See Also: firstcfirstlast,
Purpose: The
lastc function extracts a specified
from the end
Syntax:
firstw,jointext, lastfirst,
lastM\ length, lower, midc,
lastc(TEXT VALUE,
Returns:
Usage:
lastci
text value
characters
midM.',
proper, textpos,
upper
n)
n characters
FIELDNAME.
in length.
returns the last non-hlank character in
the field. Trailing spaces are ignored.
characters
number of
(riahtl of a text value.
in the field, lastc
Examples: lastcC'DataEase",
Returns: Ease
4)
lastcC'New User",
Returns: User
4)
If there are
n or fewer
returns the original text value.
laStC(FIRST NAME. 4)
Returns: The last four characters in the first name
field for every record that is processed. If the first
NAME field contains the value Sherlock, the function
returns lock.
Volume
6-106
DATABASE REFERENCE MANLAL

lastfjrst
I
Keyword:
lastfirst
Type:
Text Function
Purpose: The
lastfirst function converts a text value
from the format:
Name [MJ Last Name to the format: Last Name,

Name [M.J. The [M.J is an optional middle initial.
First
Syntax:
Returns:
lastfirst(TEXT
See Also: firslcfirsllasl,

firstwjoinlext, lastc, laslw,
First
VALUE)
text value.
The contents of the field are rearranged so that the last word
(i.e.. the last name) becomes the first word in the returned
value.
Usage:
A comma
automatically inserted after the
is
The name of
this function
the format in
which
Examples: lastfirst(Susan
the
B.
and the
names
last
name.
firstlast function refer to
are stored in a sinale field.
Anthony)
Returns: Anthony, Susan B.

lastfirst(T.S. Eliot)
Returns:
Eliot,
T.S.
lastfirst(FULL name)
Returns: The value in the full name field in the format

shown above for every record that is processed.
a
record contains the value Sherlock Holmes in the full
If
NAiviE field,
6-107
the function returns Holmes, Sherlock.
Volume
DQL
LEXICON
lastw
Keyword:
lastw
Type:
Text Function
Purpose: The lastw

the
Syntax:
end
function extracts a specified
(right)
of a text value.
lastw(TEXT VALUE,
n)
Returns:
Usage:
lastw(FIELDNAME,
text value
number of words from

firstwjointext, lastc, lastfirst,
n words
in length.
n) returns the last
n words
in the field
including intervening spaces and punctuation symbols.

Trailing spaces are ignored.
If there
are n or fewer
words
in
the field, lastw returns the original text value.
Examples:
lastw("DataEase International,
Returns: International,
lastw("New User",
Returns: User
1)
laStW(BOOK
Returns the
2)
TITLE,
Inc.", 2)
Inc.
two words in the book title field for

last
the value The Hound of the Baskervilles in the book

TITLE field, the function returns the Baskervilles.
Volume
6-108

length
Keyword:
length
^
^
Text Function
Type:
Purpose: The length
function counts the
number of character
positions
See Also: firstcfirstlast.

lastw, lower, midc, midw,
in a text value.
Syntax:
length(TEXT VALUE)
Returns:
An
Usage:
The length function counts leading and intervening
integer value.
spaces.
Trailing spaces are ignored.
Examples:
length("DataEase International,
Returns: 28
Inc.")
length("New User")
Returns: 8
length(coMPANY name)
Returns: The number of characters
in the company
NAME field for every record that is processed.
the
COMPANY NAME field Contains the value DataBase
If
International, Inc., the function returns 28.
^-'^^
Volume
LEXICON
DQL
list
records
Keyword:
list
Type:
Processing
records
Purpose: The
Command
records
list
See Also: delete records, enter

a record, modify records,
output
command
tells
DataBase which items
to
display in the report output for each record processed by the
query. These items are called
Syntax:
records
list
in
Each
last,
list
list
is
followed by a period. Values specified
command
with report
the
[named "UNIQUE
[with(selection criteria)]
item must be followed by a semicolon except the
which
records
items.
RELATIONSHIP NAME"]
Usage:
lisr
The
in a list
by inserting the appropriate operator
after
for
CUSTOMERS
records
indicate you have no
sum
selection criteria.
This query tells DataEase: 1) Process all the CUSTOMERS records with
the same value in the st.ate field together as a group. 2) Display the
each group, arrange the customers in alphabetical order by LAST NAME.
account balance
(item).
5) List subtotals of
each STATE group (in groups with
6) List the smallest ACCOUNT balance (min). 7) List

ACCOUNT BALANCE (max). 8) List the sum of all the ACCOUNT
balance amounts combined (sum). The output might look like this:
largest
STATE
records
automatically
list
inserted in the queiy
end
statistic for
the
command is
;
Low Level Interactive
Mode,
STATE in groups with group totals

LAST NAME in order
ACCOUNT BALANCE item min max
group-totals).
Low Level
item.
list
each specified
command is
query.
In
Example:
records
available in a
can be sorted, grouped, or summarized
statistics
list
the only output option
the
when you
more

lock
Keyword:
lock
Type:
Processing
See Also: lock db, query

selection, unlock, unlock db
Command
Purpose: The lock command

on a
LAN
is
when using DataBase

The lock command prevents
only functional
(local area network).
users from viewing, modifying, adding, or deleting data in
forms and records being used by a report/procedure.
The lock command
overrides the default Multi-User Locking
Rules assigned by the database administrator.

override the default locking rules, the
query must be either lock

neither of these
appears
the default locking rules govern
command
or unlock
Usage:
lock
order to
at the start
LAN
in the
If
of the query,
functioning until a lock
query.
unlock commands are automatically terminated
All lock and
end of a query.
at the
Syntax:
appears
In
statement of the
or unlock all files.
all files
commands
first
all files
The lock
query.
filename
all files
selected record [shared|exclusive]
command
locks
Users can view records
forms referenced by the
all
in the
locked forms but cannot
add. delete or modify data in these forms.
The lock
file
command
locks the specified form for the
duration of the procedure or until the

in
an unlock
command. When an
same form
is
specified
individual form or record
is
locked, you must also specify the type of lock (shared or

exclusive).
Shared
lets
other users view records
in
the locked
form but prohibits them from entering, modifying, or deleting

records
in that
form.
Exclusive prevents
all
access to the
locked form, including viewing records.
The lock
selected record
except
only locks the record that
it
processed.
When DataBase
command
file
currently being
this
command
it
is
only within a for
loop (see
2). If you use it outside a for
no records are selected: therefore nothing is locked.
->
6-111
functions like lock
is
finishes processing a record,
Use
Example
automatically unlocked.
loop,
command
Volume
LEXICON
DQL
lock (cont.)
Example:
lock
for
file
INVOICES shared
CUSTOMERS
(sum
with
of
INVOICES order
TOTAL > 500)

records
LAST NAME;
list
ACCOUNT BALANCE
end
This query
tells
DataBase:
1)
Lock
the
INVOICES form so other users can

INVOICES records during
view records but cannot add, delete or modify

the processing of this report.
whose
related
than $500.
INVOICES
CUSTOMERS
2) Select all the
records have a combined
3) For each record selected,
list
records
ORDER TOTAL
the customer's
greater
LAST NAME
and ACCOUNT balance.

Notice
that locking the
INVOICES form
report prevents other users from entering
sum
of calculation
Example
2: for
during the processing of this
new
records that might alter the
field.
CUSTOMERS
lock selected record shared
records
LAST NAME
list
ACCOUNT BALANCE
mean of INVOICES order total
;
end
This query tells DataBase: 1) Select all the CUSTOMERS records.
2) Lock each record as it is selected so other users can view it but cannot
add, delete or modify the record while it is being processed. 3) For each
record selected, list the customer's last name, account balance, and
the mean ORDER total of all the related INVOICES records.
In this example,
record that
is
all
the
CUSTOMERS
records can be modified except the
currently being processed.
For more information on DataBase LAN configuration and the Multi-User

Locking Rules, see Volume 2, Chapter 4, System Administrarion.
Volume
6-112

lock
db
Keyword:
lock
Type:
Control
Purpose: The
db
(lock database)
See Also: lock, query

selection, unlock, unlock db
Command
lock
db command
DataBase on a
LAN
is
only functional when using
This
command
completely prohibits other users from accessing the current

database.
Syntax:
lock
db
The lock db command can be used
Usage:
to preserve the integrity of
data during an extended Control procedure or to prevent a
when
conflict
installing a
new
or revised application into the
database.
There
The lock db Control command
command
in several
differs
is
an important
difference between the lock

Processinii command and the
from the lock Processing
ways:
lock db Control
command.
The lock Processing

1
2.
It
locks the whole database rather than specified forms or
command can
lock individual
individual records.
forms or records during a

Processing procedure and
no shared option for the lock db command: no

other user can view records or access any form in the
other users view these

resources. The lock db
command locks the whole
database and prohibits other
There
database for any purpose.
users any accesss to

3.
The lock db command

at the
is
db command,
command
command
is
it
remains locked
executed, or the user
exits
it.
nor automatically terminated
end of the procedure. Once a database
the lock
still
let
is
who
until
is
locked by
an unlock db
initiated the lock
db
from DataBase.
6-113
Volume
DQL LEXICON
lock
db
LAN:
(cont.)
On
LAN
(local area network), if another user is currently
using any resource required by the lock
db command,
DataBase displays a Resource Conflict message. While
message
the
command
at brief intervals.
procedure during
When
this
displayed, DataEase automatically tries to execute
is
this time,
If
you want
to abort the
becomes
available, DataEase
Volume 2, Chapter 4, System Administration,

more information on resource conflicts and Multi-User
procedure. See
for
Locking Options.
Example:
lock db
run procedure
run procedure
.
unlock db
This query
tells
"CALCULATE DISCOUNT"
"PRINT INVOICES"
DataEase:
1)
CALCULATE DISCOUNT
Lock
the current database.
procedure. 3)
Run
the
2)
Run
the
PRINT INVOICES
procedure. 4) Unlock the database.
Volumes
6-114

log
Keyword:
log
Type:
Scientific Function
See Also: exp, log 10, power,
Purpose: The
sqrt
log function computes the natural base e logarithm of a
numeric value.
Syntax:
Returns:
Examples:
log(NUMERIC VALUE)
numeric value.
I
log(3)
Returns:
1.098612
log(0.5)
Returns:
6-115
-0.693147
Volume
DQL LEXICON
Iog10
Keyword:
loglO
Type:
Scientific Function
See Also: exp, log, power, sqrt
Purpose: The loglO
function computes the
common
base 10 logarithm
of a numeric value.
Syntax:
ioqioinumeric value)
Returns:
numeric value.
Examples: Iog10(3)
Returns:
0.477121
Iogl0(0.5)
Returns; -0.301031
Volume
6-116
lower
Keyword: lower
Type:
See Also: firstc,firstlast,

flrstwjointext, lastc, lastfirst,
Text Function
Purpose: The lower
function converts each letter in a specified text
lastw, length, midc, midw,

value into lowercase type.
Syntax:
Returns:
lower(TEXT VALUE)
The
specified text value with
ail
the letters in lower case.
Examples: lower("DataEase")
Returns: dataease
lower("Washington D.C.")
Returns: Washington d.c.
IOWer(LAST NAME)
Returns the value in the last name field in lowercase
type for every record that is processed. If a record
contains the value HOLMES in the last name field,
the function returns holmes.
6-117
Volume 3
DQL
LEXICON
lowest of
Keyword:
lowest of
Type:
See Also:
highest
of,
Purpose: The lowest of operator

specified field in
The
result
all
all,
of,
any, count
min,
mean
of,
of,
sum
named
finds the smallest value in the
matching records
can appear as a
list
item
in a related
in the detail
form.
area of a
report or as a statistic at the end of each group or at the
end of the
report.

RELATIONSHIP NAME'T [with (selection criteria)] FIELDNAME
Syntax:
lowest of
Returns:
value of the same type as the specified field.
field
is
specified,
Text
If a
DataEase returns the lowest ASCII value.
difference het^'een the
Choice field is specified. DataEase returns the value in

the lowest numbered choice (not necessarily the lowest ASCII
statistical
value).
min
If a
Example:
for
CUSTOMERS
operator min and
operator lowest
of.
returns the lowest value
in the specified field
among
records
LAST NAME in order
lowest of INVOICES order total
list
lowest of returns the lowest

value in the specified field
among the records related to
end
This query tells DataEase: 1) Process all the CUSTOMERS records and
list each customer's LAST name in alphabetical order. 2) For each
CUSTOMERS record selected, find the related records in the INVOICES
form (those that have the same CUSTOMER #). 3) List the lowest ORDER
total
for
each customer
The output from
in the set
of matching
this query arranged

LAST NAME
in alphabetical order
records.
by last name,
LOWEST OF INVOICES ORDER TOTAL
Adams
$15.65
$22.40
$18.10
$12.50
$17.25
Cooper
Evans
Hill
Ivors
If
INVOICES
you also want
to include the smallest
ORDER TOTAL among
this
group of
lowest of
Volume
item min
6-118
max
Keyword: max
Type:
Statistical
See Also: item, highest of,

min, mean, std.dev., std.err.,
sum, variance
Operator
Purpose: The max operator finds the highest value in a

among all the records that are processed. The
in the statistical summary areas of the report.
Syntax:
Returns:
VALUE max
:
result appears
[other statistical operators]
value of the same type as the specified value. If the
specified value
ASCII
Usage:
specified field
max
is
Text
field,
max
returns the highest
value.
finds the highest value in the specified field
among
the
records being processed, highest of finds the highest value in

the specified field
among
the records related to the records
being processed.
Example:
for
CUSTOMERS
list
statistical
operator
operator highest
max finds
with
records
LAST NAME in Order

account balance
item
max sum
end
This query tells DataBase: 1) Process all the CUSTOMERS records that
have a value greater than 500 in the account balance field. 2) List the
customers by LAST name in alphabetical order. 3) List each customer's
max and

of.
the highest value in
the specified field
among
the
records being processed.

highest offinds the highest
account balance and include the largest account balance amount

all the account balance amounts in the report output.
and the sum of
The output from
LAST NAME
this
ACCOUNT BALANCE
Adams
Cooper
Evans
Hill
Ivers
MAX ACCOUNT BALANCE

SUM ACCOUNT BALANCE
6-119
$595.00
$725.00
$865.00
$525.00
$675.00
^$865.00'
$3385.00
Volume
DQL
LEXICON
mean
Keyword: mean
See Also: item, max, min,
Type:
Statistical
mean
Operator
of, std.dev., std.err.,
sum, variance
Purpose: The mean operator finds the average value in a specified

field among all the records that are processed. The result
appears in the statistical summary areas of the report.
VALUE mean
Syntax:
Returns:
Usage:
The mean operator
numeric value.
calculates the average of
the specified field (the
number of values
calculation.
sum of
processed).
all
the values in
the values divided by the
Blank
fields are ignored in the
Fields that have a value of zero are included in
the calculation.
Example:
for
CUSTOMERS
with
records
LAST NAME in order
statistical
and
tile
operator
Item
mean sum
end
mean
mean of.
mean finds the average value
in the specified fie Id among
operator
mean offinds
list
ACCOUNT BALANCE
the average

have a value greater than 500 in the ACCOUNT balance field. 2) List the
customers by last name in alphabetical order. 3) List each customer's
ACCOUNT BALANCE and include the mean ACCOUNT balance amount

and the sum of all the ACCOUNT balance amounts in the report output.
The output from
LAST NAME
this
ACCOUNT BALANCE
Adams
$595.00
$725.00
$865.00
$525.00
$675.00
Cooper
Evans
Hill
Ivers
MEAN ACCOUNT BALANCE

SUM ACCOUNT BALANCE
Volume
$677.00
$3385.00
6-120

mean
of
Keyword: mean
Type:
of
Purpose: The mean of

The
result
sum
operator calculates the average value
specified field in
all
matching records
can appear as a
each group or
at the
item
list
report or as a statistic in the
Syntax:
See Also: all, any, count of,

highest of, lowest of, mean,
in a related
in the detail
summary
end of the
of,
named
in a
form.
area of a
area at the end of
report.
mean of FORMNAME RELATIONSHIP [named "UNIQUE

|
Returns:
Usage:
The mean of operator
numeric value.
calculates the average of
in the specified field (the
sum
number of values processed). Blank

that
Example:
CUSTOMERS
list
the values
fields are ignored. Fields
have a value of zero are included
for
all
of the values divided by the
in the calculation.
mean
of
in
Order
operator
mean
operator mean of.

mean finds the average value
specified field among
mean offinds
end
This query tells DataBase: 1) Process all the CUSTOMERS records and
list each customer's last name in alphabetical order.
2) For each
CUSTOMERS
statistical
and the
in the
records
LAST NAME
the average

record processed, find all the related records in the

(those that have the same customer #). 3) List the
INVOICES form
mean order total
for each
customer from the
of related
set
INVOICES
records.
The output from
LAST NAME
this
MEAN OF INVOICES ORDER TOTAL
Adams
$35.25
$72.40
$48.10
$25.00
$67.45
Cooper
Evans
Hill
Ivers
you also want to include the mean order total among this group of
If
mean
6-121
of
item
mean
Volume
LEXICON
DQL
message
Keyword: message
Type:
Procedural
See Also: Define Screen

Styles in Volume 2. Chapter 4.
System Administration, and
Field Help in Volume 2.
Chapter I Form Definition.
Command
Purpose: The message command
DataEase
tells
to display a specified
message. The message content can be approximately 1000
Each
message can be assigned individual color and highlighting
effects and be positioned anywhere on the screen.
characters in length (17 lines x 68 characters per line).
message "MESSAGE TEXT' [window]
Syntax:
When you
Usage
message from
select
the
[pause]
list
DQL commands
of
DataEase prompts:
Type the message
You
be displayed.
to
can choose to use a current system variable, a relational
operator, a function, and/or a text constant enclosed in
quotation marks
When you
when
entering the message.
finish entering the
the choice of displaying the

select this option, the
message, DataEase offers you
message
window.
in a
message can be up
to
appropriate size for the message text.
1000 characters
To
If
line (see
you want
window
the start
Example
You can
to indicate
).
and location of the message

you can sf)ecify the following parameters
of the message text (see Example 2):
to control the size
yourself,
# of Columns, Stan Row, Start Column, #
of
Rows.
key names>, braces {regular
in
at
MESSAGE
also control the color and highlighting of
of a message by enclosing the text

like
in
functions in the same way that

Help messages are defined.
divide the message
into multiple lines, insert a vertical bar character
new
The message command
you
DataEase automatically creates a window of the
length.
If
all
or part
angle brackets <treated
field color), or regular
brackets [regular text] as defined on the Screen Styles form
(See Example
3).
For more information on message highlighting, see the

explanation of the Screen Styles form in
Volume
2,
Chapter 4, System Administration.

->
Volume
6-122

message
Usage:
(cont.)
the window option, the message length

40 characters and is displayed on one line in the
upper right comer of the screen (see Example 4).
If
you don't choose
is
limited to
When
message
the user
is
is
displayed
in a
window, DataEase pauses:
required to press any key to acknowledge the
message and resume processing. If you don't display the

message in a window, DataEase asks if you want to use this
pause feature.
Example
1:
message
this
"Sorry. |A high security level
procedure" window
This message is displayed

words Sony and required.
Example
2:
in a
is
requirecl|to run
window. There
are line breaks after the
message
"40, 15, 20, 3, Sorry. |A high security level

requiredjto run this procedure" window
IS
This message is displayed in a window. There are line breaks after the
words Sony and required. The message window is 40 columns wide,
begins in row 15, column 20, and is 3 rows in length.
Example
3:
message
level
is
"40, 15, 20, 3, <Sorry>.|A {high} security

required|to [run] this procedure" window
.
This message is displayed in a window. There are line breaks after the
words Sony and required. The message window is 40 columns wide,
begins in row 15. column 20. and is 3 rows in length. The word Sorjy
is
highlighted like a
word
keyname
as defined on the Screen Styles form.
/?/( is highlighted in the regular field color.
The word run
is
The
treated
like regular text.
Example
4:
"Sorry. A high security level

run this procedure" pause
message
is
required to
This message
the screen.
character
pauses
6-123
is
displayed on a message line in the upper right comer of

is truncated after the word required (40
The message
maximum
length).
until the user presses
When the message is displayed, DataEase

a key to acknowledge the message.
Volume
DQL LEXICON
midc
Keyword: midc
See Also: Jirstcfirstlast,
Type:
Text Function
Purpose: The midc
from the middle of a
Syntax:
where
is
characters
text value.
midc(TEXT VALUE, m,
number of
number of
firstwjointext, lastc, lastflrst,

lastw, length, lower, midw,
n)
the starting position in the text value
and n
is
the
characters to extract.
Returns:
Usage:
midc( FIELDNAME, m, n) returns n characters beginning
text value
n characters
character position
in length.
(inclusive).
at
Intervening spaces and
punctuation symbols are included. Trailing spaces are ignored.
Examples: midc("DataEase",
Returns;
4, 3)
aEa
midcC'New User",
Returns: Use
5, 3)
midC(LAST NAME, 4, 2)
Returns two characters beginning at the fourth
character position in the last name field for every
record that is processed. If a record contains the
value Holmes
in
the last
name
field,
the function
returns me.
Volume
6-124
midw
Keyword: midw
See Also: firstc,firstlast,
Type:
Text Function
Purpose: The midw
firstw,jointext, lastc, lastfirsl,

lastw, length, lower, midc,
number of words from
the middle of a text value.
Syntax:
midw(TEXT VALUE, m.
where
is
n)
the starting position in the text value and n
number of words
Returns:
Usage:
midw(FIELDNAME, m,
text value
is
the
to extract.
n words
in length.
n) returns n
words beginning
at
word number position m (inclusive). Intervening spaces and

punctuation symbols are included. Trailing spaces are ignored.
Examples: midw("DataEase
International Inc.", 2, 1)
Returns: International
midw("New Users Group",
2, 2)
Returns; Users Group
midw(BOOK
TITLE, 2, 3)
Returns three words beginning at the second word

position in the book title field for every record that is
processed. If a record contains the value The Hound
of the Baskervilles in the
returns Hound of the.
6-125
book
title field, the function
Volume
DQL
LEXICON
min
Keyword: min
See Also: item, lowest
Type:
Statistical
Operator
max, mean, std.dev.,

sum, variance
Purpose: The min operator finds the smallest value in a

among all the records that are processed. The
in the statistical summary areas of the report.
VALUE
Syntax:
Returns:
min [other
specified field
result appears
statistical operators]
value of the same type as the specified value. If the
specified value
ASCII
is
of,
std.err.,
a Text field,
min
returns the lowest
dijference between the
statistical
value.
operator min and
Example:
CUSTOMERS
for
ACCOUNT BALANCE
LAST NAME
this
among

.
lowest of returns the lowest

ACCOUNT BALANCE
$595.00
$725.00
$865.00
$525.00
$675.00
Cooper
Evans
Hill
Ivers
ACCOUNT BALANCE
Volume
tite
Adams
MIN
lowest value
returns
in the specified field
item min
list each customer's LAST NAME in alphabetical order. 2) List each
customer's ACCOUNT balance and include the smallest ACCOUNT
The output from
of.
min
;
end
BALANCE amount
operator lowest
;
records
LAST NAME in order
list
$525.00
6-126

minutes
Keyword: minutes
Type:
Purpose: The minutes

expressed
Syntax:
Returns:
See Also: ampm, current.

hour, seconds, timeampm
Time Function
function extracts the minutes from a time value
in a
24-hour format.
minutes(TIME VALUE)
An
integer value from
00
to 59.
Examples: minutes(1 2:00:00)

Returns: 00
minutes(23:59:00)
Returns: 59
6-127
Volume
DQL LEXICON
mod
Keyword: mod (modulus)
See Also: abs,
Type:
Purpose: The mod (modulus)

numeric value
function returns the remainder
values are integers, an integer value
decimal value
is
Returns:
is
returned.
If
both
Otherwise, a
returned.
mod(NUMERIC VALUE
Syntax:
floor,
when one
divided by a second numeric value.
is
ceil,
random
Scientific Function
1,
NUMERIC VALUE
2)
numeric value.
Examples: mod(8,
3)
Returns; 2
mod(12.6,
Returns:
Volume
1.6)
1.4
6-128

modify records
Keyword: modify records

See also: copy
Type:
Processing
Command
all from,
data-entry, delete records,
enter a record,
Purpose: The modify records command modifies
list
records
records in a specified
form.
Syntax:
Usage:
nodify records in FORMNAME RELATIONSHIP [named "UNIQUE

RELATIONSHIP NAME"] [with (selection criteria)]
FIELDNAME := MODIFIED VALUE
|
The modify records command must specify

and the
field values to be
Alternatively,
changed
in the
to
copy
from command. As
field
data
Target form, automatic error checking
is
is
performed and errors are logged
to
When you modify
Primary form, the keyword
in
is
records
in the
omitted and no punctuation
records
command
(see
Example
an error
is
1
).
1: for
CUSTOMERS
with (any
file.
used after the modify

If
no selection
are specified, all the records in the Primary
Example
form
a Target
Target form.
you can specify a Source form
data from using the copy ail
entered
in the
criteria
form are modified.
> 500)
modify records
;
ACCOUNT BALANCE
DISCOUNT)
:=
(ACCOUNT BALANCE
data-entry
end
have any related INVOICES record with an ORDER total greater than
$500. 2) Modify each CUSTOMERS record by subtracting the DISCOUNT
amount entered in the Data-entry form from the value in the ACCOUNT
BALANCE
field.
6-129
Volume
DQL
modify records
(cont.)
When you modify
Usage:
LEXICON
records in a form other than the Primary
form, the keyword in precedes the form name, and the
command
ends with the appropriate punctuation mark (a

semicolon or a period - see Example 2). If no selection
criteria are specified, all the records in the specified
form
are modified.
Example
CUSTOMERS
2: for
with state = "NY"
modify records
ORDER TOTAL
INVOICES
ORDER TOTAL
in
:=
+ NY SALES TAX
end
This query
have
NY
tells
in the
processed, find
each related
all
the related records in the
INVOICES
the value in the
Volume
DataBase: 1) Process all the CUSTOMERS records that

field. 2) For each CUSTOMERS record that is
STATE
INVOICES
record by adding the
ORDER TOTAL
form. Modify
NY SALES TAX amount
to
field.
6-130

month
Keyword: month
Type:
See Also: current, day, date,

Julian, spelldate, spellmonth,
Date Function
Purpose: The month
function extracts the
month
(1- 12)
from a date
yearweek
value.
Syntax:
Returns:
month(DATE VALUE)
An
integer value between
and
12.
The
date format selected
System Administration changes the date sequence but does

not affect which value is returned by a Date function.
in
Examples: month(1 2/31/89)

Returns:
12 (North American format)
month(31/12/89)
Returns: 12 (European format)
month(89/12/31)
Returns:
6-131
12 (Metric format)
Volume
LEXICON
DQL
named
Keyword: named
See Also: Ad-hoc Relationship
Type:
Relational Operator
Purpose: The named
operator
is
used to give a unique
name
each
to
relationship based on different selection criteria so DataEase
can distinguish multiple relationships between the same forms.
RELATIONSHIP named "UNIQUE RELATIONSHIP NAME"
Syntax:
[with
(selection criteria)]
Usage:
During a query, whenever you add or change the selection

criteria
of a relationship (predefined or ad-hoc), you create a
new ad-hoc
relationship. If
two forms
are related
by more
than one relationship, each of these relationships must be
assigned a unique name, either on the Relationships form or
named
by using the
operator
in the
query, so DataEase can
distinguish between them.
unique relationship name
you assign
is
name used on
relationship
any name you
like as
analogous
it's first
name appears
When you
to the optional
the Relationships form.
long as no other relationship
query has the same name. The name

time
is
placed
in
It
can be
in the
quotes
defined; no quotation marks are used

in
name
an arbitrary name. The
to the relationship is
if
at the
the
subsequent statements.
use the
named
operator to distinguish a
relationship, the relationship automatically forfeits any
previously defined criteria, including the criteria on which a
predefined relationship was based. Thus,

criteria to a relationship
distinguish
it.
and use the
you must also
defines the relationship.
if
named
you add new

operator to
restate all of the criteria that
Once
a relationship
is
assigned a
unique name, you can use the relationship name alone to

reference
it
without restating the
-^
Volume
criteria.
6-132

named
Example:
(cont.)
for
CUSTOMERS
modify records
with
in
(CUSTOMER
INVOICES named "CURRENT"

CUSTOMERS CUSTOMER #
# =
and DATE > 01/01/89)

ORDER TOTAL := ORDER TOTAL
delete records in INVOICES
with (CUSTOMER # =
data-entry DISCOUNT
named "OUTDATED"
CUSTOMERS customer
and DATE < 01/01/80)

end
2) For each record processed, find all the related INVOICES records.
3) Divide the related INVOICES records into two groups: one group
CURRENT (dated after January 1st, 1989). and a second group

OUTDATED (dated before January 1st, 1980). 4) Modify the
records in the CURRENT relationship by subtracting the discount value
named
named
entered
in
the Data-entry
There
is
INVOICES ORDER total.
form from the
5) Delete the records in the
OUTDATED
relationship.
a predefined relationship between
INVOICES. During
this
query,
we
CUSTOMERS
are creating
two
and
different ad-hoc
CUSTOMERS and INVOICES by adding selection

based on the value in the date field. The named operator is used
to assign a unique relationship name to each group of records so DataBase
can distinguish between these two relationships.
relationships between
criteria
Because the previous
criteria is forfeited
whenever
new
relationship
is
created, the full relationship criteria, including the criteria used in the
predefined relationship
specified
when each
(customer # =
relationship
CUSTOMERS customer
#), is
named.
is
Subsequently, as long as the criteria remains unchanged, you can use the
name alone without restating the relationship criteria. For
relationship
example, if after modifying the records in the CURRENT relationship you

want to list the invoice # and ORDER TOTAL of each record, the query
would look
Example:
like this:
for
CUSTOMERS
modify records
with
in
(customer
INVOICES named "CURRENT"

CUSTOMERS customer #
# =
and DATE > 01/01/89)

ORDER TOTAL := ORDER TOTAL
data-entry DISCOUNT
records in CURRENT
INVOICE # in order
list
ORDER TOTAL
end
6-133
Volume
DQL
LEXICON
Nested Actions
Keyword: Nested Actions

Type:
See Also: for, case, end,

while
Concept
Purpose: A Nested Action
is
an action that
is
if,
invoked by another
action.
There are two types of nested actions:
1)
nested loop
same series of actions on each record that

Example 1). 2) A nested conditional action
action performs the

is
processed (see
is
most often used
different actions
Example
1: for
CUSTOMERS
for
subgroups of records and perform
to select
on each group (see Example
2).
INVOICES
list
records
CUSTOMERS
INVOICE #
LAST NAME
in
groups
ORDER TOTAL
end
end
This query tells DataEase to perform the same series of actions on each
record selected by the for command. In this example, the second for
command, which
record that
is
retrieves the invoices related to the
currently being processed,
is
CUSTOMERS
nested within the
first
for
command.
Example
2: for
Although DataEase does not

require it. it is easier to follow
the logic if you indent nested
INVOICES
ORDER TOTAL > 500 then
;
if
modify records
in
CUSTOMERS
STATUS := PREFERRED
DATE between 01/01/89 to current date tfien
enter a record in CATALOG CUSTOMERS
copy all from CUSTOMERS
end
.
if
actions as
shown
in these
examples.
end
end
two groups of INVOICES records:
greater than $500 (the related
CUSTOMERS records get modified). 2) The records with an order
TOTAL greater than 500 and a date between the start of 1989 and today's
date (the related CUSTOMERS records get modified and copied into the
This query
tells
DataEase
1) All the records
with an
to select
ORDER TOTAL
CATALOG CUSTOMERS
form).
In this example, the second if
records selected by the
first if
command, which selects a subgroup of

command, is nested within the first if
the
command.
Volume
6-134

not
Keyword:
not
Type:
Comparison Operator
See Also: and, between,
Purpose: The not
operator reverses the meaning of any comparison
operator
except
it
VALUE
Usage:
The not
(/fii
(e.g.,
STATE not = "NY" means any
state
York).
not comparison operator
VALUE
operator's effect can often be accomplished by
stating the
<
precedes
New
Syntax:
or,
comparison
r/ic/;;)
greater than).
in a different
way. For example.
can be substituted for not >= (not equal or
Whenever
possible, comparisons should be
stated as a positive expression.
Examples: ORDER TOTAL not > 500 means the value

TOTAL
field is less
in
the
order
than or equal to 500.
STATE not = "NY" and state not = "NJ"

means any state except New York or New Jersey.
;
6-135
Volume
DQL LEXICON
Operators
List of
DQL
Keyword: Operators
Type:
Concept
COMP.ARISON
Purpose: Operators
refine
commands; they
tell
DataBase how
to
execute the various operations specified by Processing and

Control
There are
briefly
six
Commands.
groups of
DQL
left
DataBase
if
the
comparison
Grouping and Sorting Operators

in
tell
to
compare
the value to the
of the operator with the value to the right of the operator and
process the record
Operators which are listed to the right and
summarized below:
which records
are processed
Relational Operators
let
you
and
is
tell
true.
DataBase
to
change the order
listed in the output.
retrieve specified field information
from a related form.

Statistical
all
Operators summarize
the values of a specified field for
the records that are processed.
Conditional Statistical Operators indicate for which records a

specified condition
is
true
and the
total
number
processed records for which the condition
Relational Statistical Operators are used
is
or the percentage of
true.
to
summarize
field
information from a set of records in a related form.
There
is
a separate entry for each individual operator in this lexicon.
Operators

or
Keyword:
or
Type:
Logical Operator
Purpose: The or
Syntax:
See Also: between, not, and,

=, <, <=, >, >=
operator combines two sets of selection
SELECTION CRITERIA
Returns:
The values
in
or
SELECTION CRITERIA
criteria.
records that satisfy either of the selection
criteria statements.
Usage:
The or operator
requires that a record meet either of the
specified criteria to be processed (as opposed to the
and
operator which requires that a record meet all the specified

selection criteria to be processed).
When
selection criteria are
or operators
in
combined with both the and and

criteria must be enclosed in
one statement, the
parentheses to clarify the meaning.
Examples:
CUSTOMERS
for
or
This statement
that contain
the
tells
NY
with state = "NY"
DataBase: Process only those CUSTOMERS records

state field or have a value greater than $500 in
the
in
ACCOUNT BALANCE
field.
record
is
processed
if
it
satisfies either
of
these criteria.
for
CUSTOMERS with (state = "NY"

and ACCOUNT balance > 500
or
state = "NJ")
This statement
tells
that contain either
$500
in the
NY
or
NJ
in the
account balance
STATE
field
CUSTOMERS
and
records
a value greater than
field.
In this case, only records that satisfy both sets of criteria are processed.
6-137
Volume
DQL LEXICON
Others
Keyword:
others
Type:
Keyword
See Also: case, value
Purpose: The others keyword
command
is
an optional component of the case
When
syntax.
processing a case
DataBase compares the expression
command,
that follows case to
of the statements specified by the keyword value.
If
each
none of
the specified value comparisons are true. DataBase executes

the actions specified after the
keyword others. As soon as
the actions following any value or others statement are
executed, processing passes to the
end command
Syntax:
first
for the case statement.
case (EXPRESSION)
COMPARISON
value
ACTION SERIES
[value
COMPARISON
ACTION SERIES
[value
COMPARISON N
1.
2.1
ACTION SERIES N]
[others
OTHERS ACTION SERIES
end
The case command
Usage:
requires a case expression, one
comparison value, and an end command. Subsequent value

If
others
is
used,
must follow
it
keyword
all
are optional.
the specified
comparison
values.
Example:
"FRANK"
value "CAROL"
value
call
run procedure "DAILY"

others
.
end
This query
tells
DataBase:
ADMINISTRATION
Procedure.
display the
Volume
If
If the
menu.
If
is
Frank, display the

is
Carol, run the
DAILY
anyone other than Frank or Carol,

Record Entry form.
the current user
CUSTOMERS
current user
the current user
is
6-138

output
Keyword: output
Type:
Procedural
See Also: all, Nested Actions,

Primary Form, Relationships,
Secondary Form
Command
Purpose: The output command
used to write text or fields directly to
is
the output device during processing without regard to the
report format.
The
and
text
when
fields are sent to the screen or
command is encountered
without regard to grouping, formatting, or other command
printer immediately
The command
structures.
command found
Syntax:
output
FIELD
Usage:
the
in
is
very similar to the
many programming
PRINT
languages.
TEXT
The output command
lets
text directly in the qiieiy.
you specify output

In Interactive
fields and/or
Mode, when you
choose the output command. DataEase automatically

switches into Edit Mode and asks you to define what you
want to output. You can enter text (including titles, boundary
lines, etc.)
press
move
or
FIO FIELD
When you
the cursor to the desired location
For more information, see

"Editing Formats: Adding
and Modifying Fields" in
Chapter 5 of this volume.
and
to enter a field.
press FIO, DataEase displays the Report Field
Definition screen just as
You can
report format.
it
does when you are defining a
select a field
from the menu DataEase
displays or enter a field derivation in the Report Field
Formula Window. See "Adding and Modifying Fields" in

this volume for a detailed explanation of how
Chapter 5 of
to
generate output from fields.
The output command must be entered on
a separate line in
and be followed by a colon. You can use any

number of output commands in a single query. Following
each output command, you can enter any number of lines
the query
containing fields or
insert a period
text. Following the last

on a separate line in Column
After inserting an output
column
Mode.
insert a period in
to Interactive
-^
6-139
command
1
in
Edit
line to
I
be output,
of the query.
Mode, you must
of the query before you can return
Volume
DQL LEXICON
output (cont.)
To demonstrate
the use of the
query that appears
in the
output command. Example
entry for the for
shows a
command.
its impossible to completely align information processed and printed

sequence from two different forms, this query produces output that is
very difficult to read as shown below:
Since
in
Examplel
for
CUSTOMERS
records
LAST NAME
with
list
in
order
end
for
INVOICES
records
INVOICE # in order
list
ORDER TOTAL
end
LAST NAME
INVOICE #
Adams
Cooper
Evans
Hill
Ivers
A00005
ORDER TOTAL

output (cont.)
Example
2: output
LAST NAME
for
CUSTOMERS
list
LAST NAME
output
[LAST NAME]
end
with
records
in
order
DQL
LEXICON
output (cont.)
A common
usage of the output
command
multiple secondary or tertiary forms.
has 3 secondary forms:
is to process records from

For example, assume your database
OFFICERS. DIRECTORS, and EMPLOYEES,
Primary form: CORPORATION. The forms are

If you want to produce a report listing fields
from all these forms, you cannot use the all operator. However, you can
use the output command, as shown in Example 3.
that are all related to the
related by the field
Example
3:
CO
#.

output (cont.)
sample printout from the query
D. Vader, Inc.
in
Example
is
illustrated
below.
LEXICON
DQL
percent
Keyword: percent
See Also: item, count
Type:
Purpose: The percent
operator calculates the percentage of records that
satisfy a condition specified
Syntax:
Returns:
Example:
CONDITION
percent [other
by a comparison of two values.
statistical
operators]
numeric value.
for
CUSTOMERS
list
records
LAST NAME
in
order
ACCOUNT BALANCE
:
item percent
end
list each customer's LAST NAME in alphabetical order. 2) List each
customer's ACCOUNT balance. 3) For each customer, display a YES or
answer indicating if the ACCOUNT balance is over $500. 4) Display
the percentage of records that have a ACCOUNT BALANCE value greater
than $500 in the report output.
NO
The output from
LAST
this
periods
Keyword:
periods
Type:
Financial Function
Purpose: The periods
installment, presentvalue, rate
function calculates
how
long a financial
transaction requires to reach a future target value given the
presentvalue, futurevalue, installment payment, and interest

rate.
Syntax:
periods(presentvalue, futurevalue, installment, rate)
Returns:
numeric value (the number of periods needed
to reach the
target futurevalue of the investment).
Usage:
if the installment
investment
(e.g.,
positive amount.
investment
(e.g.,
payment increases
the value of the
an annuity), the installment

If the
payment decreases
is
expressed as a
the value of the
loan amortization), the installment
is
expressed as a negative amount.
The
be based on the same terms.
number of months,
12.
To determine
the rate
To determine
is
periods as a
expressed as 7 * annual rate
Examples: ceil(periods(10000,
Returns: 89
0,
periods as a
expressed as the annual rate
number of weeks,
the rate
is
365.
When
-150,8/12))
This example calculates how many months it takes to repay a loan of

$10,000 at 8% annual interest with monthly installment payments of $150.
The ceil function rounds up the result to the next integer.
8 1 12. DataBase requires that

you type a space before and
after the division symbol (I).
cell(periods(0, 10000, 250, 10/12))

Returns: 35
This example calculates how many months it takes to accumulate $10,000
in savings, if you begin with no money in the account, make monthly
deposits of $250, and earn 10% annual interest.
NOTE:
DataBase financial functions are derived from

shown below. (The double asterisks (meaning
power") cannot he used in a query).
the formula
"raise to the
* ((1 + (rate/IOO)) ** periods) +

(installmentl(ratellOO)) * (((1 + (rate/IOO)) ** periods) - I)
futurevalue = principal
6-145
Volume
DQL
LEXICON
power
Keyword: power
Type:
See Also: exp, log, loglO, sqrt
Scientific Function
Purpose: The power
function raises a numeric value to a specified
power.
power(BASE, EXPONENT)
Syntax:
Returns:
Usage:
DataBase does not support ** as a symbol for exponentiation.
numeric value equal
Use
the
power
Examples: power(12,
to the base raised to the exponent.
function instead.
2)
Returns:
144
power(6,
3)
Returns:
216
power(8, 1/3)
Returns: 2
Volume
6-146
presentvalue
Keyword: presentvalue
Type:
See Also: futurevalue
Financial Function
Purpose: The presentvalue

amount
installment, periods, rate
function calculates the required starting
for a financial transaction given the futurevalue,
installment payment, interest rate, and number of payment

periods.
Syntax:
presentvalue(futurevalue, installment, rate, periods)
Returns:
numeric value
(the initial value before
any installment
payments are made).
Usage:
If
payment increases
the installment
investment
(e.g.,
positive amount.
investment
(e.g.,
the value of the

If the
payment decreases
expressed as a
is
the value of the
is
The
be based on the same terms. For example,

expressed
in
the annual rate
the periods are

is
expressed as
2.
Examples: presentvalue(0,
Returns:
if
months, the monthly interest rate
-150, 7.9
When
12, 48)
DataBase requires
after the division symbol (/).
7.9
6156.12
12.
that
This example calculates the auto loan amount you can afford to borrow
an interest rate of 7.9% if you want to repay the loan in 48 monthly
payments of $150.
presentvalue(1 25000, 150, 10

Returns: 1514.00
at
12, 240)
This example calculates the required starting balance for a savings plan
designed to accrue a $125,000 balance in 20 years based on monthly
payments of $150 and an annual interest rate of 10%.
NOTE:
DataEa.se financial fiiiHiions are derived from the formula

shown below. (The double asterisks (meaning "raise to the
power") cannot he used
in
futurevalue = principal *
(installment/date/
6-147
won
a query).
((I
* (((1
+ (rate/ 100)) ** periods) +

+ (rate/ 100)) ** periods)
-
I)
Volume
LEXICON
DQL
Primary Form
Keyword: Primary Form

Type:
See Also: Ad-hoc

Relationship, all, output.
Relationships, Secondary
Concept
Form
Purpose: The first form specified in a query is called the Primary

form for the query. The Primary form should be the form
you want
that holds the key data
Usage:
One form can
to
view or manipulate.
be related to another form by either a
A form related to the

Secondary form. A form related
predefined or an ad-hoc relationship.
Primary Form
is
called a
a Secondary form
is
to
called a Tertiary form, etc. There can be
any number of such relationship levels (see Figure 6-1 below).
When
processing the records in a form, the data
form can be accessed

forms.
lowest of,
in
a relationship exists
relational operator (all, any,
mean
of, or
the related form.
records
if
The
sum
all
of)
is
in
another
between these
count
of,
highest of,
used to access the data
more than one form on any
relationship level
no more than one Secondary form, one Tertiary form,

However, you can use the output command to access
related records in
relationship level.
operator cannot be used to access
more than one form on
a particular
(i.e.,
etc.).
all

Procedural
Commands
See also: Control Procedure,
Processing Procedure
Keyword: Procedural Commands

Type:
Concept
Purpose: The
DQL
Procedural
commands
are used to organize and
control the flow of actions in a procedure.
Usage:
commands can
Procedural
be used
in
both Processing
Procedural
Commands
procedures and Control procedures.

output
Example:
message
case (spellweekday(weekday(current date))

value
"MONDAY"
if
:
run procedure
value "FRIDAY"
run procedure
others
"NEW WEEK"
else
.
end
"CLOSE WEEK"
while
break
menu "MAIN"
call
exit
.
case
value
end
This query
WEEK
tells
procedure.
If
Main Menu.
6-149
DataBase:
procedure.
If the
If the
current date
current date
the current date
is
is
is
NEW
others
CLOSE WEEK
define
assign
Monday, run
a Friday, run the
the
any other day of the week, display the
(period)
Volume
DQL
LEXICON
Processing Procedure
Keyword: Processing Procedure

Type:
Purpose:
See Also: Control Procedure
Concept
A DQL
Processing procedure can enter, delete, and modify
records, as well as create screen, disk, or printed output based
on the query
instructions, the data stored in database forms,
and additional data input during the execution of the

procedure.
Usage:
Processing
The Processing commands (shown at right) are used to create

a Processing procedure. These commands cannot be used in a
Control procedure, but they can be used within a Processing
procedure that
Example:
for
is
part of a Control procedure.
CUSTOMERS
list
Commands
records
modify records
delete records
enter a record
for
lock
unlock
records
LAST NAME in order
list
ACCOUNT BALANCE
quer>' selection
input
end
2) For each record processed, list the LAST name and the ACCOUNT
BALANCE values and arrange the output in alphabetical order by LAST
NAME.
Voluine 3
6-150
proper
Keyword: proper
Type:

Text Function
midw, textpos, upper
Purpose: The proper
function converts the
text value to uppercase,
Syntax:
Returns:
first letter in
and subsequent
each word
letters to
in a
lowercase.
proper(TEXT VALUE)
The
specified text value with the
first letter in
each word
capitalized.
Usage:
Any
letter that is
a period
is
preceded by a space, hyphen, ampersand, or
capitalized by the proper function as
letter in the
the first
is
parenthesized value. Other punctuation, including
the apostrophe, does nor act as a delimiter for the
proper
function.
letter that is neither the first letter in a
value
letter in the specified
is
word nor
the first
converted to lowercase by the
proper function.
This function
is
commonly used in the derivation formula

Form Definition. For example, if the
for text fields during
derivation for the field
last name
is:
proper(LAST .name)
you can enter the text

to the proper format.
in either
case and DataBase converts
it
Examples:proper{"dr. watson")
Returns: Dr. Watson
properC'washington d.c")
Returns: Washington D.C.
proper(FULL NAME)
Returns the value
the value sherlock homes, or
SHeiLOck hOLniES.
6-151
NAME
in the FLiLL
format for every record that
is
field in the
processed.
If
proper
a record contains
SHERLOCK HOLMES,
the function returns Sherlock
or even
Holmes.
Volume
DQL
LEXICON
query selection
Keyword: query
Type:
selection
Processing
Purpose: The query
See Also: lock, lock db,

unlock, unlock db
Command
selection
command is functional only on a LAN

This command is used to override the
default locking rules specified on the
form.
It
System Configuration
should only be used by a technical expert
very familiar both with DataBase and the

in use.
If
you do not have expertise
in
LAN
who
is
environment
LANs, you can
rely
on
the default locking rules to lock your data appropriately.
Before DataBase begins processing records for a query,
must
select the records to
command
tells
processing
if
indexed field.
an indexed
it
be processed. The query selection
DataBase how
to set locks prior to the start of
records are being selected or sorted on an

If
records are not being selected or sorted on
field, the
locking rule defined on the System
Configuration form for Record Processing applies.
Syntax:
query selection lock
files
records
nothing.
The three syntax options that are used in conjunction with

query selection command are explained below.
The query
selection lock files
command
the
overrides the current default
Record Selection locking rule and locks the fonn(s) from which records
are being selected. Other users cannot add, modify, or delete records in
the form. They can view records in the form if the selected records will
only he listed hy the procedure (not modified or deleted). The form
remains locked until the end of the procedure.
selection lock records command overrides the current default
Record Selection locking rule and locks any records that have been
selected for processing. Other users cannot modify or delete these
records. They can view the records if the selected records will only he
listed hy the procedure (not modified or deleted). Other users can view,
modify, or delete records in the same form(s) that have not been selected.
Once processing begins, the locking rule defined on the System
Configuration form for Record Processing applies.
The query
CAUTION .The
The default record selection

locking rules resolve any
conflict that
might arise when
other users attempt to view,

modify, or delete records that
have been selected to be
processed hy a report query.
LAN default locking rules, see
LAN Multi-User Locking

in Volume 2, Chapter
Options
4,
query selection lock records command should he used

It should only he used for procedures that
with great care.
from very few forms. If this command

used for many records, most LANs cannot support the
number of locks required. If this command is used
incorrectly, the integrity of your data can he compromised.
select very few records

is
Volume
6-152

query selection
The query
(cont.)
selection lock nothing
Record Selection
command
overrides the current default
and unlocks the form(s) from which records

are being selected. Other users can view, modify, or delete records that
have been selected for processing. Once processing begins, the locking
rule defined on the System Configuration form for Record Processing
loci<ing rule
applies.
The lock nothing command can be useful in situations where you need
keep data available to many users even while running a procedure that
to
uses that data. However, with this command in effect, it is possible for a
user to change a record that has already been selected for processing.
NOTE:
If a lock all files
query,
command occurs
as the first
command in a
commands specified on the

System Configuration form and any locking commands
specified later in the query. A lock all files command locks
all files used by the procedure until an unlock command is
overrides all locking
it
encountered or the procedure ends, regardless of subsequent

commands. See the lock command earlier in this chapter for
more
Usage:
information.
The query
selection
command
overrides the
Record Selection locking rules assigned by

administrator. A query selection command
terminated
Example:
at the
default
is
automatically
end of a query.
query selection lock nothing

for
LAN
the database
CUSTOMERS
with
bonus points > 500
modify records
ACCOUNT BALANCE
DISCOUNT)
:=
(ACCOUNT BALANCE
data-entry
end
This query
tells DataBase: 1) Override the default Record Selection

locking rule so other users can view, add, delete, or modify the data in the
CUSTOMERS form while records are selected to be processed by this
procedure. 2) Select all the CUSTOMERS records whose BONUS points
are greater than 500. 3) Modify each selected record by multiplying the
ACCOUNT BALANCE amount by
the value in the
discount
field
on the
Data-entry form.
In this
example many records may be selected to be processed. However,

still access the CUSTOMERS form while the procedure
is
users can
processing.
It is
below 500 while
6-153
unlikely that any customer's

the query
is
bonus points
will fall
being processed.
Volume
DQL LEXICON
random
Keyword: random
See Also: abs,
Type:
ceil, floor,
mod
Math Function
Purpose: The random

between
function returns a
and
(inclusive).
random decimal value
No
value
is
required in the
function's argument.
Syntax:
random(
Returns:
A number
Usage:
The following
using the
between
and
(inclusive).
steps are used to generate a
random
Determine the range (number of
1.
random number must

is
In the
Use
3.
fall.
possibilities) in
is
if
the desired range
90.
the starting value
the following formula to generate a
which the
The
result of the random

is really a
pseudo-random number
calculated by a formula, not a
true random number.
starting value (smallest integer) of the range.
example 10-100,
(random(
integer
function
For example,
between 10 and 100, the range
Determine
2.
random
function:
RANGE)
is
10.
random
integer.
STARTING VALUE
Examples: floor(random( * 9)
Returns: A random integer between
)
floor(random(
Returns:
*
)
9.
90) + 10))
integer between 10 and 100.
A random
In these examples, floor rounds
Volume
and
down
the result to the nearest integer.
6-154

rate
Keyword:
rate
Type:
Financial Function
Purpose: The

installment, periods,
presentvalue
rate function calculates the interest rate of a financial
transaction given the presentvalue. futurevalue. installment
payment, and the number of payment periods.
Syntax:
rate{presentvalue, futurevalue, installment, periods)
Returns:
Usage:
If the
numeric value
installment
investment
(e.g.,
positive amount.
investment
(e.g..
(the interest rate).
payment increases
the value of the

If
the
payment decreases
is
expressed as a
the value of the
is
The
be based on the same terms.
periods

If
payments are made monthly,
computed as the number of years * (multiplied by)

12 and rate is computed as 1/12 of the annual rate.
Examples:
is
12 * rate(12000,
Returns: 7.3
0,
When
10
DataBase requires
after the division symbol (/).
1
12,
that
-289, 48)
This example calculates the annual interest rate on a $12,000 car loan
be repaid in 48 monthly payments of $289.
to
12 * rate(0, 20000, 250, 60)

Returns: 10.2
This example calculates the annual interest rate required to accumulate
$20,000 in savings, if you begin with no money in the account and make
monthly payments of $250 over a period of 5 years.
NOTE:
DataBase financial functions are derived from

shown below. (The double asterisks (meaning
power") cannot be used in a query).
futurevalue = principal *
((I
(installmentl(ralellOO)) * (((/
6-155
the formula
"raise to the
+ (rate/ 100)) ** periods) +

+ (rate/100)) ** periods)
-
I)
Volume
DQL LEXICON
record entry
Keyword: record entry

Type:
Control
See Also: data entry, input
Command
Purpose: The record entry command

Record Entry form
Syntax:
record entry
tells
DataBase
"FORMNAME"
The record entry command allows records
Usage:
modified
in the specified
procedure.
either
to display the
for the specified database form.
You
form
can enter as
Form View
at
many
records as you like, using
or Table View.
Unlike the input command, the record entry

provides
all
be entered or
to
any point during a Control
command
the functions available through the
option on the
Main Menu, including
The record entry command

functions like selecting Record
Entry (Option 2) on the Main
Menu and then selecting the
form you want to use from the
Records menu. For further
explanation, see Volume 1
Chapter 2, Record Entry.
Record Entry
the ability to add,
modify
and delete records.
When you
finish entering records
and press ESC, the Control
procedure resumes with the action following the record entry
command.
Example:

db status
.
DataEase: 1) Display the CUSTOMERS form so the

new customer records. 2) When the operator finishes
entering records, run the PRINT INVOICES procedure. 3) After running
the procedure, display the status of the current database.
This query
tells
operator can enter
Volume
6-156

Relational Statistical Operators
Keyword:
See Also: Conditional
Relational Statistical Operators
Statistical Operators,
Statistical
Type:
Operator
Purpose:
Relational Statistical Operators are used to generate statistical
information on the values in the specified field

records
in a
related form
to the record that
(i.e.,
in
a set of
a set of records that are related
currently being processed, such as
is
Operators
all
the
invoices for an individual customer).
Syntax:
relational statistical operator
|
"UNIQUE RELATIONSHIP NAME")

FIELDNAME
[named
Usage:
To
generate statistics on a field in a related form:
Relational Statistical
Operators
1.
Insert the Relational Statistical Operator followed
of the related form or the
name of
by the name
count of
the relationship.
highest of
lowest of
2.
Assign a unique name

the
named
to the relationship if
necessary using
operator.
any desired selection
criteria in parentheses.
3.
Insert
4.
Insert the field name followed by a semicolon or a period,

depending on the location of the statement in the query.
The
Relational Statistical Operators are:
lowest of,
mean
of,
and
mean of
sum of
sum
count
of,
highest of,
of.
The count of operator counts the number of related records,

not field values. The field name is omitted at the end of the
count of statement.
The highest of and lowest of operators can be used on both

Text and
ASCII
Number
highest of returns the highest
fields,
field value in the set of related records,
returns the lowest
ASCII
The sum of and mean of operators
sum
are used
of returns the total of the field values
records,
mean
lowest of
field value.
on number
in the set
fields.
of related
of returns the averaj-e of the field values
in
the set of related records.
Each Relational
Statistical
Operator
is
treated as a separate
entry in this lexicon.
6-157
Volume
DQL LEXICON
Relationships
Keyword:
Relationships
Type:
Concept
See Also: Ad-hoc

Relationship, all, any, count
of, highest of, lowest of,
Purpose: A Relationship
whether
in the
is
two groups of records

in
two groups of records
a link between
same form or
in
two
are related,
different forms.
mean
of,
sum of
When
you can access information
one group while processing records
other group.
in the
DataEase employs two types of relationships.

In a predefined relationship, the
related
is
by a
link entered
two groups of records are
on a Relationships form. The link
created by specifying one or
more
fields that hold the
information in both groups. Because this relationship

stored in the database,
it
can be used
in different
same
is
For more information on
this
topic, see "Define
Relationships" in Volume 2,
Chapter 2. Form Definition
and Relationships.
procedures
whenever necessary.
An ad-hoc
relationship
creating a query.
is
a relationship that
is
defined while
Although an ad-hoc relationship can be
like a predefined relationship to access information in
used
another group of records, the relationship isn't stored as a

Therefore,
part of the database.
procedure
Usage:
in
which
it
is
In a query, a value in a related
called a relationship value.

in a
it
can only be used in the
defined.
form or group of records
is
relationship value can be used
query wherever you can use a
field, a
constant value, or
a variable (such as in selection criteria, as a
list
item, or as a
value assigned to a temporary or global variable).
Once
a relationship
Operators
let
is
DQL Relational
established, the
you access and manipulate values
form. For example,
if
the query
is
processing
in the related
CUSTOMERS
records, the statement:
sum
sums
of
the
INVOICES ORDER total
order total field for each related invoice (every

CUSTOMER # as the CUSTOMERS
invoice with the same
record that
is
currently being processed).
The use of each of
the Relational Operators
is
covered
in a
separate entry in this lexicon.
Volume
6-158

reorganize
Keyword: reorganize
Type:
See Also: backup db. db
Command
Control
status, restore
Purpose: The reorganize command

Syntax:
reorganize
Usage:
"FORMNAME
reorganizes the specified form.
"
The formname, which can be

enclosed
When
in
is
reorganized,
deleted since the
and
all
a constant or a variable,
must be
quotes.
a form
last
db
all
The reorganize command

Reorganize a Form (Option
5) on the
records that have been
reorganization are permanently erased
indices used to organize the data in the form are
Form
Definition
menu. For further explanation,

see Volume 2. Chapter 2,
Form Definition.
recreated.
form has become inconsistent (signalled by an
If the
message), the reorganize
form and returns
in the
On
LAN:
LAN
command
the
form
to a consistent status.
if
another user
using any resource required by the reorganize
DataBase displays
message
the
is
is
currently
command,
Resource Conflict message. While
this
displayed, DataBase automatically tries to execute
command
at brief intervals.
procedure during
When
error
reorganizes the records
this time,
If
you want
you must reboot
becomes
to abort the
the computer.
available,
DataBase

procedure. See
for
Volume
2,
Chapter
4,
conflicts
and Multi-User
Locking Options.
Example:
reorganize
run report
This query
2)
When
tells
"CUSTOMERS"
"PRINT INVOICES"
DataBase: 1) Reorganize the CUSTOMBRS form.

is completed, run the PRINT INVOICES
the reorganization
procedure.
6-159
Voluine 3
DQL LEXICON
Report Format
Keyword: Report Format

See Also: Chapter 5 Report
Formatting, in this manual.
.
Type:
Concept
Purpose: A Report Format
tells
DataBase how
the field values, statistics,
DQL
Procedure.
titles,
to lay out the information
eight Report Formatting
text generated
by a
report format consists of three elements:
Report Formatting Commands: Commands
how
to physically lay out
and other
that tell
DataBase
generated by the procedure. The
Commands
are:
.header, .footer, .group header,
.items, .group trailer, .end, .page, and .call.
Form
Text: Descriptive text such as the Report Title, Column Headers,

Page Numbers, Boundary Lines, etc. You enter Form Text in the format
directly where you want it to appear in the report output.
Fields:
Locations where the field values from the records processed by
the procedure actually appear in the report output.
move
To
insert a field in a
where you want the field

values to appear, press FIO FIELD, and then select the field from the
menu DataBase displays.
report format,
the cursor to the position
A sample report that indicates which elements in the output are controlled
by various Formatting commands is shown below. For complete
information on Report Formatting refer to Chapter 5 in this manual.
DOUN EAST COMPANY

Monthly Report
October 1989
header
.footer
Marketing Departnent
*-
.group header
Departnent Total
Grand Total
Figure 6-2
Volume
Sample
itens
.group trailer
.end
Page Z
Report Showing Formatting
Commands
6-160

restore
db
Keyword:
restore
db
Type:
Control
Command
Purpose: The
(restore database)
restore
See Also: backup db, db

status, reorganize
db command
recreates a database.
processing reaches a restore

a series of prompts asking
you
to specify the drive
the database should be restored
any errors
Syntax:
Usage:
restore
db
When
db command, DataBase
and how you want
displays
on which
to
handle
occur during the restore procedure.
that
When you backup
a database using the
backup db command,
DataBase copies the database using a special format. The
backup copy can only be used

DataBase restore db
after
command
it
is
restored using the
or Maintenance
When you backup and
restore a database,
been deleted since the
last
all
menu
option.
records that have
backup and restore operation are
On
LAN
if
another user
using any resource required by the restore
is
currently
db command,
message
the
is
this
displayed, DataBase automatically tries to execute
command
If you want
you must reboot
at brief intervals.
procedure during
When
on the Maintenance menu.

database backup and restore
procedures, see Volume 1,
Chapter 4. Database
Maintenance.
permanently erased.
LAN:
The restore db command

Restore Database (Option 3)
this time,
becomes
to abort the
the computer.
available,
DataBase
procedure. See
for
Volume
2,
Chapter
4,
conflicts
and Multi-User
Locking Options.
Example:

.
backup db
restore db
This query tells DataBase: 1) Display the CUSTOMBRS form so the

entering records, run the
PRINT INVOICES procedure. 3) Make a

When the backup procedure
backup copy of the current database. 4)
is
complete, begin the procedure to restore the database from the backup
copy.
6-161
Volume 3
DQL LEXICON
run procedure
Keyword: run procedure

Type:
Control
See Also: call menu, call
Command
program
Purpose: The run procedure command runs

Syntax:
run procedure
the specified procedure.
"PROCEDURE NAME"
The run procedure command automatically loads and runs
Usage:
previously defined procedure.
When
the procedure
finished, the Control Procedure automatically
the action following the
is
resumes with
run procedure command.
The procedure name can be
a constant or any expression
(including functions) that returns a text string.
Example:

db status
The run procedure command

functions like selectini; Run
Procedure (Option 1 ) on the
DQL or QBE - Quick Reports
menu. For details see Chapter
2, Defining, Modifying, and
Running Procedures
in this
manual.
DataBase: 1) Display the CUSTOMERS form so the

new customer records. 2) When the operator finishes
entering records, run the PRINT INVOICES procedure. 3) Display the
status of the current database.
This query
tells
operator can enter
Volume
6-162

seconds
I
Keyword: seconds
Type:
Purpose: The seconds

expressed
Syntax:
Returns:
See Also: ampm. current.

hour, minutes, timeampm
Time Function
in
function extracts the seconds from a time value
24-hour format.
seconds(TIME VALUE)
An
integer value from
00
to 59.
Examples: seconds(09:15:34)
Returns:
34
seconds(02:53:20)
Returns: 20
seconds(CHECK-ouT time)
Returns the seconds value
in the checkout time field

every record that is processed. If a record
contains the value 07:30:25, the function returns 25.
for
6-163
Volumes
DQL LEXICON
Secondary Form
Keyword: Secondary Form
Type:
See Also: Ad-hoc

Relationship, all. output.
Primary Form, Relationships
Concept
Purpose: A form
Form
related to the Priman.'
is
called a
Secondary
form.
One form can be
Usage:
related to another
form by
predefined or an ad-hoc relationship.
Primary Form
a Secondary
is
called a
form
is
either a
form related
Secondary form.
to the
form related
to
called a Tertiary form. etc. There can be
any number of such relationship levels (see Figure 6-3 below).
When
processing the records
form can be accessed

forms.
in a
form, the data
mean
of. or
the related form.

in
The
in
another
a relationship exists between these
relational operator (all, any.
lowest of.
records
if
sum
all
of)
is
count
of.
highest of.
used to access the data
in
operator cannot be used to access
more than one form on any
relationship level
(i.e..
no more than one Secondan,- form, one Tertiary form.
etc.).
However, you can use the output command to access

more than one form on a particular
all
related records in
relationship level.
Prinary Forn
Secondary Forn
Tertiary Fern
Tertiary Forn
Figure 6-3
Volume
Secondary Forn
- Forms and
Tertiary Forn
Tertiary Forn
Relationship Levels
6-164

Selection Criteria
Keyword:
Selection Criteria
Type:
Concept
Purpose:
In a quer>',
Sec Also: and, or, with.

you can
tell
specified form, or only
DataBase
some of
to select all the records in a
the records.
The
which records are selected
factors that determine
limiting
for
processing are called selection criteria.
The
tell DataBase to compare the value in the specified

each record to a comparison value that you specify in the query.
When the procedure is run, the records that meet the defined selection
criteria are processed. Records that do not meet the criteria are not
selection criteria
field in
processed.
For example, the statement:
CUSTOMERS
for
tells
DataBase
greater than
to process only the
500
in the
with
CUSTOMBRS
ACCOUNT balance
There are two situations
in
which selection
records that have a value
field.
criteria
must be enclosed
in
parentheses:
Criteria
must be enclosed
in
parentheses
when used with
on the values stored
relational operator to select records based
in a
form other than the Primary form.
Example:
for
CUSTOMERS
with
(sum
of
INVOICES order
TOTAL > 500)

This statement
whose
related
tells
DataBase to process only the CUSTOMBRS records

have a combined ORDER TOTAL that is greater
INVOICBS
than 500.
2.
When two
sets
of selection criteria are combined with the and and
or operators, the
criteria
must be enclosed
in
parentheses to clarify
the meaning.
Example:
for
CUSTOMERS
with (state = "NY" or state = "NJ")
and account balance > 500

This statement
in either
that
is
6-165
tells
New York
DataBase
or
New
to
process only the
Jersey
CUSTOMBRS who
live
and who have an ACCOUNT balance
greater than 500.
Volume
DQL LEXICON
Sin
Keyword:
sin
Type:
Purpose: The
See Also: acos.asin.atan,

COS. cosh. sinh. tan. tanh
sin function calculates the sine of an angle expressed in
radians.
Syntax:
sin(NUMERIC VALUE)
Returns:
numeric value.
Examples: sin(2.53)
Returns:
0.574172
sin(-3)
Returns:
Volume
-0.14112
6-166

sinh
Keyword:
sinh (hyperbolic sine)
Type:
See Also: acos, asin. atan,
Purpose: The sinh
cos, cosh, sin, tan, tanfi
function calculates the hyperbolic sine of an angle
expressed in radians.
Syntax:
Returns:
sinh(NUMERIC VALUE)
numeric value.
Examples: sinh(2.53)
Returns: 6.2369235
sinh(-4.4)
Returns: -40.71929
6-167
Volume
DQL LEXICON
Sorting
Sorting lets you process records and generate the resulting output in either
ascending or descending order based on the values in the specified field.
^^^ A/50; Grouping, in order,

in reverse
order operator sorts records in sequence from

value based on the type of field as follows:
The
in
Text: alphabetical order A-Z)
Number:
Date: earliest
Time:
Choice: lowest
least to greatest
numerical value
least to greatest
to latest date
earliest to latest time
Example:
for
to highest
STATES
list
records
STATE NAME
end
The output from
this
numbered choice
in
Order
STATE NAME
Alabama
Alaska
Arizona
Wyoming
The
in reverse operator sorts records in greatest to least sequence.

For example, if we change the third line of the query to:
STATE NAME
The output
is
in
reverse
reversed:
STATE NAME
Wyoming
Wisconsin
West
Virginia
Alabama
Volume
6-168

spellcurrency
Keyword:
spellcurrency
Type:
Spell Function
Purpose: The spellcurrency
See Also: spelldate.

spellmonth. spellnumber,
spellweekday
function spells the monetary equivalent of
a numeric value.
Syntax:
Returns:
Examples
spellcurrency(NUMERIC VALUE)
text value
spellcurrency(36.25)
Returns: Thirty Six Dollars and 25 Cents
spellcurrency(210.00)
Returns: Two Hundred Ten Dollars and 00 Cents
spellcurrency(SALARY)
Returns the spelled-out currency amount in the salary
contains the value 605.75, the function returns Six
Hundred and Five Dollars and Seventy-Five Cents.
6-169
Volume
DQL LEXICON
spelldate
Keyword:
spelldate
Type:
Spell Function
Purpose: The
Syntax:
Returns:
spelldate function spells a date value in
See Also: spellcurrency

spellmonth. spellnumber.
spellweekday
common
form.
spelldate(DATE VALUE)
text value.
Examples: spelldate(07/01/89)
Returns: July 1, 1989
spelldate( 12/31/89)
Returns: December 31, 1989
spelldate(highest of INVOICES date)

Returns: The spelled-out value in the most recent
invoice's date field. If the most recent INVOICES
record contains the value 10/31/89 in the date field,
the function returns October 31, 1989.
Volumes
6-170

spellmonth
Keyword: spellmonth
Type:
See Also: spellcurrency.

spelldate. spellnumber,
spellweekday
Spell Function
Purpose: The spellmonth
function spells the
name
corresponds to a numeric value from
of the month that
(January) to 12
(December).
Syntax:
spellmonth(NUMERIC VALUE)
Returns:
Usage:
The
text value.
input value must be an integer between
and 12
(inclusive).
Examples: spellmonth(7)
Returns:
July
spellmonth(month(1 2/31/89)
Returns:
December
of INVOICES date))
Returns: The name of the month that corresponds to
the value in the most recent invoice's date field.
If the most recent INVOICES record contains the
value 10/31/89 in the date field, the function
returns October.
spellmonth(month(highest
6-171
Volume
DQL LEXICON
spellnumber
Keyword: spellnumber
Type:

spelldate. spellmonth.
spellweekday
Spell Function
Purpose: The spellnumber
function spells the integer portion of a
numeric value.
Syntax:
spellnumber(NUMERIC VALUE)
Returns:
Usage:
spellnumber accepts any number value up
text value.
to
2,147.483.647.
spellnumber(999999999) returns Nine Hundred Ninety Nine

Million, Nine
Hundred Ninety Nine Thousand, Nine Hundred
Ninety Nine.
Examples: spellnumber(3.45)
Returns: Three
spellnumber(323.45)
Returns: Three Hundred Twenty Three
spellnumber(cusTOMER
#)
Returns the spelled-out number in the customer #

contains the value 309512, in the customer # field,
the function returns Three Hundred Nine Thousand
Five
Volume
Hundred Twelve.
6-172

spellweekday
Keyword: spellweekday
Type:

spelldate. spellmonth,
spellnumber
Spell Function
Purpose: The spellweekday
name
function spells the
corresponds to a numeric value from
of the day that
(Monday)
to 7
(Sunday).
Syntax:
Returns:
spellweekday(NUMERIC VALUE)
text value.
Examples: spellweekday(5)
Returns: Friday
spellweekday(weekday(1 2/31/89)
Returns:
Sunday
spellweekday(weekday(highest of INVOICES date))

Returns: The name of the day that corresponds to the
value in the most recent invoice's date field.
If the most recent INVOICES record contains the
value 10/31/89 in the date field, the function
returns Tuesday.
6-173
Volume
DQL LEXICON
sqrt
Keyword:
sqrt (square root)
Type:
Scientific Function
See Also
exp. log. loglO.
power
Purpose: The
sqrt function calculates the square root of a numeric
value.
Syntax:
sqrt(NUMERIC VALUE)
Returns:
Usage:
The sqrt function should only be used on a
numeric value.
the input value
Examples:
is
negative, the result
is
positive value.
If
unpredictable.
sqrt(9)
Returns:
sqrt(16)
Returns:
Sqrt(FLOOR SPACE)
Returns the square root of the value in the floor
SPACE field for every record that is processed. If a
record contains the value 16000 in the floor space
field,
Volumes
the function returns 40.
6-174

Operators
Statistical
Keyword:
Statistical
Type:
Operator
Purpose:
Statistical
statistical
See Also: Conditional

Statistical Operators,
Relational Statistical
Operators
Operators
Operators (shown
at right) are
used to generate
information on number fields that appear as
list
items in a query.
Syntax:
FIELDNAME
statistical
operator
Statistical
Usage:
To
Operators
generate statistics on a field:
Item
by a colon.
1.
Insert the fieldname followed
2.
After the colon, insert the appropriate statistical operators.
3.
After the
last
max
operator, insert a semicolon or a period,
mean
min
std.dev.
std.err.
depending on the location of the operator

Statistical
field (Dollar, Integer,
You may
If
many
use as
you use any
fields.
each by a space.
operator and you want the field value
listed in addition to the statistical information,
Statistical
variance
operators as you want on a given field.
statistical
include the item
sum
Fixed Point, and Floating Point).
after another, separating
Each
query.
Operators can be used on any type of number
They cannot be used on Numeric String
one
in the
operator after the field
Operator
is
you must
name.
treated as a separate entry in this
Lexicon.
6-175
Volume
DQL LEXICON
std.dev.
Keyword:
std.dev. (standard deviation)
Type:
Statistical
Purpose: The
See Also: item, max, mean,

min, std.err.. sum. variance
Operator
std.dev. operator calculates the standard deviation (the
square root of the variance) in a set of data. The result

usually appears as a statistic in the
end of a
value
Syntax:
summary
area at the
report.
std.dev. [other statistical operators]
Returns:
Usage:
Standard deviation
numeric value.
set
of data
is
(68% of
used as an indicator of variability
the data set
is
contained
in a
in the first
standard deviation).
The
std.dev. operator can also be used in Quick Reports.
To
generate the standard deviation in a Quick Report, type

std.dev. in the selected
Example:
for
CUSTOMERS
field area.
list
with
records
last name in order
list
ACCOUNT BALANCE
item
sum
std.dev.
end
This query tells DataBase: 1) Process
have a value greater than $500 in the
the customers by
LAST NAME
all
the
CUSTOMERS
ACCOUNT BALANCE
in alphabetical order.
records that
field.
2) List
3) List each
customer's ACCOUNT balance amount, the sum of these amounts, and the
standard deviation in the report output.
The output from
LAST NAME
this
ACCOUNT BALANCE
Adams
$595.00
$725.00
$865.00
$525.00
$675.00
Cooper
Evans
Hill
Ivers
SUM ACCOUNT BALANCE

STD.DEV.
Volume
IN
DATA SET
$3,385.00
$129.88
6-176

std.err.
Keyword:
std.err.
Type:
Statistical
Purpose: The

min, std.dev., sum, variance
Operator
std.err. operator calculates the standard error (the
standard deviation divided by the square root of the
of items)
in a set
statistic in the
Syntax:
value
number
of data. The result usually appears as a
summary
area at the end of a report.
std.err. [other statistical operators]
Returns:
Usage:
Standard error
numeric value.
of data;
if
is
used as an indicator of variability in a subset
the standard error of the
overlap, the subsets
same data
The
may
mean
of two data sets
be considered to be
members of
the
set.
std.err. operator can also be used in
Quick Reports. To
generate the standard error in a Quick Report, type std.err.

the selected
Example:
for
list
CUSTOMERS
list
in
field area.
with
records
LAST name
in
order
ACCOUNT balance
end
item
sum
std.dev. std.err.
have a value greater than $500 in the ACCOUNT balance field. 2) List
the customers by last name in alphabetical order. 3) List each
customer's ACCOUNT balance and include the standard deviation,
standard error, and the sum of all the account balance amounts in the
report output. The output from this query might look as follows:
LAST NAME
ACCOUNT BALANCE
Adams
~$595T00
$725.00
$865.00
$525.00
Cooper
Evans
Hill
$675.00
Ivers
SUM ACCOUNT BALANCE

STD.DEV.
STD.ERR.
6-177
IN
IN
DATA SET
DATA SET
$3,385.00
$129.88
$58.09
Volume 3
DQL LEXICON
sum
Keyword: sum
Type:
Statistical
Purpose: The sum

all
operator adds the values in a specified field
among
the records that are processed.
value sum
Syntax:

min, std.dev., std.err., variance
Operator
Returns:
Usage:
The value returned by
numeric value
where
it
appears
defined by
the
sum
in the report
operator differs depending on
The sum value
format.
statistical
its
position as follows:
operator
Running
the last item
on
through the
total
Items:
Running
Group Header:
Group Trailer:
Not applicable
Sub-total for group
item on
End:
Report grand
CUSTOMERS
list
with
through the current item
total
sum
of.
returns the total of the

values in the specified field
among
last
the current page
for
sum and
sum
the previous page
Footer;
operator
Not applicable
Running total through
Report Header:
Header:
Example:
difference hetv,een the
is
the records being
processed,
sum of returns
the total of the values in

the specified field among the
records related to the records

being processed.
total
ACCOUNT balance > 500
records
last name in order

ACCOUNT balance
item
sum
end
have a value greater than $500 in the ACCOUNT BALANCE field. 2) List
the customers by last name in alphabetical order. 3) List each
ACCOUNT balance and include the sum of all the account

BALANCE amounts in the report output. The output from this query might
customer's
look as follows:
LAST NAME
ACCOUNT BALANCE
Adams
$595.00
$725.00
$865.00
$525.00
$675.00
Cooper
Evans
Hill
Ivers
SUM ACCOUNT BALANCE

Volume
$3,385.00
6-178

sum
of
Keyword: sum
Type:
of
See Also: all. any. count of.

highest of. lowest of, mean of,
named.
Purpose: The sum of operator adds

matching records
a
list
item
summary
the values in a specified field in
in a related
form.
The
result
can appear as
area of the report or as a statistic
in the detail
all
in
the
area at the end of each group or the end of the
report.
Syntax:
Returns:
sum of FORMNAME RELATIONSHIP [named "UNIQUE

|
Example:
numeric value.
for
CUSTOMERS
;
statistical
records
LAST NAME in order
list
sum
of
operator
of.
among
the records being
sum of returns
of the values in the
processed,
the total
specified field
among
the
records related to the records

being processed.
records.
The output from
LAST NAME
this
SUM OF INVOICES ORDER TOTAL
Adams
$595.00
$725.00
$865.00
$525.00
$675.00
Cooper
Evans
Hill
Ivers
you want
sum
returns the total of the

values in the specified field
This query tells DataBase: 1) FVocess all the CUSTOMERS records and
list each customer's last name in alphabetical order. 2) For each
CUSTOMERS record processed, find all the related records in the
INVOICES form (those that have the same CUSTOMER #). 3) List the sum
of the ORDER total field for each customer in the set of matching
If
sum and
sum
end
INVOICES
operator
to include the
sum of
this
whole group of invoices, change
the
fourth line of the query to read:
sum
6-179
of
item
sum
Volume
DQL
LEXICON
tan
Keyword:
tan (tangent)
Type:
Purpose: The tan

cos, cosh, sin, sinh, tanh
function calculates the tangent of an angle expressed
in radians.
Syntax:
tan(NUMERIC VALUE)
Returns:
numeric value.
Examples: tan(2.53)
Returns:
-0.701292
tan(-1.89)
Returns: -3.025665
Volume
6-180

tanh
Keyword: tanh
(hyperbolic tangent)
cos, cosh, sin, sinh, tan
Type:
Purpose: The tanh
function calculates the hyperbolic tangent of an
angle expressed
Syntax:
Returns:
in radians.
tan(NUMERIC VALUE)
numeric value.
Examples: tanh(2.53)
Returns:
0.987388
tanh(1.45)
Returns; -0.895692
6-181
Volume
DQL LEXICON
temp
Keyword: temp
See Also: assign, define,
global, variable
Keyword
Type:
Purpose: The keyword temp

temp VARIABLE
Syntax:
Usage:
NAME
Tiie iceyword
temp
used
variable
is
specifies a temporary variable.
specifies a temporary variable.
to store a value
such as a text string or a
calculated result that can change during the processing of a
procedure.
By
specifying the variable's name, the stored
value can be used like any other value in a query.

temp).
temporary variable can only hold a value during the current
procedure.
A global
variable can pass
another.
To
variable
must be defined
Example:
define
for
its
pass a value from one procedure to another, a

INVOICES
with
order total > 500

modify records
ORDER total
;=
:=
(ORDER total
(ORDER TOTAL
0.15)
temp DISCOUNT)
end
This query
DataEase: 1) Create (define) a temporary variable called

number while processing the current query.
2) Give (assign) the DISCOUNT variable a number value determined by
multiplying the order total on each invoice by 15%. 3) Find all the
INVOICES records that have a value greater than $500 in the ORDER
tells
DISCOUNT
TOTAL
of the
field.
to store a
4)
Modify these INVOICES records by subtracting the value

variable from the value in the ORDER TOTAL field.
DISCOUNT
Volume
6-182
DAT
EASE REFERENCE MANUAL
textpos
Keyword:
textpos
Type:
Text Function

firstw,jointext, lastc, lastfirst,
Purpose: The textpos
function returns the
first
position of a substring in
midw, proper, upper
a specified text value.
Syntax:
Returns:
textpos(TEXT value, substring)
An
integer value that indicates the position where the
substring begins in the specified value.
Usage:
The textpos function is not case sensitive (no

made between upper and lower case letters).
If the
substring
is
contained
distinction
is
in the specified text value, the
starting position of the first (leftmost) character in the
substring
If the
is
returned.
substring
returns 0.
is
not contained
in the text value, the
function
Intervening spaces and punctuation symbols are
included in the calculation. Trailing spaces are ignored.
Examples: textpos("DataEase", "Ease")

Returns: 5
textpos("DataEase International
Inc.", "national")
Returns: 15
textpOS(BOOK
TITLE, "wi"),
position of the string wi in every

record that is processed. If a record contains the
value Gone With The Wind in the book title field,
Returns the
first
6-183
Volume
DQL
LEXICON
timeampm
Keyword: timeampm
Type:
Time Function
Purpose: The timeampm
See Also: ampm, current,

hours, minutes, seconds
function converts a time value from a
24-hour format
appropriate
Syntax:
to a
2-hour format and appends the
AM or PM designation.
timeampm(TIME VALUE)
Returns:
text value representing the
of either
Usage:
AM
or
2-hour clock time with a suffix
PM.
Converts time values from midnight (00:00:00)
AM.
to
Converts time values from noon (12:00:001
to
:59:59 to
23:59:59
toPM.
Examples: timeampm(1 3:53:1 2)

Returns
01:53:12
timeampm(1
Returns:
1:1
PM
0:30)
11:10:30
AM
timeampm(CHECK-ouT
time)
Returns the value in the checkout time field in the

12-hour clock format and adds the correct suffix for
the value 19:30:25 in the check-out time field, the
function returns 07:30:25 PM.
Volume
6-184

Transaction Processing
Keyword: Transaction Processing

Type:
Concept
Purpose: Transaction Processing
is
modify, and delete records

a single form.
a technique that lets

in multiple
you
enter.
forms using input from
transaction processing procedure lets
update the information
in the
you
database without having to
physically enter the data into each form in record entry mode.
Because
it
saves time and reduces the possibility of keying
errors, transaction processing
is
widely used for point-of-sale
applications to automate customer billing and inventory
maintenance.
Usage:
With DataBase, each transaction is entered using the

Data-entry form or the input command. After the data
entered,
it is
processed by a predefined
DQL
is
Procedure that
automatically posts the information into the appropriate

related forms.
The High Level Control procedure presented
in Chapter 4 of
manual demonstrates the use of transaction processing in
a mail-order business that uses a special Order Entry form to
this
post information into several database forms (as
shown below).
DQL LEXICON
unlock
Keyword: unlock
Type:
See Also: lock, lock db. query

selection, unlock db
Processing
Command
Purpose: The unlock command

DataBase on a
command
LAN
is
when running
only functional
(Local Area Network). The unlock
unlocks locked forms or records allowing other
users full access to the data.
Syntax:
unlock
all files
The unlock
file
selected record
command
all files
by the procedure.
If
unlock
unlocks all forms referenced
all files is the first
statement
the query, the default locking rules are overridden and

is
locked by individual records.
You may
selective basis using the lock file
The unlock
file
command
lock
command.
files statement, the
In a
data
lock forms on a
command.
unlocks the specified form for the
duration of the procedure, or until the same form

in a
all
in
is
specified
query that begins with a lock
unlock
file
command
lets
all
you unlock
The default LAN Multi-User

Locking Options entered on
the System Configuration form
resolve conflicts that arise
when users attempt to view,

modify, or delete records in a
form at the same time the form
is being accessed by a report
queiy. For more information
see Volume 2. Chapter 4.
forms selectively, while the other forms referenced by the

query remain locked.
The unlock selected records command unlocks
the record
that is currently being processed.
locking rules
are overridden by an
unlock
If the default
unlock
all files or
file
command,
DataBase automatically locks a record from the time

selected for processing until the next record
is
it
is
selected.
Often, significant processing not involving the locked record
may
take place.
By
using the lock and unlock selected
record commands, you can reduce the amount of time a

record remains locked.
LAN:
On
LAN
if
another user
using a resource required by the unlock

displays a Resource Conflict message.
is
at brief intervals.
procedure during
->
currently
While
this
message
displayed, DataBase automatically tries to execute the
command
Volume
is
command, DataBase
this time,
If you want to abort the

6-186

unlock (cont.)
When
LAN:
becomes
available,
DataEase
See Volume
procedure.
for
2,
Chapter
4.
conflicts
and Multi-User
Locking Options.
Usage:
The unlock command overrides
the default query processing
locking rules assigned by the database administrator.

In order to override the default locking rules, the first
statement of the query must be either lock

all
filesorms.
at the start
LAN
If neither
of these
all files or
commands
of the query, the default locking rules govern
command
commands are
functioning until a lock or unlock

All lock and unlock
query.
in the
unlock
appears
appears
automatically terminated at the end of a query.
Example:
lock form
for
INVOICES shared
CUSTOMERS
with
ORDER TOTAL > 500)
of
INVOICES
lock selected record
records
LAST NAME
(sum
list
ACCOUNT BALANCE
unlock selected record
end
for
CUSTOMERS
with (highest of
dated < 01/01/80)

delete records
INVOICES
end
tell DataEase: 1) Lock the INVOICES form so other users can
view records but cannot add, delete or modify INVOICES records during
This query
the processing of this procedure.
whose
2) Select all the
CUSTOMERS
records
INVOICES
records have a combined ORDER TOTAL greater

than $500. 3) Lock each record as it is selected for further processing.
related
For each record selected, list the customer's last name and account
BALANCE. After each record is listed, unlock the record before continuing
to the next part of the query.
Locking the INVOICES form at the start of this procedure prevents other
users from entering new records that might alter the sum of calculation.
Locking and unlocking each CUSTOMERS record as it is listed prevents
the ACCOUNT BALANCE information from being modified by another user.
6-187
Volume
DQL LEXICON
unlock db
Keyword: unlock db
Type:
Control
(unlock database)
See Also: lock, lock db, query

selection, unlock
Command
Purpose: The unlock db command

DataBase on a
LAN
is
when running
db
only functional
(Local Area Network). The unlock
cancels the effect of the lock
db command;
it
unlocks a
locked database.
Syntax:
unlock db
Returns:
confirmation message appears on the screen as soon as the
database
On
LAN:
unlocked.
is
LAN
if
another user
using a resource required by the unlock
is
currently
db command.

message
is
this
displayed. DataBase automatically tries to execute the
command
at brief intervals.
procedure during
When
this time,
If you want to abort the

becomes
available,
DataBase
automatically resumes processing and executes the rest of

the procedure.
See Volume
2.
Chapter
4.
System
dijference between the unlock
Processing command and the
unlock db Control command.

The unlock Processing
command can he used to
unlock individual forms or
records during a Processing
procedure. The unlock db
command is used to cancel the
effect of the lock db Control
command;
it
unlocks the
whole database.
Administration, for more information on resource conflicts
and Multi-User Locking Options.
Once
Usage:
a database
locked
who
user
Example:
until
lock
db
is
db command it remains
db command is executed or until the
lock db command exits from DataBase.
locked by the lock
an unlock
initiated the

unlock db
.
This query
tells
CUSTOMBRS
3)
When
DataBase:
1)
Lock
the current database.
2) Display the
form so an operator can enter new customer records.
the operator finishes entering records, run the
PRINT INVOICBS
procedure. 4) Unlock the current database.
Volume
6-188
upper
Keyword: upper
See Also:
Type:
Text Function
Purpose: The upper
firstc.firstlast.
firstw.jointext. lastc. lastfirst,

lastw. length, lower, midc,
function converts each letter in a text value to
midw.
textpos.
uppercase.
Syntax:
Returns:
upper(TEXT VALUE)
The
specified text value with
all
the letters in uppercase.
The upper function only affects the alphabetical letters A-Z.

Numeric values are noi converted to their Shift key
equivalents.
Examples: upper("DataEase")
Returns:
DATABASE
upper("Washington D.C.")
Returns:
WASHINGTON
D.C.
Upper(LAST NAME)
Returns the value
in the last name field in uppercase

type for every record that is processed. If a record
contains the value holmes in the last name field, the
function returns
6-189
HOLMES.
Volume
DQL LEXICON
value
Keyword:
value
Type:
Keyword
See Also: case, others
Purpose: The value keyword

syntax.
When
compares
is
component of
processing a case
the case
command
command, DataBase
the expression that follows case to each of the
statements specified by the keyword value in the order these
appear
query.
in the
comparison,
When DataBase
executes
it
reaches the
the actions
all
between
that value
statement and the next.

If
The keyword value
Interactive
none of the specified value comparisons are
true,
is

the case expression is
specified in High Level
first true
Mode.
DataBase
executes the actions specified after the keyword others. As
soon as the actions following any value or others statement

are executed, processing passes to the first action following
the
Syntax:
end command
for the case statement.
case (EXPRESSION)
COMPARISON
value
ACTION SERIES1.
[value
COMPARISON
ACTION SERIES
[value
COMPARISON N
2.1
ACTION SERIES N]
[others
OTHERS ACTION
SERIES.]
end
The case command
Usage:
requires a case expression, one

comparison value, and an end command. Subsequent value
others
is
used,
it
must follow
all
keyword
are optional.
If
the specified comparison
values.
Example:

value
"FRANK"
:
call
others
call
menu "MAIN"
end
This query tells DataBase: If the current user is Frank, display the
Administration menu. If the current user is anyone other than Frank,
display the
Volume
Main Menu.
6-190

variance
Keyword:
variance
Type:
Statistical
Operator
Purpose: The variance
mitt, std.dev., std.err..
operator calculates the average of the squared
mean
deviations from the
(the average of the squared
difference between each item value and the

set
of data. The result usually appears as a
summary
sum
mean
value)
in
statistic in the
area at the end of each group or the end of the
report.
Syntax:
VALUE
variance [other
Returns:
Usage:
Variance
statistical
operators]
numeric value.
is
used as an indicator of variability
The variance operator can
also be used in
in
a set of data.
Quick Reports. To
generate the variance in a Quick Report, type variance in the

selected
Example:
for
list
field area.
CUSTOMERS
with
records
LAST NAME in order
list
ACCOUNT BALANCE
end
item
mean sum
variance
have a value greater than $500 in the account balance field. 2) List the
customers by last name in alphabetical order. 3) List each customer's
ACCOUNT balance and include the mean, sum, and

account balance amounts in the report output.
The output from
LAST NAME
this
variance of
all
the
ACCOUNT BALANCE
Adams
$595.00
$725.00
$865.00
$525.00
$675.00
Cooper
Evans
Hill
Ivers
MEAN ACCOUNT BALANCE

SUM ACCOUNT BALANCE
VARIANCE
6-19!
IN
DATA SET
$677.00
$3,385.00
$16,870.00
Volume
LEXICON
DQL
variable
Keyword:
variable
Type:
Concept
See Also: assign, current,

define, global,
Purpose: A variable
is
a substitute for another value.
In a query, a variable
can be substituted for any expression
any type of
that returns a value or for

field.
Often a variable
is
field
except a Choice
used to store a numeric value that
can change during the processing of a procedure

running
total
temp
when adding
column of
value can be used like any other value
figures).
in the
(like a
The
query;
stored
it is
referenced by the variable's name.
The define command is used to create and name a variable.

The name of a variable can be any unique name you like, up
to 20 characters in length. The name must be enclosed in
quotes when it first appears in the define command.
Usage:
The assign command
value.
used to give a variable an
is
initial
variable can be assigned to hold any type of value
except a Choice field value.
The
status of a variable
is
either current, global or temporary.
The current system variables
are built-in variables that hold
commonly used system values such

time, current user name, etc.
2.
another. In order to
do
its
current
this, the
identically in each procedure in
3.
as current date,
variable must be defined
which
it
is
used.
temporary variable can only store a value during a single
procedure.
There
is
a separate entry
in this
lexicon for each of these
groups.
Volume
6-192
DAT
EASE REFERENCE MANUAL
weekday
Keyword: weekday
Type:
Date Function
See Also: current, date. day.

Julian, month, spelldate.
Purpose: The weekday
function converts a date value to an integer that
corresponds to the day of the week from
(Monday)
to 7
spellmonth. spellweekday,
year, yearday. yeanveek
(Sunday).
Syntax:
Returns:
weekday(DATE VALUE)
An
integer value
from
to 7.
Examples: weekday(l 2/31/89)

Returns: 7
spellweekday(weekday(1 2/31 /89))

Returns: Sunday
weekday(DATE)
Converts the value in the date field into an integer
from 1 to 7 for every record that is processed. If a
record contains the value 10/31/89 (a Tuesday),
6-193
Volume
DQL LEXICON
while
Keyword:
while
Type:
Procedural
Purpose: Like
the if
See Also: case, for,
Command
command,
the while
command
executes a series of
actions based on whether a specified condition
command,
the if
in
which actions
the while
command
if
is
Unlike
true.
creates a processing loop
are executed repeatedly as long as the
specified condition remains true.
When
processing reaches a while
command. DataBase
evaluates the condition that follows the keyword while.
condition
If the specified
is
true.
DataBase executes
keyword do
until
it
the
all
reaches the
corresponding end command.
DataBase then reevalutes the original condition.

condition
is still true,
again. If the condition
action
Syntax:
while
foUowine
the
If the
DataBase executes the do action

is
series
false, processing passes to the first
end command
for the while statement.
CONDITION do
ACTION
ACTION 2
1
ACTION N
end
Usage:
Brequently, a while
that
is
command
specifies an initial condition
modified during each pass through the loop
counter).
Any
reevaluated must be included in the loop
precede the end

>
Volume
(i.e.,
action that modifies the value to be
command
(i.e., it
must
that terminates the loop.)
This entry continue on the next page
6-194

while (cont.)
Example:
define
temp "SERIAL" Number
assign temp
SERIAL
:=
temp SERIAL < 1000 do

temp SERIAL := temp SERIAL +
while
list
records
jointext
("SYSTEM DISK
",
temp SERIAL)
end
This query
SERIAL.
tells
2)
DataEase:
1)
Give (assign) an

initial value of
to the SERIAL variable.
3) Print a series of labels joining the

that
is
labels,
5)
the current value of the
words
SERIAL
SYSTEM DISK
variable.
4)
to the
number
While printing the
increment the variable by one each time a new label is printed.

the value of the variable reaches 1000, stop printing labels.
When
The while command
tells DataEase to reevaluate the value of the variable

each time it prints a label. As long as that value is less than 1000,
DataEase prints another label. When the value of the variable reaches
1000, DataEase stops performing the action following the do keyword.
6-195
Volume
DQL LEXICON
with
Keyword: with
See Also: and,
Type:
Purpose: The with

a
Syntax:
form or
with
Usage:
operator specifies the criteria for selecting records
in
a relationship.
(SELECTION CRITERIA)
The with operator

all
or, Selection
Criteria
Operator
tells
DataBase
some rather than

The records that are
to process
the records in the specified form.
selected for processing are those that satisfy the selection

criteria that follow the
Example
1: for
This statement
CUSTOMERS
tells
2: delete
tells
relationship (the
Volume
$500
in the
CUSTOMERS
ACCOUNT balance
records in INVOICES
< 01/01/80)
with (DATE
This statement
with
that contain a value greater than
Example
with operator.
records
field.
named "OUTDATED"
DataBase: Delete the records in the "OUTDATED"

records that are dated before 01/01/1980).
INVOICES
6-196

year
Keyword: vear
Type:
Purpose: The year

Syntax:
Returns:
See Also: current, dale, day,
Date Function
function extracts the year from a date value.
yearday, yearweek
year(DATE VALUE)
An
integer value from
selected in
to 99 (inclusive). The date format

System Administration changes the date sequence
but does not affect which value
is
returned by a Date function.
Examples: year( 12/31/89)

Returns: 89 (North American Format)
year(31/12/89)
Returns: 89 (European Format)
year(89/12/31)
Returns: 89 (Metric Format)
year(DATE)
Converts the year portion of the value in the date field
into an integer from
to 99 for every record that is
processed. If a record contains the value 12/31/89 in
the DATE
6-197
field,
Volume
LEXICON
DQL
yearday
Keyword: yearday
See Also: current, date, day,
Type:
Date Function
Purpose: The yearday
function converts a date value to the Julian day
year, yearweek
of the year (1-366).
Syntax:
yearday(DATE VALUE)
Returns:
An
from to 366 (inclusive). The date format

integer value
selected in
but does not affect which value
is
returned by a Date function.
Examples: yearday(1 2/31/89)

Returns: 365 (North American Format)
yearday(31/12/89)
yearday(89/l2/31)
Returns:
365 (Metric Format)
yearday(DATE)
Converts the day portion of the value in the date field
into an integer from 1 to 366, representing the Julian
date, for every record that is processed. If a record
contains the value 12/31/88 (A Leap Year)
DATE field, the function returns 366.
Volume
in
the
6-198

yearweek
Keyword: yearweek
See Also: current, date, day,
Type:
Date Function
Purpose: The yearweek
function calculates the
week number
(1-53) of
year, yearday
a date value.
Syntax:
Returns:
yearweek(DATE VALUE)
An
from 1 to 53 (inclusive). The date format

but does not affect which value is returned by a Date function.
interger value
selected in
Usage:
This yearweek function always counts January
Week
1,
January 8th- 14th as
Year, the only day

Year,
in
December 30th
Week
is
Week
53
is
2. etc.
In a
December
also counted in
1st -7th as
non-Leap
31st. In a
Week
53
(all
Leap
dates
following February 28 are affected by leap year.)
Examples: yearweek(0 1/0 1/89)

Returns:
yearweek( 12/30/89)
Returns:
52 (North American Format)
yearweek(30/1 2/89)
yearweek(89/1 2/30)
Returns: 52 (Metric Format)
yearweek(DATE)
Converts the day portion of the value in the date field
into an integer from 1 to 53, representing the week of
the year, for every record that is processed. If a
record contains the value 12/30/87 (A Leap Year)
the date field, the function returns 53.
6-199
in
Volume 3

INDEX
Entries in this index are referenced hy the volume
number followed hy the page numher(s). For
example, the entry:
Database Status
1:4-2, 1:4-4- 1:4-6.3:6-57
means you can find information on database status in

Volume 1 on page 4-2 and pages 4-4 through 4-6 and
in Volume 3 on page 6-57.
Entries that contain the letters IG indicate that
information on that topic can also he found in the
Installation
and New Features Guide.
* multiplication sign
INDEX
=
3:6-16
(equal)
1:3-14
as a record selection operator
2:A-2
cache buffer
effect on performance
optimum
2:D-3
2:A-2
size
2:2-64, 2:2-73
calculate
call
menu
call
program
calling
2:3-3,3:6-35
3:6-36
menu
3:6-39,3:6-190
3:6-40
ceil
Chain menu
Change
3:6-16
2:3-3,2:3-8.2:3-29
the Database
Name
2:5-4. 2:5-57
1:1-3
chapter narrative sections
1:1-3
chapter reference sections
3:6-32
3:6-135
not
compatibility with version
3:1-3, 3:6-62
3:6-50
3:6-102
percent
3:6-144
configuration
See Define Configuration, System Configuration

context-sensitive help
control
Type
2:2-52
2:2-55
2:2-52
field
advantages
3:3-5. 3:6-45
1:1-4
commands
3:4-1.3:6-46
backup db
3:6-31
2:3-9
call
menu
2:2-55
call
program
2:2-54
db
2:2-102- 2:2-104
changing choice order
3:6-44
item
1:4-27
Choice Description
3:6-43
count
Check Data Disk

Choice
3:6-63.
3:6-194-3:6-195
constant value
3:6-35
3:6-36-3:6-37
3:6-57
status
3:6-90
import
2-55
install
2-55
lock
during field definition
2-52
record entry
3:6-156
during Import
5-14
reorganize
3:6-159
2-53
restore
2-55
run procedure
choice
1:,
choice
2: etc.
choice numbers
during Record Entryl :2-5.
:2-34
:2-35
entering choice values

in report
2-55
ordering
2-53
limitations
2:2-55.2:2-102- 2:2-104
modify
2:2-102- 2:2-104
modifying choice values
optional choice type
name
2:2-54
2:2-52 -2:2-53
selecting a choice
Columnar format
:3-4.
:3-28.
:3-35
1:3-36
3:5-4-3:5-5,3:5-8 -3:5-11
group headers and
trailers
line length
spacing
statistics
commands
3:5-12. 1:3-36
3:5-9. 1:3-36
3:5-8
3:5-12
3:4-1
list
3:4-1
restrictions
3:4-1
types
3:4-1
comments
comparison operators
< (less than)
<=
2:4-27
conditional statistical operators
2:4-33
Choice
2.
conditional processing
characters per inch
Field
3:6-17
or equal to)
between
2:3-12
3:4-14-3:4-15,3:6-38
case
3:6-37
> (greater than)

>= (greater than
(less than or equal to)
3:6-17,3:6-41
3:3-5,3:6-15,3:6-42
3:6-15
3:6-15
3:6-99
appl
3:6-113-3:6-114
db
3:6-161
db
3:6-162
3:6-188
unlock db
2:3-3.3:1-3.3:4-1.
control procedure
3:4-21 -3:4-24,3:6-46
High
level
3:4-2
example
2:4-34
control strings
convert an application
2:5-56
2:5-37, 2:5-46
2:5-46
conversion procedure
dBASE
files
2:5-37. 2:5-46
2:5-56
2:5-49
converted
2:5-56
installing a converted application
Lotus 1-2-3
Lotus
Symphony
2:5-56
2:5-37.2:5-46
2:5-37, 2:5-46
2:5-56
2:5-55
messages displayed during conversion
2:5-37. 2:5-46 2:5-56
Paradox
performing the conversion

selecting Lotus ranges to convert
2:5-54
selecting the files to convert
2:5-51
specifying the source directory
2:5-50
2:5-52
converting a Quick Report to a
DQL Procedure
1:3-50
1:3-51

copy block

grouping

processing
commands
INDEX
exception
2:2-100
files
2:5-16
during Import
3:6-67
exit
EXIT menu
in
Form
in
Record Entry
Definition
exp
expanded memory
effect on performance
use of
2 2-18
1
2-18
3 6-68
2:A-3, 2:D-3
2:A-3
1:3-4
1:3-28,3:5-5.3:5-27
Export formats
DIE
3:5-27, 3:5-39
Fixed Length ASCII

Lotus 1-2-3
3:5-27, 3:5-35
MailMerge
3:5-27
MultiMate
Variable Length ASCII
WordPerfect
3:5-27.3:5-30
3:5-36-3:5-37
3:5-27,3:5-31 -3:5-32
3:5-27
exporting data
set
2:2-26
calls
2:A-3
extended character
program
3:5-38
3:5-33-3:5-34
GrafTalk
field
1:2-17-
1:1-7.
Export
external
2:2-17

Field Per Line tornia

greater than or equal to
INDEX
inconsistent form

Load Procedure

for forms
2:2-14
nested actions
3:4-6,3:6-134
1:3-3. 1:3-20
order
ordering
3:6-135
in
null value
3:6-33
others
NUM LOCK key
1:1-16
output
not
1:3-20
Quick Reports
3:6-38,3 :6-138
3:5-1.3:5-40,3 5-59,
Number
3:6-
2 2-45
Type
Number field
compared
2 2-46
2:2-45
to
2 2-46
Numeric String
digits of precision
2:
2:5-14, 2:5-26
during Import
2-45
2 5-27
Fixed Point
2:
2-45
2 2-45
Floating Point
in
139-3:6-143,3 :6-l60
See also Define Format
3 6-52
current page
Field
1:3-13
as a record selection operator
naming conventions
Record Entry
2-34
2 2-45
Integer
2 2-97
2 2-45
modify
system provided characters
3:5-53. 3:5-69
page break
page dimensions
page length
page numbering
3:5-70.3:5-76
3:5-76
3:6-52
in a report
3:5-69
page size
page width
3:5-76
2:3-23
parameter substitution
1:1-16
description of
1:1-8- 1:1-9
2:2-21
paste text
3:6-144
percent
Numeric String
Field Type
2:2-43
2:2-43
formatted
2:2-44
2:2-44
2:2-44
other format
phone no.
2:2-43
soc. sec. no.
2:2-43
2:2-44
special punctuation
Numeric String field

compared to Number
2:2-43
2:2-44. 2:2-46
2:2-46
field
2:5-14
during import
2:2-44
in calculations
Record Entry
modify
1:2-32
in
:2-33
2:2-97
2:3-24
2:4-19
parity
password
numeric keypad
2:D-1 -2:D-3
performance factors
3:6-145
periods
2:2-10
permanent relationships
number
when defining configuration
power
port
2:4-17
3:6-146
3:5-2
predefined format
2:2-10.2:2-109
Predefined Relationship
3:6-147
presentvalue
Prevent Data-entry field 2:2-5. 2:2 -35.2:2-70-2:2-71

1:2-5. 1:2-40
in Record Entry
2:2-100
modify
1:2-42-
primary form
:2-44, 1:3-8. 1:3-22
3:3-3-3:3- 4,3:6-148.3:6-164
form definition
example
print
2:5-6
One-time Import
3:6-42-3:6-44,3:6-136
operators
assignment
3:6-14
boolean
3:6-25
comparison
grouping
3:6-15- 3:6-17
3:6-81
3:6-82.3:6-91
3:6-93
sorting
optional choice type
name
optional relationship
names
XV
Print Report Definition
1:3-2. 1:3-5- 1:3-6
1:3-49
an example
in
1:3-48
Quick Reports
print style specification
3:5-1.3:5-70-3:5-82
CPI spacing
3:5-78
default margin settings
3:5-77
default typestyle settings
3:5-78
2:2-54
disk
2:2-105.2 :2-109.
examples
2:2-127
2::2-129
highlights
3:^
:6-i37
in
2:2-87
3:2-4. 3:2-27
3:6-94
3:6-22. 3:6-26
relational
or
3:6-92
3:6-25
logical
Print Procedure Definition
2:2-86-2:2-87
1:3-4,1:3-39,1: 3-41,3:5-73.3:5-82
Quick Reports
3:5-80
3:5-82
3:5-78
1:3-4

protected
mode
INDEX
optional relationship
specifying ranges as
1:3-13
selection criteria
Text fields
wild card characters
See also selection
2:2-10
1:3-12
predefined
1:3-12
relationship levels
specifying form
2:2-10,2:2 109,3:6-158
3:6-148
form
using more than three Match
view a relationship
Relationships form
1:2-79
1:2-77, 1:2-79
lock nothing
:2-77- 1:2-78
lock records
record separator character

recovering a deleted field
2:5-22
2:2-95
renaming a database
2:5-4, 2:5-57
3:6-159
1:2-70,2:2-10-2:2-11.
reorganize a form
2:2-132-2:2-133.2:2-138
in
LAN
1:2-44, 1:3-22
1:2-42
relational database
relational database
-).
'
3:3-9
any
Derivation Formulas
3:3-10. 3:4-1
1.
3:4-20
shared
3:6-22
report definition
DOS
named
relational statistical operators
highest of
lowest of
mean of
sum of
3:6-121
relationship concepts
form names
relationships
active
ad-hoc
definition
delete a relationship
form names
in a lookup formula
levels
many-to-one
Match fields
modify a relationship
:3-32
3:5-6.3:5-42.3:6-160
1:3-29
1:3-4,1:3-28. 1:3-35-1:3-36
Columnar
Custom
1:3-4. 1:3-24
1:3-4, 1:3-24
3:6-179
Export
Formatting
_.--iu^
Field Per Line
1:3-4,1:3-28
2:2-1 12
GrafTalk Chart
1:3-4,1:3-28
3:6-158
long:text fields
1:2-45.2:2-111
2:2-10.2:2-109,3:4-12,
3:6-20-3:6-21.3:6-158
advantages
between forms
3:5-
active function keys
3:6-84
3:6-118
2:5-3
3:5-70-3:5-76
report formats
3:6-51
count of
file
report field definition
3:6-157
1:3-52
1:3-52- 1:3-53
filename extension
report destination
2:2-68
3:6-132-3:6-133
one-to-many
1:2-81
exclusive
"^
3:6-26
name
2:2-23
'
all
relationship
2:2-132
report data locking rules
management system
definition
in
2:2-133
replace a field
1:1-4
Relational Operators
2:2-138
considerations
procedure
when to reorganize
1:3-17
definition
1:3-17
2:5-4. 2:5-58
1:2-78
refresh
2:2-125
2:2-130
reorganize
2:2-110.2:2-116-2:2-126
form
Quick Reports
2:2-111
fields
the Database
Remove
1:2-9
recovering deleted records
related
2:2-112
names
the Relationships
record selection locking rules

lock files
2:2-129
permanent
1:3-15
criteria
referential integrity
2:2-127
names
2:2-109
2:2-10
2:2-10.2:2-109
- -
Commands
1:3-24
1:3-4, 1:3-28
Commands
See also Formatting
3:6-164
REPORT menu
-''
'
2:2-113-2:2-115
2:2-130
TO.
109
-- '"^
3:3-1
1:3-27,3:5-42,
3:5-49,3:5-51
30
report margins
1:3-4,1:3-28
system defined
Template
See also Format
7
_._-ii2:2-65
0-'>
2:2-42
1:3-4, 1:3-28
Mailing Labels
Record Entry
Report Formatting
1:3-27,1:3-29
in
Commands
3:5-77
Record Entry
1:2-17, 1:2-26
report ordering
for
Choice
report output
report spacing
fields
2:2-55
3:2-14
3:5-78
XVlll

report statistics
7.1:1-9
user restrictions
name
when changing a database
when defining menus
when defining users
when removing a Database
selection criteria
starting
2:5-4
2:3-6
command
Start-up menu
2:4-8
statistical
2:5-4
item
3:6-119
max
mean
3:6-120
min
3:6-176
std.dev.
3:6-177
std.err.
3:6-178
3-3-2. 3:3-4. 3:3-11.
3:6-165.3.6-196
2-2-64. 2:2-66
sequence
sequenced fields
1:2-82
9-4-19-2:4-21
serial printer port
pnnters
a note about serial
2.4-19
stop bits
word length
2:4-19
1:1-7
1:1-7
signing on
3:6-166
sin
3:6-167
sort
2:A-4
memory
in
in
Soundex search
source form
l-->-8.
1:2-58-1:2-60
3:5-12
procedures
Quick Reports
2:3-17
as a function type
1:3-21
Quick Reports
in
deviation
See also standard
in
1:3-21
Quick Reports
See also standard error
Subform
special effects
2:4-34
2:4-34
spelldate
spellmonth
spellnumber
spellweekday
1:3-14
3:6-169
3:3-10.3:4-
3:6-169
in
3:6-172
spellnumber
3:6-173
spellweekday
3:6-174
sqrt
3:6-176
standard deviation
3:6-177
3:2-3. 3:2-6
2:2-28
1:3-3.3:6-178
Quick Reports
suppress zero padding
3:6-171
2:2-31
2-2-27
1:3-21
in
3:6-173
spellmonth
New Procedure
New Report
2:2-28
sum
3:6-172
spelldate
Start
2:2-28
Subform Definition screen
sum of
summary
3:6-171
3:6-170
Start
2:2-28
modify
3:6-170
spellcurrency
standard error
2:2-28
2:2-
Custom Form
examples
spellcurrency
2:4-19
2:2-9. 2:2-27
Automatic Form
Automatic Table
special 2
spell functions
1:3-3.3:6-177
std.err.
2:4-34
selection criteria
specifying ranges as
1:4-4.1:4-11
1:3-3.3:6-176
std.dev.
special 2
1-4^,1:4-12-1:4-13
Import Specifications
Procedures
stop bits
special
1-4-4.1:4-7-1:4-10
Forms
9-5.3 ^-5-10.2:5-13.2:5-17.2:5-32
-^ ^- - 2:4-34
2:3-17
Status report
2:4-34
special
1:3-20-1:3-21
status
3:3-7
operators
sorting and grouping
3:6-126
statistics
3-6-94. 3:6-168
sorting
3-6-101-3:6-102
3:6-157
2:4-19
sinh
3:6-175
operators
3:6-191
protocol
screen
2:3-5.2:4-12
variance
2:4-19
On
9-3-"'
2:4-19
baud
Sign
line options
sum
2:4-19
parity
IG. 1:1-9
2:4-20
additional questions
rate
DataBase
2:3-7
V4-13. 3:4-20. 3:6-179

3:5-52
report
7-9-46. 2:4-28
Numeric Strings
3:3-13
syntax scan
Svstem Administration
1:1-14.2:4-1
4-14 2:4-16-2:4-27,
Define Configuration
Define Printers
Define Screen Styles
2.4-35
2:4-34
2:4-37
2:4-42
2:4-7 -2:4-8.2:4-11
Define Users
screen
System Configuration
2:4-36
2:4-32
2:4-13
2:4-14
1:3-3.1:3-10.3:4-1
XX

System
t'omis
1:2-
Configuration
Dictionary
DOS
filenames
Record Entry
in
Menus
Printers
Relationships
Screen Styles
status
Users
System menus
access from a custom menu
TABLE menu
in
Record Entry
Table View
cursor
movement keys
of records
in
file
tan
tanh
target form
temp
Template format
temporary variable
tertiary
form
Text
delete
Type
Field
Text
field
during Import
in
Record Entry
maximum
length
modify
multiple line
valid data
text functions
firstc
first last
firstw
jointext
lastc
lastfirst
lastw
length
lower
midc
3
1
:3-4.
1:2-2, 1:2-14, 1:4-8,
INDEX
unlock db
3:6-188
in
indexed order
2:3-26
in
order saved
2:5-13
in related
as a function type
update matching
3:6-189
upper
Upper Limit
2:2-6.
;:2-35.
2:2-72
formula syntax
using
Lookup
in
formulas
Record Entry
2-76
modify
view
2:4-6
user
mode
2-55
1:2-8
2-45
2-51
virtual field
2-61
2:2-70 -2:2-71. 2:2-99
-100
w
weekday
3:6-193
3:6-62.3:6-194-3:6-195
while
wild card character
*
menu
1:2-7, 1:2-57. 1:3-12
1:2-57. 1:2-62.3:6-6
1:2-57. 1:2-62
1:2-57,3:6-7
2:3-3,2:3-12-2:3-13
name
2-51
:2-53
view last record

viewing a particular number record
for an indexed search
2:3
:2-23,
using ad-hoc multiforms
2:4-6
as a function type
31.
2-44
2-38
4-26
encryption
1:2-421
2-38
:2-6.
:2-25,
order
field
Users form
user
:2-8.
searching in unchecked
2:2-73
entering valid data
file
2-52
2:2-74
2:2-73
valid formulas
in
2-62
1:2-22,1:2-51-
searching for a particular record
2:2-74
for limits
Upper/Lower Limit
:2-8,
2:2-74
2:2-100
modify
using constants
forms
in reverse
''-52
file
1
IG, 1:1-1,2:1-1
upgrade information
user
displaying a table of records in a
1:4-3. 1:4-33
unlock database
''-23
by record number
3:6-186-3:6-187
unlock
search limitations
1:1-8- 1:1-9
1:2-57
1:2-57.3:6-8
user password
2:4-7
limitations
when changing the database name

when removing a database
2:5-57
2:5-58
user-defined forms
1:2-1
1:4-7. 1:4-10
status report
wild card search
window menu
1:2-7,1:2-57
2:2-33
3:3-4,3:4-3,3:4-19,3:6-196
with
word
length
WordPerfect
export format
2:4-19
3:5-31 -3:5-32
utilities
2:3-20
as a function type
work area
Write Security
1:1-18
2:2-6,2:2-35,
2:2-75-2:2-76, 1:2-41
value
:6-190
3:6-38,
Variable Length ASCII export format 3:5-36

variables
assign
3:5-37
:6-192
3:4-8.
command
3:6-28
3:6-52
current
define
3:6-59
global
3:4-8, 3:6-80, 3 6-192
3:4-8,3:6-182,3 6-192
temporary
3 6-191
variance
Quick Reports
view a form
1:3-21
in
View
Security
viewing a field definition

Viewing Imports
viewing records
2:2-9
1:2-41, 2:2-6. 2:2-35. 2:2-75
year
3:6-197
yearday
3:6-198
yearweek
Yes or No
3:6-199
Field Type
Yes or No field
as a Choice field
in Record Entry
2:2-51
valid entries
2:2-51
2:2-51
2:2-51
1:2-5
2:2-76
2:2-7. 2:2-95
2:5-30
1:2-7. 1:2-51
2-52
xxii
Addendum
The following pages contain
Volume
additional documentation for subjects
DataBase Reference Manual. Each

subject covered in this addendum references the related chapter in
the first paragraph and employs the same stylistic conventions as
covered
in
3 of the
that chapter.
Addendum

Addendum - CrossView Format
DataEase 4.0 includes a ninth output format for use with

DataBase's new business analysis product, CrossView.
This addendum describes the CrossView format. For more
information on using DQL formats, see Chapter 5, Define
Format/ Print Style, in Volume 3 of the DataEase Reference
Manual. For more information on using CrossView, see the
CrossView Tutorial and Reference Manual.
The CrossView format is the last choice on the Formats menu,

which is accessed through the Define Format option of the DQL
menu. The CrossView format lets you easily gather information
stored in DataEase and apply the multidimensional analytical power
of DataEase CrossView to it. To use this format, the DataEase and
CrossView program files must be installed in separate directories,
and both programs must be located
in the
DOS PATH.
The CrossView format automatically sends data generated by a

Quick Report or DQL Procedure to CrossView, so you can analyze
that data on the CrossView Display Screen. For example, suppose
you've defined a DQL Procedure that lists each customer's full
NAME, ACCOUNT BALANCE. ADDRESS, CITY, STATE, and ZIP CODE. The
query looks like this:
Query
for
CUSTOMERS
list
records
FULL NAME
ADDRESS
CITY
STATE
ZIP
ACCOUNT BALANCE
end
CrossView
lets
you quickly analyze data from
different
Assume you want to

group and analyze these statistics by account balance, city.
STATE, or ZIP CODE. Instead of defining a new query using the
DQL grouping commands, you can send the data generated by this
perspectives without rerunning the report.
procedure directly to CrossView and use its page and hyperpage

dimensions to group and display the data for detailed analysis.
Addendum

Addendum - CrossView Format
When you
CrossView
select the
output format that includes a
A sample
(cont.)
format, DataEase produces an
.call
command
to invoke
format for the preceding procedure
is
CrossView.
shown below:
Format
.items
end
.call
prexvu
%m
The transformation is performed by a special CrossView program

named PREXVU (the program specified in the .call command on
the last line of the format). If you edit the DataEase format, do not
change this line. The
parameter creates a temporary filename
for the output and passes this name to PREXVU. This temporary
file is automatically erased when the data is transformed
%m
When CrossView
is
invoked, DataEase temporarily relinquishes
CrossView and the output is automatically transformed

into CrossView format. You can then use CrossView to analyze
the DataEase output just like any other CrossView data file.
control to
When you
press
ESC
to exit
CrossView, you are automatically
returned to DataEase.
Addendum
DataBase
VOLUME
DataBase Query Language Guide
The DOL Reference Guide is a comprehensive

guide to the DataBase Query Language (DOL),
the command language that lets you access
every DataBase operation

all available
through our celebrated interactive menu system.
Combining powerful control, processing, and
procedural commands; relational operators; and
a broad array of math, financial, and text
processing functions; the DOL lets you automate
entire business systems, including: accounting,
invoicing, billing, order-entry
POS operations,
and inventory management The DOL Reference

Guide contains a detailed explanation of every
command in the DataBase Query Language. In
addition, it includes a full-length example of
a
complex invoicing application.
^^ DataBase
INTERNATIONAL
Revised
90

DataEase Reference Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

DataEase Reference Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

VOLUME

where the various DataEase

and Database Maintenance

View or Modify a Form

Administration are discussed

DQL Advanced Processing is

DataEase Main Menu

DataEase International Inc.

out and send in the enclosed

registration card. Technical support for unregistered callers

30 days from the date of purchase. DataEase International reserves the

The DataEase Hotline number

1-203-374-2825. Our hours are

9AM to 8PM, and Friday, 9AM

YOU MUST BE REGISTERED TO RECEIVE FREE TECHNICAL

Copyright and Trademarks

a registered trademark of International Business

The following companies hold trademarks on product names

which are mentioned

Ashton-Tate: dBASE II dBASE III dBASE

Borland International: Paradox

WordPerfect Corporation: WordPerfect

part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval

written permission of the publisher.

Copyright 1988, 1989, 990 DataEa.se International

All rights reserved.

Printed in the U.S.A.

DQL Advanced Processing

Defining, Modifying, and

QUICK SUMMARY OF THE DQL MENU OPTIONS

THE BASIC DQL VOCABULARY

Display the Data-entry Form

Creating the Data-entry Forni

Using the Data-entry Form

Saving the Data-entry Form

Modifying the Data-entry Form

How to Switch Modes

THE PURPOSE OF THE QUERY; A REPORT

HIGH LEVEL DQL COMMANDS

for the Post Orders Procedure

Explanation of the Query

Saving the Procedure

for the Calculate Discount Procedure

Explanation of the Query

PROCEDURE 3: PRINT INVOICES

for the Print Invoices Procedure

Explanation of the Query

THE CONTROL PROCEDURE: MAILORDER

Order Control Procedure

Explanation of the Control Procedure

Define Format/Print Style: Designing Report Output

QUICK SUMMARY OF THE FORMAT MENU OPTIONS

Field per Line Format

Record Entry Format

GrafTalk Chart Format

Mailing Labels Format

Group Level Formatting Commands

DATAEASE REFERENCE MANUAL

Adding and Modifying Fields

DEHNE PRINT STYLE

Print Style Specification

Defining the Report Destination

Print Style Modification

DQL Advanced Processing